9,67$%
&RPPHUFLDO%XUJODU\
3DUWLWLRQHG6HFXULW\6\VWHP
ZLWK6FKHGXOLQJ
,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH
*
ALARM
CHECK
FIRE
AWAY
STAY
INSTANT
BYPASS
NO AC
CHIME
BAT
ARMED
READY
NOT READY
OFF
AWAY
STAY
1
2
3
TEST
BYPASS
MAX
4
5
6
INSTANT
CODE
CHIME
7
8
9
0
#
READY
*
PANIC
®
.
K3271V1 9/00
.
ii
Table of Contents
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
List of Figures ................................................................................................................ viii
Conventions Used in This Manual.................................................................................ix
SECTION 1
General Description ............................................................. 1-1
General .............................................................................................................................................................1-1
Features............................................................................................................................................................1-1
SECTION 2
Planning a Partitioned System .......................................... 2-1
Theory of Partitioning .....................................................................................................................................2-1
Setting Up a Partitioned System ....................................................................................................................2-2
Common Lobby Logic ......................................................................................................................................2-2
Master Keypad Setup and Operation .............................................................................................................2-5
SECTION 3
False Alarm Reduction Features........................................ 3-1
General Information........................................................................................................................................3-1
Exit Error Logic and Related Reports ............................................................................................................3-1
Recent Close Report .........................................................................................................................................3-1
Exit Delay Reset...............................................................................................................................................3-2
Cross Zoning ....................................................................................................................................................3-2
Call Waiting Defeat Logic ...............................................................................................................................3-3
SECTION 4
Installing The Control ......................................................... 4-1
Mounting the Control Cabinet ........................................................................................................................4-1
Installing the Cabinet Lock.............................................................................................................................4-1
Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing.............................................................................................................4-2
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing ..................................................................................................4-3
Installing The Control's Circuit Board ..........................................................................................................4-3
AC Transformer and Battery ..........................................................................................................................4-4
Panel Earth Ground Connections...................................................................................................................4-4
SECTION 5
Installing The Keypads ........................................................ 5-1
Keypads That May Be Used ............................................................................................................................5-1
Wiring to the Keypads .....................................................................................................................................5-1
Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional Keypads .........................................................5-2
Mounting the Keypads.....................................................................................................................................5-2
Addressing the Keypads ..................................................................................................................................5-3
SECTION 6
Basic Hardwired Zones 001-009 .......................................... 6-1
Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones 1-9.........................................................................................6-1
Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-9 ..........................................................................................6-1
Installing 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zone 1 .................................................................................................6-2
Installing 4-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1-8 ............................................................................................6-3
Installing 2-Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8..........................................................................6-4
SECTION 7
2-Wire Polling Loop Expansion........................................... 7-1
Polling Loop Overview.....................................................................................................................................7-1
Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones ............................................................................................7-1
Installing RPM Devices...................................................................................................................................7-1
Polling Loop Supervision ................................................................................................................................7-6
iii
Table of Contents
SECTION 8
Wireless Zone Expansion ..................................................... 8-1
Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones ...................................................................................................8-1
RF System Operation and Supervision ..........................................................................................................8-1
RF System Installation Advisories .................................................................................................................8-2
Installation and Setup of the 5881 RF Receivers...........................................................................................8-3
Installing the 5800TM Module .......................................................................................................................8-4
House ID Sniffer Mode ....................................................................................................................................8-4
5800 Series Transmitter Setup .......................................................................................................................8-5
Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters ............................................................................................................8-6
SECTION 9
Output Devices ...................................................................... 9-1
General Information........................................................................................................................................9-1
Installing the 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules............................................................................................9-2
Installing the FSA Modules ............................................................................................................................9-4
Wiring the 4300 Transformer .........................................................................................................................9-4
Programming Output Devices.........................................................................................................................9-5
SECTION 10
4285/4286 VIP Module ......................................................... 10-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................10-1
Mounting the VIP Module.............................................................................................................................10-2
Wiring the VIP Module..................................................................................................................................10-2
SECTION 11
Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) Unit.............................. 11-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................11-1
AAV Module Operation .................................................................................................................................11-1
Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections ...........................................................................................11-2
Audio Alarm Verification Module Program Options...................................................................................11-3
SECTION 12
J7 Trigger Outputs ............................................................. 12-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................12-1
Ground Start Operation................................................................................................................................12-2
Remote Keypad Sounder ...............................................................................................................................12-3
Remote Keyswitch ..........................................................................................................................................12-3
Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) Equipment ...............................................................................................12-5
Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment........................................................................................................12-5
Event Log Printer ..........................................................................................................................................12-6
SECTION 13
Long Range Radio (ECP) ................................................... 13-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................13-1
Wiring the Long Range Radio ......................................................................................................................13-2
Programming for the Long Range Radio .....................................................................................................13-2
Trouble Messages...........................................................................................................................................13-2
SECTION 14
Access Control ..................................................................... 14-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................14-1
Access Control Using VistaKey .....................................................................................................................14-1
Access Control Using the PassPoint Access Control System .......................................................................14-5
Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point Using VistaKey or PassPoint ........................................................14-6
Using the VISTA-128B for Stand-alone Access Control..............................................................................14-8
SECTION 15
External Sounders .............................................................. 15-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................15-1
Alarm Output Supervision............................................................................................................................15-2
Installing Alarm Indicating Devices to the Alarm Output .........................................................................15-3
iv
Table of Contents
SECTION 16
Event Log Options ............................................................... 16-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................16-1
Event Log Printer Connections .....................................................................................................................16-1
Programming Event Log Options .................................................................................................................16-2
Event Logging Procedures.............................................................................................................................16-3
SECTION 17
4100APG Pager Interface................................................... 17-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................17-1
Mounting the 4100APG .................................................................................................................................17-1
Wiring the 4100APG......................................................................................................................................17-2
Programming the Control for the Pager.......................................................................................................17-4
4100APG LED Indications............................................................................................................................17-4
SECTION 18
Final Power-Up Procedure ................................................ 18-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................18-1
Earth Ground Considerations ......................................................................................................................18-2
Connecting the Transformer .........................................................................................................................18-2
Programming Power and AC Options..........................................................................................................18-3
Determining the Control Panel Power Supply Load ...................................................................................18-4
Determining the Size of the Standby Battery...............................................................................................18-6
SECTION 19
The Mechanics of Programming....................................... 19-1
Using Data Field Program Mode..................................................................................................................19-1
Entering Data Field Programming Mode ....................................................................................................19-1
Moving from One Page of Programming to Another ...................................................................................19-2
Viewing Data Fields ......................................................................................................................................19-2
Entry Errors...................................................................................................................................................19-2
Programming System-Wide Data Fields......................................................................................................19-2
Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields ..............................................................................................19-3
#93 Menu Mode Programming .....................................................................................................................19-4
SECTION 20
Zone Type Definitions......................................................... 20-1
Zone Number Designations...........................................................................................................................20-1
Zone Type Definitions....................................................................................................................................20-1
SECTION 21
Zone Index/Zone Type Defaults ......................................... 21-1
Zone Index......................................................................................................................................................21-1
Zone Type Defaults ........................................................................................................................................21-2
SECTION 22
Data Field Descriptions ..................................................... 22-1
SECTION 23
#93 Menu Mode Programming........................................... 23-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................23-1
SECTION 24
Scheduling Options ............................................................ 24-1
Introduction to Scheduling ...........................................................................................................................24-1
Time Window Definitions..............................................................................................................................24-3
Open/Close Definitions .................................................................................................................................24-4
Scheduling Menu Mode.................................................................................................................................24-6
Scheduling Menu Structure ..........................................................................................................................24-7
Time Windows ...............................................................................................................................................24-8
Daily Open/Close Schedules ........................................................................................................................24-9
Holiday Schedules .......................................................................................................................................24-10
Time-Driven Events.....................................................................................................................................24-10
Limitation of Access Schedules ...................................................................................................................24-16
v
Table of Contents
Temporary Schedules ..................................................................................................................................24-17
User Scheduling Menu Mode ......................................................................................................................24-19
SECTION 25
System Communication...................................................... 25-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................25-1
Telephone Line Connections..........................................................................................................................25-1
Reporting Formats.........................................................................................................................................25-2
SECTION 26
Downloading Primer .......................................................... 26-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................26-1
Getting On-Line with a Control Panel .........................................................................................................26-2
On-Line Control Functions ...........................................................................................................................26-2
Access Security...............................................................................................................................................26-3
Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct Wire Downloading .....................................................................26-3
SECTION 27
Setting The Real-Time Clock............................................. 27-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................27-1
Setting the Time and Date ............................................................................................................................27-1
SECTION 28
User Access Codes................................................................ 28-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................28-1
User Codes & Levels of Authority .................................................................................................................28-1
Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code.............................................................................................28-4
Changing a Master, Manager, or Operator Code ........................................................................................28-6
Adding an RF Key to an Existing User ........................................................................................................28-6
Deleting a Master, Manager, or Operator Code ...........................................................................................28-6
To EXIT the User Edit Mode.........................................................................................................................28-6
SECTION 29
Keypad Functions ............................................................... 29-1
General Information......................................................................................................................................29-1
Arming Commands .......................................................................................................................................29-1
Access Control ................................................................................................................................................29-3
Delaying Closing Time ..................................................................................................................................29-3
Partition "GOTO" Commands ......................................................................................................................29-3
Viewing Capabilities of a User .....................................................................................................................29-4
Viewing Zone Descriptors..............................................................................................................................29-4
Viewing Downloaded Messages ....................................................................................................................29-4
Using the Built-in User’s Manual.................................................................................................................29-4
Panic Keys......................................................................................................................................................29-4
Speed Key [D] (Macros) .................................................................................................................................29-5
Manual Relay Activation Mode (#70 Mode) .................................................................................................29-6
Instant Activation Mode (#77 Mode) ............................................................................................................29-7
SECTION 30
Testing The System ............................................................. 30-1
Battery Test ....................................................................................................................................................30-1
Dialer Test......................................................................................................................................................30-1
Burglary Walk-Test (Code + TEST [5]) ........................................................................................................30-1
Armed Burglary System Test ........................................................................................................................30-2
Testing Wireless Zones ..................................................................................................................................30-2
Trouble Conditions ........................................................................................................................................30-3
Turning the System Over to the User ...........................................................................................................30-5
To the Installer ..............................................................................................................................................30-5
vi
Table of Contents
APPENDIX A
Regulatory Agency Statements .......................................... A-1
UL Installation Requirements ....................................................................................................................... A-1
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault ............................................. A-1
UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm.......................................................................................... A-1
UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm........................................................................................ A-2
California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) and UL Residential Fire Battery Backup Requirements............. A-2
APPENDIX B
DIP Switch Tables ............................................................... B-1
APPENDIX C
Summary of System Commands ......................................... C-1
APPENDIX D
Specifications ....................................................................... D-1
Index......................................................................................................................... Index-1
THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM
ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY
vii
List of Figures
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Figure 4-1:
Figure 4-2:
Figure 4-3:
Figure 5-1:
Figure 5-2:
Figure 6-1:
Figure 6-2:
Figure 6-3:
Figure 6-4.
Figure 7-1:
Figure 7-2:
Figure 7-3.
Figure 8-1.
Figure 9-1:
Figure 9-2:
Figure 9-3:
Figure 9-4:
Figure 10-1:
Figure 11-1:
Figure 11-2:
Figure 11-3:
Figure 12-1.
Figure 12-2:
Figure 12-3:
Figure 12-4:
Figure 12-5:
Figure 12-6:
Figure 12-7:
Figure 13-1.
Figure 14-1:
Figure 14-2:
Figure 15-1:
Figure 15-2:
Figure 16-1.
Figure 17-1:
Figure 17-2:
Figure 18-1:
Figure 18-2:
Figure 25-1:
Figure 26-1.
viii
Installing the Lock ..........................................................................................................................4-1
Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations ....................................................................................4-2
Mounting the PC Board ..................................................................................................................4-3
Keypad Connections to Control Panel. ...........................................................................................5-2
Using A Supplementary Power Supply For Keypads....................................................................5-2
Wiring Connections for Zones 1-9...................................................................................................6-2
2-Wire Smoke Detector Connected to Zone 1..................................................................................6-3
4-Wire Smoke Detector Connections (Zones 1-8)............................................................................6-4
Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8 ..........................................................................6-5
Polling Loop Connections to the VISTA-128B ...............................................................................7-5
Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module ......................................................7-5
Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules ......................................................7-6
5881 RF Receiver (cover removed) ..................................................................................................8-3
4204 Relay Module ..........................................................................................................................9-3
4204CF Relay Module .....................................................................................................................9-3
Wiring the FSA Module ..................................................................................................................9-4
4300 Wiring Connections ................................................................................................................9-5
4285/4286 VIP Module Connections............................................................................................10-3
AAV Connections Using the J7 Trigger .......................................................................................11-2
AAV Connections Using a 4204 Relay Module ............................................................................11-3
AAV and 4286 VIP Module Connections Using the J7 Trigger ..................................................11-3
J7 Pin Assignments and Functions..............................................................................................12-1
Ground Start Module Connections...............................................................................................12-2
Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring ..................................................................................................12-3
Remote Keyswitch Wiring .............................................................................................................12-4
Connections to 7720 Long Range Radios .....................................................................................12-5
Connections to 7920SELong Range Radios .................................................................................12-6
Connections to 7720ULF Long Range Radio...............................................................................12-6
Wiring Long Range Radio to Keypad Terminals ........................................................................13-2
Wiring the VistaKey ......................................................................................................................14-3
Wiring the Vista Gateway Module ...............................................................................................14-6
Wiring Polarized Fire Indicating Devices....................................................................................15-3
Wiring Nonpolarized Burglary Indicating Devices.....................................................................15-4
Event Log Printer Connections .....................................................................................................16-2
Wiring the 4100APG Without the Serial Printer .........................................................................17-2
Wiring the 4100APG With the Serial Printer ..............................................................................17-3
1321 Transformer and Battery Connections................................................................................18-3
4300 Transformer Connections.....................................................................................................18-3
Standard Telephone Line Connections ........................................................................................25-1
Direct Wire Downloading Connections ........................................................................................26-4
Summary of Connections Diagram .......................................................................Inside Back Cover
Conventions Used in This Manual
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Before you begin using this manual, it is important that you understand the meaning of the following
symbols (icons).
UL
These notes include specific information which must be followed if you are installing this system for
a UL Listed application.
These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing with the installation,
and which, if not observed, could result in operational difficulties.
This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of the system, or could
cause damage to the system. Please read each warning carefully. This symbol also denotes
warnings about physical harm to the user.
Enter Zn Num.
00 = Quit
✴00
Many system options are programmed in an interactive mode by responding to alpha
keypad display prompts. These prompts are shown in a single-line box.
When programming the system, data fields are indicated by a “star” (✴) followed by
the data field number.
PRODUCT MODEL NUMBERS: Unless noted otherwise, references to specific model numbers represent
ADEMCO products.
ix
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
x
S E C T I O N
1
General Description
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General
♦ Features
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General
The VISTA-128B is an 8-partition, UL commercial burglary control panel that supports up to
128 zones using basic hardwired, polling loop, and wireless zones. It also includes zones for
supervision of bells, phone lines, keypads, RF Receivers, and relays. In addition, the control
offers scheduling capabilities and allows certain operations to be automated by pressing a
single button. The system has the capability to interface with an ECP long range radio unit
that can send Contact ID messages and an alpha numeric paging device. The control can be
connected to the ADEMCO PassPoint system (via the Vista Gateway Module) or a VistaKey
module (via the polling loop) to provide a fully integrated security and access control system.
Features
Basic Hardwired Zones
Provides 9 style-B hardwire zones with the following characteristics:
•
EOLR supervision (optional for zones 2-8) supporting N.O. or N.C. sensors
(EOLR supervision required for fire and UL burglary installations)
•
Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions
•
Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors on zone 1
•
4-wire smoke or heat detectors on zones 1-8 (power to 4-wire smoke detectors must be
supervised with an EOL device)
•
Up to 50 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8
Optional Expansion Zones
Polling Loop Expansion
Supports up to 120 additional hardwire zones using a built-in polling (multiplex) loop
interface. Current draw can total up to 128mA. Polling loop zones have the following
characteristics:
•
Must use RPM (Remote Point Module) devices
•
Supervised by control panel
•
Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions
1-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Wireless Expansion
Supports up to 128 wireless zones using 5881 type RF receiver (fewer if using hardwire
and/or polling loop zones). Wireless zones have the following characteristics:
UL
•
Supervised by control panel for check-in signals (except certain nonsupervised
transmitters)
•
Tamper protection for supervised transmitters
•
Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions
Wireless devices may not be used in UL commercial burglary installations.
For specific information regarding number of wireless zones supported, see the section Wireless
Zone Expansion later in this manual.
System Zones
Provides zones for supervision of all peripheral devices (keypads, RF receivers, and relay
modules) and individual relays, as well as system zones (RF receivers and keypad panics).
Zone assignments are as follows:
Individual Relay Zones
601-632
Peripheral Device Zones
800-831
System Zones
988-999
(See the Zone Index/Zone Type Defaults section for a full explanation of these zones and
specific zone assignments.)
8 Partitions
Provides the ability to control 8 separate areas independently, each functioning as if it had
its own separate control. Partitioning features include:
1-2
•
A Common Lobby partition (1-8), which can be programmed to arm automatically when
the last partition that shares the common lobby is armed and to disarm when the first
partition that shares the common lobby is disarmed
•
A Master partition (9), used strictly to assign keypads for the purpose of viewing the
status of all 8 partitions at the same time (master keypads)
•
All zones assignable to one of 8 partitions
•
Keypads assignable to one of 8 partitions or to Master partition 9 to view system status
•
Ability to assign relays to one or all 8 partitions
•
Ability to display fire and/or burglary and panic and/or trouble conditions at all other
partitions’ keypads (selectable option)
•
Certain system options selectable for each partition, such as entry/exit delay and
subscriber account number
Section 1 – General Description
User Codes
Accommodates 150 user codes, all of which can operate any or all partitions. Certain
characteristics must be assigned to each user code, which are as follows:
•
Authority level (Master, Manager, or several other Operator levels)
•
Opening/Closing central station reporting option
•
What partitions the code can operate
•
Global arming capability (ability to arm all partitions the code has access to in one
command)
•
Use of an RF (button) to arm and disarm the system (RF key must first be enrolled into
the system)
Peripheral Devices
Supports up to 31 addressable devices, which can be any combination of keypads (6139), RF
receivers (5881), relay modules (4204/4204CF), and 4285/4286 VIP module. Peripheral
devices have the following characteristics:
•
Each device set to an individual address (physically) according to the device's
instructions
•
Each device enabled in the system using Device Programming (covered later in this
manual)
At least one 2-line alpha keypad (6139) must be connected to the system for programming (if
using keypad programming) and must remain connected to the system in order to allow the
primary user to program additional user codes into the system at a later time.
Keypad Panic Keys
Accommodates three keypad panic keys: 1 + ✴ (A), ✴ + # (B), and 3 + # (C).
•
Designated as zones 995 (1 + ✴), 996 (3 + #), and 999 (✴ + #)
•
Activated by wired and wireless keypads
•
Activated and reported separately by partition, distinguished by subscriber account
number (or partition number if Contact ID reporting is used)
Keypad Macros
Accommodates 32 keypad macro commands per system (each macro is a series of keypad
commands). For example, by pressing either the A, B, C, or D key, the system can be
programmed to log onto another partition, bypass Zones 2 and 3, and arm that partition in
the AWAY mode (explained in detail later in this manual). Characteristics of keypad macros
are:
•
Assignable to the A, B, and C keys by partition
•
Other macros, (not assigned to these keys) executed by using the D key
•
Each macro can be 32 characters (keystrokes) in length
Optional Output Devices
Accommodates the use of 96 outputs using ADEMCO's 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules, Fire
System Annunciators (FSA-8, FSA-24), V-Plex Relay Modules and Powerline Carrier Devices
(X-10). Each 4204 module provides four Form C relays for general purpose use. Each
4204CF provides two style-Y supervised bell outputs. The FSA-8 provides 8 LED outputs
and the FSA-24 provides 24 LED outputs.
1-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
The outputs have the following characteristics:
•
Can be programmed to activate in response to system events
•
Can be programmed to activate using time intervals
•
Can be used for style-Y supervised bell outputs (4204CF only)
•
Can be activated manually using the #70 Relay Command Mode
•
Can be activated instantly using the #77 Command Mode
•
Can be supervised by control panel (zones 601-632)
•
1-32 can have an alpha descriptor assigned to it
Optional Vista Interactive Phone Module
Supports the ADEMCO 4285/4286 VIP Module. This permits access to the security system to
do the following:
UL
•
Obtain system status information
•
Arm and disarm security system
•
Control relays
The 4285/4286 VIP Module is not Listed for use with the VISTA-128B Control Panel in a UL
commercial installation.
Access Control
If programmed, provides users with a command that activates relays to open access doors
(e.g., lobby door). Each partition can be assigned to an access control relay.
By using one Vista Gateway Module (VGM), the control can be connected to the ADEMCO
PassPoint system for a fully integrated access control system.
The VistaKey module may also be used for access control. It is a single-door access control
module that, when connected to the VISTA-128B, provides access control to the protected
premises. The system can support up to 8 VistaKey modules (8 access points) and up to 250
access cards.
UL
The access control function is not Listed for use with the VISTA-128B Control Panel in a UL
commercial installation.
Optional Keyswitch
Supports the ADEMCO 4146 Keyswitch on any one of the system's 8 partitions. If used, zone
7 is no longer available as a protection zone.
Voltage Triggers
Provides a trigger connector whose pins change state for different conditions. Used with
LRR (Long Range Radio) equipment or other devices such as a remote keypad sounder,
keyswitch ARMED and READY LEDs, or a printer to print the system's event log.
1-4
Section 1 – General Description
Event Log
Keeps a log of different event types (enabled in programming). The event log has the
following characteristics:
•
Stores up to 512 events
•
Can be viewed at the keypad or through the use of Compass software
•
Can be printed on a serial printer using a 4100SM Module including zone alpha
descriptors
•
Can store PassPoint events
•
Printed events can be sent to an alpha numeric pager
Scheduling
Provides the following scheduling capabilities:
•
Open/close schedules (for control of arming/disarming and reporting)
•
Holiday schedules (allows different time windows for open/close schedules)
•
Timed events (for activation of relays, auto-bypassing and unbypassing, auto-arming and
disarming, etc.)
•
Access schedules (for limiting system access to users by time)
•
End User Output Programming Mode (provides 20 timers for relay control)
Communication Formats
Supports the following formats for the primary and secondary central station receivers:
•
ADEMCO Low Speed (Standard or Expanded)
•
Sescoa/Radionics
•
ADEMCO Express
•
ADEMCO High Speed
•
ADEMCO Contact ID
•
Long Range Radio interface (ECP)
Audio Alarm Verification Option
Provides a programmable Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) option which can be used in
conjunction with an output relay to permit voice dialog between an operator at the central
station and a person at the premises. An optional AAV unit, such as Eagle model 1250, is
required.
UL
The Eagle Model 1250 AAV unit is not UL Listed.
Cross-Zoning Capability
Helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone from going into alarm unless its cross-zone
is also faulted within 5 minutes.
Exit Error False Alarm Prevention Feature
•
System can tell the difference between a regular alarm and an alarm caused by leaving
an entry/exit door open. If not subsequently disarmed, faulted E/E zone(s) and/or interior
zones will be bypassed and the system will arm.
•
Generates an Exit Error report by user and by zone to the central station.
1-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Built-in User's Manual and Descriptor Review
For end-user convenience, the VISTA-128B contains a built-in User’s Manual. By depressing
any of the function keys on the keypad for 5 seconds, a brief explanation of that function
scrolls across the alpha-numeric display. In addition, all programmed zone descriptors can
be displayed (one at a time) by pressing the READY key for 5 seconds. This serves as a check
for installers to be sure all descriptors are entered properly.
Improved Downloading Features
•
Uploads and downloads at 300 baud, making upload/download speed faster.
•
Ability to upload ECP devices, their physical addresses, programmed addresses, and
firmware revision levels from the control.
Agency Listings
Burglary
1-6
•
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises and Mercantile Safe and Vault
•
UL611/UL1610 Grades A, AA Central Station
•
UL365 Grades A, AA Police Connect
S E C T I O N
2
Planning a Partitioned System
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ Theory of Partitioning
♦ Common Lobby Logic
♦ Setting Up a Partitioned System
♦ Master Keypad Setup and Operation
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Theory of Partitioning
This system provides the ability to arm and disarm up to 8 different areas, as if each had its
own control. These areas are called partitions. Partitions are used to disarm certain areas
while leaving other areas armed, or to limit access to certain areas to specific individuals.
Each system user can be assigned to operate any or all partitions, and can be given a
different authority level in each.
Before anything can be assigned to those partitions, you must first determine how many
partitions (1-8) are required.
Following are some facts you need to know about partitioning.
Keypads
Each keypad must be given a unique "address" and be assigned to one partition (it can also
be assigned to Partition 9 if Master keypad operation is desired. (See “Master Keypad Setup
and Operation” later in this section).
Zones
Each zone must be assigned to one partition.
The zones assigned to a partition will be displayed on that partition's keypad(s).
Users
Each user may be given access to one or more partitions. If a user is to operate more than
one partition and would like to arm/disarm all or some of those partitions with a single
command, the user must be enabled for Global Arming for those partitions (when entering
user codes).
A user with access to more than one partition (multiple access) can "log on" to one partition
from another partition's keypad, provided that program field 2*18: Enable GOTO is enabled
for each partition he/she wants to log on to from another.
A partition can be selected as a "common lobby" partition, and other partitions can affect this
partition by causing arming/disarming of this partition to be automated (see “Common Lobby
Logic” later in this section).
2-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Setting Up a Partitioned System
The basic steps to setting up a partitioned system are described below. If you need more
information on how to program the prescribed options, see The Mechanics of Programming,
section as well as each corresponding section's programming procedure.
To setup a partitioned system perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Determine how many partitions the system will consist of (programmed in field
2✳00).
2
Assign keypads to partitions (Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode).
3
Assign zones to partitions (Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode).
4
Confirm zones are displayed at the keypad(s) assigned to those partitions.
5
Assign users to partitions.
6
Enable the GOTO feature (program field 2✳18) for each partition a multipleaccess user can log on to (alpha keypad only).
7
Program partition-specific fields (see the Data Field Descriptions section).
Common Lobby Logic
When an installation consists of a partition shared by users of other partitions in a building,
that shared partition may be assigned as the "common lobby" partition for the system
(program field 1✳17). An example of this might be in a medical building where there are two
doctors’ offices and a common entrance area (see example that follows explanation).
This option employs logic for automatic arming and disarming of the common lobby. Two
programming fields affect the way the common lobby will react relative to the status of other
partitions. They are: 1✳18 Affects Lobby and 1✳19 Arms Lobby.
1✳18 Affects Lobby (must be programmed by partition)
Setting this option to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of
the common lobby as follows:
•
When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby will also be
disarmed.
•
The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is
armed.
•
Arming the last partition that affects the lobby will not cause the system to automatically
attempt to arm the lobby.
1*19 Arms Lobby (must be programmed by partition)
Setting this option to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of
the common lobby as follows:
2-2
•
When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby will also be
disarmed.
•
The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is
armed.
•
Arming the last partition that is programmed to arm the lobby will cause the system to
automatically attempt to arm the lobby. If any faults exist in the lobby partition, or
another partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby cannot be armed, and the
message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" will be displayed.
Section 2 – Planning a Partitioned System
You cannot select a partition to "arm" the lobby unless it has first been selected to "affect" the
lobby. Enable field 1*18 before enabling field 1*19.
The following chart sums up how the common lobby partition will operate, if different options
are set for another partition in fields 1*18 and 1*19.
1*18
1*19
Affects Lobby
Arms Lobby
Disarms when
partition
disarms?
Attempts to arm
when partition
arms?
Can be armed if
other partitions
disarmed?
0
0
NO
NO
YES
1
0
YES
NO
NO
1
1
YES
YES
NO
0
1
---ENTRY NOT ALLOWED---
Example:
Here is an example of how the lobby would react in a typical setup.
OFFICE #1
OFFICE #2
COMMON LOBBY
MAIN ENTRANCE
User #1 has access to Office #1 and the Common Lobby.
User #2 has access to Office #2 and the Common Lobby.
Office #1 is set up to affect the Common Lobby, but not arm it.
Office #2 is set up to affect and arm the Common Lobby.
2-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
In the tables below, the notations in parentheses ( ) indicate the current status of the other
partition when the user takes action.
Sequence #1:
Office 1
Office 2
Lobby Action
User #1:
Disarms
(Armed)
Disarms
User #2:
(Disarmed)
Disarms
No Change
User #1:
Arms
(Disarmed)
No change
User #2:
(Armed)
Arms
Arms
Office 1
Office 2
Lobby Action
User #2:
(Armed)
Disarms
Disarms
User #1:
Disarms
(Disarmed)
(No change)
User #2:
(Disarmed)
Arms
No Change
User #1:
Arms
(Armed)
No Change
Sequence #2:
Notice that in sequence #1, since Office #2 was the last to arm, the lobby also armed (Office
#2 is programmed to affect and arm the lobby). In sequence #2, the lobby could not arm
when Office #2 armed, because Office #1, which affects the lobby, was still disarmed.
When Office #1 armed, the lobby still did not arm because Office #1 was not programmed to
arm the lobby. User #1 would have to arm the lobby manually. Therefore, you would want
to program a partition to affect and arm the lobby, if the users of that partition are expected
to be the last to leave the building.
How User Access Codes Affect the Common Lobby
Codes with Global Arming
If a code is given "global arming" when it is defined (see the User Access Codes section), the
keypad will ask "Arm all?" or "Disarm all?" whenever the user tries to arm or disarm the
partitions he has access to from an alpha keypad. This allows the user to choose the
partitions to be armed or disarmed, and so eliminates the "automatic" operation of the lobby.
Keep in mind, however, that if attempting to arm all, and another "affecting" partition is
disarmed, the user will not be able to arm the lobby, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM
LOBBY PARTITION" will be displayed.
Codes with Non-Global Arming
If arming with a non-global code, the lobby partition operation will be automatic, as
described by fields 1*18 and 1*19.
Other Methods of Arming/Disarming
Lobby logic remains active when arming or disarming a partition that affects and/or arms the
common lobby in one of the following manners:
2-4
•
Quick-Arm
•
Keyswitch
•
Wireless Button
•
Wireless Keypad
Section 2 – Planning a Partitioned System
Arming/Disarming Remotely
If arming or disarming remotely (through Compass downloading software), the lobby will not
automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby. The
lobby must be armed separately, after arming all affecting partitions first.
Auto-Arming/Disarming
If scheduling is used to automatically arm and/or disarm partitions, the common lobby
partition will not automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm or
disarm the lobby. The lobby must be included as a partition to be armed/disarmed and must
be scheduled as the last partition armed.
If using auto-arming, make sure that the Auto-Arm Delay and Auto-Arm Warning periods (fields
2*05 and 2*06) combined are longer than that of any other partition that affects the lobby. This
will cause the lobby to arm last.
Master Keypad Setup and Operation
Although this system has eight actual partitions, it provides an extra partition strictly for the
purpose of assigning keypads as Master keypads for the system.
Any keypad assigned to Partition 9 in Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode will make
that keypad a master keypad. A master keypad reflects the status of the entire system
(Partitions 1-8) on its display at one time. This is useful because it eliminates the need for a
building security officer to have to log on to various partitions from one partition's keypad to
find out where an alarm has occurred.
The following is a typical display:
SYSTEM 12345678
STATUS RRNNA ✴B
Possible status indications include:
A = Armed Away
M = Armed Maximum
S = Armed Stay
I = Armed Instant
R = Ready
N = Not Ready
B = Bypassed/Ready
✴ = Alarm Memory/Trouble present
To obtain more information regarding a particular partition, enter ✴ + [Partition No.] (i.e.,
✴4). This will allow viewing only of that partition. In order to affect that partition, the user
must use a code that has access to that partition. Also, in order for a user of any partition to
log on to Partition 9 to view the status of all partitions, that user must have access to all
partitions. Otherwise, access will be denied.
The following would be displayed for a fault condition on Zone 2 (Loading Dock Window) on
Partition 1 (Warehouse) when logging on from a keypad on Partition 9:
WHSE DISARMED
HIT ✴ FOR FAULTS
Pressing ✴ will cause the following display to appear at Partition 1's keypad(s):
FAULT 002 LOADING
DOCK WINDOW
2-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Additional zone faults will be displayed one at a time. To display a new partition's status,
press ✴ + [Partition No.].
The Armed LED on a master keypad will be lit only if all partitions have been armed
successfully. The Ready LED will be lit only if all partitions are "ready to arm." Neither
LED will be lit if only some partitions are armed and/or only some partitions are ready.
The sounder on a master keypad will reflect the sound of the most critical condition on all of
the partitions. The priority of the sounds is as follows:
1. Pulsing fire alarm sounds
2. Steady burglar alarm sounds
3. Trouble sounds (rapid beeping)
Silence the sounder by pressing any key on the master keypad or a keypad on the partition
where the condition exists.
A master keypad uses the same panics as Partition 1. Master keypad panics are sent to Partition
1, and will activate on Partition 1. Therefore, panics must be programmed for Partition 1.
2-6
S E C T I O N
3
False Alarm Reduction Features
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Exit Delay Reset
♦ Exit Error Logic and Related Reports
♦ Cross-Zoning
♦ Recent Close Report
♦ Call Waiting Defeat Logic
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
This control supports features that help minimize false alarms. Most false alarms occur upon
exiting the premises, either due to environmental factors, or because the zone's resistance to
the control may be on the edge of acceptability. We call this condition a "swinger."
Features which prevent false alarms due to these circumstances are:
• Exit Error Logic and related reports
• Exit Delay Reset
• Cross-Zoning
Exit Error Logic and Related Reports
UL
This feature is not suitable for use on a UL commercial burglary installation.
This feature is intended to reduce the incidence of false alarms due to exit doors that are left
open after the exit delay has expired. If this feature is enabled in program field 1*20, the
following will occur:
At the end of the exit delay, if a door is left open or an interior zone is faulted, the system will
start the entry delay period, and will sound the bell(s), siren(s) and keypad sounders for the
duration of entry delay. This gives the user time to re-enter the premises and disarm the
system before exit error occurs.
If the user does not re-enter the premises and disarm the system, the system will bypass the
faulted entry/exit and/or interior zone(s). The rest of the system will be armed. In addition,
the following dialer reports will be sent to the central station if programmed:
•
Exit Error by User (not sent if using ADEMCO High Speed format)
•
Exit Error by Zone (Sent as regular alarm if using ADEMCO High Speed format)
•
Bypass reports
Recent Close Report
Another report, designed to notify the central station that an alarm has occurred within 5
minutes of arming, is called the Recent Close report. This report, as well as the Exit Error
reports, are programmed in Report Code Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
3-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Exit Delay Reset
UL
This feature is not suitable for use on a UL commercial burglary installation.
This feature is designed to allow an operator to re-enter the premises to retrieve a forgotten
item without triggering an alarm. This feature is enabled in program field 1*21, and works
in the following way:
When the panel is armed, the normal exit delay begins. After the user exits and the door
closes, the exit delay time is reset to 60 seconds. If, within this 60-second period, the entry
door is re-opened, the panel will restart the exit delay sequence using the programmed exit
delay time. This feature will only be activated once after arming.
Cross Zoning
UL
This feature is not suitable for use on a UL commercial burglary installation.
The Cross-Zoning feature is designed so that a combination of two zones must be faulted
within a 5 minute period of each other to cause an alarm on either zone. This prevents
momentary faults from one of the zones causing an alarm condition. You can select four
"sets" of cross-zones, keeping in mind the following:
•
Both must protect the same area.
•
Both must be in the same partition.
•
A fire zone must only be crossed to another fire zone protecting the same physical area
(see warning below).
Note: The four sets of cross-zones are programmed in data fields 1*22, 1*23, 1*24, and 1*25.
DO NOT cross-zone a fire zone with a burglary zone under any circumstance. A fire zone must
only be crossed to another fire zone and BOTH must be protecting the same physical area (no
walls or partitions separating them). Consult NFPA 72 standard for exact spacing requirements.
As a guideline, we recommend that spacing between fire cross-zones be no farther than 30 ft.
Conditions That Affect Cross-Zone Operation
3-2
•
In the event of a continuous fault (lasting at least 5 minutes) on one of the paired zones, a
fault on the second zone will cause an alarm immediately.
•
If one of the zones in a pair is bypassed or has a zone response type set to 0, the crosszoning feature will not apply.
•
If an entry/exit zone is paired with an interior follower zone, be sure to enter the
entry/exit zone as the first zone of the pair. This will ensure that the entry delay time is
started before the follower zone is processed.
•
If a relay is programmed to activate on a fault of one of the zones, the relay will activate
without the other zone being faulted.
•
If a relay is programmed to activate on either an alarm or trouble, both zones must trip
before the relay will activate, and both zones must restore for the relay to deactivate (if
relay is programmed to deactivate on a Zone List Restore).
Section 3 – False Alarm Reduction Features
Call Waiting Defeat Logic
Although this option does not directly prevent false alarms, it may prevent the central
station from taking action on a potential false alarm. After the panel's initial call to report
the alarm, the panel may attempt to make an additional call, perhaps for a cancel or a zone
restoral. If Call Waiting is not defeated, an operator at the central station attempting to
contact the premises (to verify whether the alarm is valid) would hear the phone ringing
indefinitely and have to dispatch on the call.
This option, enabled in program field 1*42, attempts to defeat Call Waiting on the first
outgoing call attempt to both the primary and secondary numbers. It does this by dialing a
special sequence preceding the phone number (but after the PABX number). The panel will
dial *70 if using TouchTone and 1170 if using rotary.
The panel does not attempt to defeat Call Waiting on each call attempt, because the phone
company may not complete the call if the sequence is dialed on a phone line that does not have
Call Waiting.
3-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
3-4
S E C T I O N
4
Installing The Control
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ Mounting the Control Cabinet
♦ Installing the Control’s Circuit Board
♦ Installing the Cabinet Lock
♦ AC Transformer and Battery
♦ Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing
♦ Panel Earth Ground Connections
♦ Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Mounting the Control Cabinet
•
Mount the control cabinet to a sturdy wall using fasteners or anchors (not supplied) in a
clean, dry area which is not readily accessible to the general public. The back of the
control cabinet has 4 holes for this purpose.
•
Before mounting the circuit board, remove the metal knockouts for the wiring entry that
you will be using. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE
CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN INSTALLED.
Installing the Cabinet Lock
Use an ADEMCO No. N6277 Cam Lock and No. P3422-2 Clip for universal commercial
cabinet.
To install the cabinet lock, perform the
following steps:
Step
Action
1
Insert the key into the lock.
Position the lock in the hole
making certain that the
latch will make contact
with the latch bracket
when the door is closed.
2
While holding the lock
steady, insert the retainer
clip into the retainer slots.
RETAINER CLIP
(NOTE POSITION)
LOCKED
RETAINER
CLIP
RETAINER
SLOTS
UNLOCKED
CABINET DOOR BOTTOM
Figure 4-1: Installing the Lock
4-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
UL
To provide certificated burglary service for UL installations, refer to the special requirements and
Figure 4-2 Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations to follow.
Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing
For a Grade A Mercantile Premises listing, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
The panel door must be supervised. Mount the clip-on tamper switch
(supplied) to the cabinet's right side wall as shown in figure 4-2. Wire it to one of
the hardwire zones.
2
Use a bell with a tamper-protected housing such as the ADEMCO AB12.
The bell housing's tamper switch and inner tamper linings must also be wired to
the hardwire zone.
3
Assign the hardwire zone to a burglary partition. Program the hardwire
zone for day trouble/night alarm (zone type 5) when only one burglary partition
is used. Program it for 24-hr. audible alarm (zone type 7) when more than one
burglary partition is used.
4
All wiring between the bell and panel must be run in conduit. Remaining
wires do not need to be run in conduit.
5
All wiring which is not run in conduit must exit from the knockout
openings on the bottom or back of the cabinet.
6
All unused knockouts must be plugged using the disc plugs and carriage
bolts (supplied), as indicated in figure 4-2.
7
Fasten the cabinet door to the cabinet backbox using the 18 one-inch-long
Philips-head screws (supplied) after all wiring, programming and checkout
procedures have been completed.
CABINET ATTACK RESISTANCE CONSIDERATIONS
(Shows typical local Grade A listing installation)
RUN BELL WIRES
IN CONDUIT
PLUG THIS
KNOCK-OUT
▲
CLIP-ON DOOR
TAMPER SWITCH
▲
▲
1
▲
▲
PLUG THIS
KNOCK-OUT
CABINET
MOUNTING HOLE
(4 PLACES)
▲
C-COM
PCB
1
PLUG THIS
KNOCK-OUT
TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING, REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND
INSTALL A PAIR OF DISC PLUGS AND A CARRIAGE BOLT AS SHOWN:
DISC PLUGS (DIMPLES IN DISC
PLUG SHOULD REGISTER INSIDE
KNOCK-OUT OPENING
▲
KNOCK-OUT
OPENING
▲
▲
RUN ALL REMAINING
WIRES THRU HERE
CARRIAGE BOLT
▲
PLUG THIS
KNOCK-OUT
▲
HEX NUT AND
LOCK WASHER
▲
▲
CABINET SIDEWALL
(OUTSIDE)
Figure 4-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations
4-2
Section 4 - Installing The Control
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing
For a Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault listing, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Follow the instructions given above for Mercantile Premises listing.
2
Mount a shock sensor such as Sentrol No. 5402 to the control's backbox. Follow
the manufacturer's instructions for proper sensor mounting. This sensor also
must be wired to a hardwire zone.
3
For safe and vault applications, a UL Listed contact must be used inside the
cabinet through one of the knockouts for pry-off tamper purposes. This sensor
also must be wired to a hardwire zone.
Installing The Control's Circuit Board
To install the control’s circuit board, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Hang the three mounting clips on the raised cabinet tabs. Make sure the clip
orientation is exactly as shown in figure 4-3 to avoid damage to the clip when
mounting screws are tightened. This will also avoid problems with insertion and
removal of the PC board.
2
Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots at the top of the cabinet. Make
certain that the board rests in the slots as indicated.
3
Swing the base of the board into the mounting clips and secure the board to the
cabinet with the accompanying screws.
Make certain that the mounting screws are tight. This ensures that there is a good ground
connection between the PC board and the cabinet. Also, dress field wiring away from the
microprocessor (center) section of the PC board. Use the 2 loops on the left and right sidewalls
of the cabinet for anchoring field wiring using tie wraps. These steps are important to minimize the
risk of panel RF interference with television reception.
DETAIL A
SIDE VIEW OF
BOARD INSERTED
INTO SLOTS
+
+
+
DETAIL B
SIDE VIEW OF SHORT
MOUNTING CLIPS
(TYP.)
hi_end_mnt-PCB
Figure 4-3: Mounting the PC Board
4-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
AC Transformer and Battery
This product uses the 1361 transformer (1361CN in Canada). We recommend wiring all
zones and expansion modules according to each section's instructions before powering up the
system for programming and testing. Refer to the Final Power-Up Procedure section for
specific instructions on how to connect the transformer and backup battery.
If using Powerline Carrier devices, the 4300 transformer interface must be used instead of
the regular 1361 transformer. The 4300 supplies the control panel with AC, and also sends
control pulses through the premises electrical system to control the Powerline Carrier
devices. Refer to the Final Power Up Procedure for specific instructions on how to connect
the 4300 transformer.
Refer to the Final Power-Up Procedure section for battery standby calculations and battery
selection table.
Panel Earth Ground Connections
In order for the lightning transient protective devices in this product to be effective, the
designated earth ground terminal (terminal 30) must be terminated in a good earth ground.
Recommended wire gauge for the ground connection is #16 AWG run no further than 30 feet.
The following are examples of good earth grounds available at most installations:
•
Metal Cold Water Pipe: Use a non-corrosive metal strap (copper is recommended)
firmly secured to the pipe to which the ground lead is electrically connected and secured.
•
AC Power Outlet Ground: Available from 3-prong, 120VAC, power outlets only. To test
the integrity of the ground terminal, use a three-wire circuit tester with neon lamp
indicators, such as the UL-Listed Ideal Model 61-035, or equivalent, available at most
electrical supply stores.
The panel requires this connection in order for its lightning transient protection devices.
4-4
S E C T I O N
5
Installing The Keypads
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ Keypads That May Be Used
♦ Mounting the Keypads
♦ Wiring to the Keypads
♦ Addressing the Keypads
♦ Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power
Additional Keypads
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Keypads That May Be Used
•
ADEMCO 2-line alpha display keypads.
•
Up to 16 addressable keypads may be used in the system, independent of auxiliary power
considerations (you may need to use an auxiliary power supply if the 750mA aux. output
is exceeded)
Wiring to the Keypads
•
The length of all wire runs combined must not exceed 2000 feet when unshielded quad
conductor cable is used (1000 feet if unshielded cable is run in conduit or if shielded cable is
used).
•
If more than one keypad is wired to a run, then the above maximum lengths must be divided
by the number of keypads on the run (e.g., the maximum length is 225 feet if two keypads are
wired on a #22 gauge run).
To wire the keypads to the control, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Determine wire gauge by referring to the following wiring length/gauge table:
Wire Run Length Table
Wire Gauge
Length
#22 gauge
450 feet
#20 gauge
700 feet
#18 gauge
1100 feet
#16 gauge
1750 feet
2
Wire keypads to a single wire run or connect individual keypads to separate wire
runs. The maximum wire run length from the control to a keypad, which is
homerun back to the control must not exceed the lengths listed in the table.
3
Run field wiring from the control to the keypads (using standard 4-conductor
cable of the wire gauge determined in step 1).
4
Connect the keypad(s) to terminals 6, 7, 8, & 9 on the control board, as shown in
Figure 5-1.
5-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
6
RED
BLACK
7
KEYPADS
GREEN
8
9
YELLOW
CONTROL
TERMINALS
Figure 5-1: Keypad Connections to Control Panel.
Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional Keypads
The control provides 750mA auxiliary standby power for powering keypads and other devices
from the auxiliary power output. When the control’s auxiliary power load for all devices
exceeds 750mA, you can power additional keypads from a regulated, 12VDC power supply
(e.g., Alarm-Saf Model AS/PS5-BFS-12-UL). Use a UL Listed, battery-backed supply for UL
installations.
Connect the additional keypads as shown in Figure 5-2, using the keypad wire colors shown.
Be sure to observe the current ratings for the power supply used.
1. Make connections directly to the screw terminals as shown in Figure 5-2. Make no connection
to the keypad blue wire (if present).
2. Be sure to connect the negative (–) terminal on the power supply unit to terminal 7 (AUX –) on
the control.
SUPPLEMENTARY
POWER SUPPLY
TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE
TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE
TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE
TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE
IMPORTANT:
MAKE THESE
CONNECTIONS
DIRECTLY TO
SCREW
TERMINALS AS
SHOWN.
TO KEYPAD RED WIRE
CONTROL
TERMINAL STRIP
AUX AUX.DATA DATA
+
–
IN
OUT
6
7
8
9
–
TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE
TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE
TO KEYPAD RED WIRE
+
IMPORTANT:
Make connections directly to screw
terminals. Make no connection to the
keypad blue wire (if present).
Figure 5-2: Using A Supplementary Power Supply For Keypads
Mounting the Keypads
Mount the keypads at a height that is convenient for the user. Refer to the instructions
provided with the keypad for mounting procedure.
You can either surface-mount or flush-mount keypads (using the 6139TRK Trim Ring Kit).
Refer to the mounting instructions and template included with the keypad and/or trim ring
kit for specific information.
5-2
Section 5 - Installing The Keypads
Addressing the Keypads
•
The keypads will not operate until they are physically addressed and enabled in the system's
Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
Each keypad must be assigned a different address.
•
To address the keypads, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Power up the system temporarily. Use a fully charged 12VDC battery.
2
Set each keypad to an individual address (00-30) according to the keypad's
instructions. Set one keypad for address 00 and other keypads for higher
addresses (01 is enabled in the system's default program).
Note: Any keypads set for address 02 and above will appear blank until they are
enabled in the system's program.
Keypads set to the Nonaddressable Mode (address 31) will interfere with other keypads (as well as
other devices) connected to the keypad terminals.
If an “OPEN CIRCUIT” message is present on the keypad, data from the control is not reaching the
keypad. Please check your wiring.
5-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
5-4
S E C T I O N
6
Basic Hardwired Zones 001-009
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones 1-9
♦ Installing 4-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1-8
♦ Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-9
♦ Installing 2-Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors
to Zone 8
♦ Installing 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zone 1
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones 1-9
•
EOLR supervision (optional for zones 2-8) supporting N.O. or N.C. sensors (EOLR
supervision required for fire and UL Burglary installations)
•
Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions
•
Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors on zone 1
•
4-wire smoke or heat detectors on zones 1-8 (power to 4-wire smoke detectors must be
supervised with an EOL device)
•
Up to 50 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8
Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-9
To wire 2-wire smoke detectors, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Connect sensors/contacts to the hardwire zone terminals (10 through 23). See
Figure 6-1.
2
Connect sensors/contacts to the hardwire zone terminals (10 through 23).
3
Connect N.O. devices in parallel (across) the loop. The 2K EOL resistor must
be connected across the loop wires at the last device.
The maximum zone resistance is 100 ohms for zones 1 and 8, and 300 ohms for all other zones
(excluding the 2K EOL resistor).
6-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Red Jumper
11
12
13
ZONE 4 ZONE 5
14
15
16
ZONE 6 ZONE 7
17
18
19
ZONE 8 ZONE 9
20
21
22
+
-
+
-
+
N.O.
N.O.
2k EOLR
2k EOLR
+
Fire
Usage
N.C.
SMOKE
+
-
N.C.
N.C.
-
LATCHING TYPE GLASS
BREAK DETECTORS
2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR LOOP
+
(Also supports NO/NC Burg contacts)
ZONE 1
N.C.
N.C.
N.O.
N.O.
2k EOLR
2k EOLR
+
+
-
Burg.
Usage
N.C.
2k EOLR
N.O.
2k EOLR
N.C.
N.O.
N.O.
2k EOLR
+
GLASS
BREAK
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
23
Programmable Response
(Fast/Normal) Loop
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
10
Zone resistance (Excluding EOLR):
ZONE 1,8: 100 OHMS MAXIMUM
ALL OTHER ZONES: 300 OHMS MAXIMUM
N.C.
2k EOLR
Zone response time:
ZONES 1-8: 350mSec-500mSec
ZONE 9: Programmable for
Fast: 10mSec-15mSec
Normal: 350mSec-500mSec
(default response)
Figure 6-1: Wiring Connections for Zones 1-9
Installing 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zone 1
Zone 1 has the added capability of supporting 2-wire smoke detectors. The zone provides
enough standby current (2mA) to power up to 16 of the smoke detectors listed below. When
assigned zone type 9, the second entry of a User Code + OFF sequence at a keypad will
interrupt power to these zones to allow detectors to be reset following an alarm.
Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors
You may use up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors on zone 1 listed in the table below.
DETECTOR TYPE
DEVICE MODEL #
DETECTOR TYPE
DEVICE MODEL #
Photoelectric, direct wire
System Sensor 2400
Photoelectric duct detect.
w/DH400 base
System Sensor 2451
Photoelectric w/heat sensor,
direct wire
System Sensor 2400TH
Ionization duct detector w/DH400
base
System Sensor 1451DH
Photoelectric w/B401B base
System Sensor 2451
Ionization, direct wire
System Sensor 1100
Photoelectric w/heat sensor
and B401B base
System Sensor 2451TH
Ionization w/B110LP base
System Sensor 1151
Ionization, direct wire
System Sensor 1400
Photoelectric, direct wire
System Sensor 2100
Ionization w/B401B base
System Sensor 1451
Photoelectric w/heat sensor,
direct wire
System Sensor 2100T
Photoelectric duct detect.
w/DH400 base
System Sensor 2451
Photoelectric w/B110LP base
System Sensor 2151
UL
6-2
These smoke detectors are UL Listed for use with the VISTA-128B and are the only 2-wire
smoke detectors that may be used.
Section 6 – Basic Hardwired Zones
Wiring 2-wire Smoke Detectors
To wire 2-wire smoke detectors, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select from the list compatible 2-wire smoke detectors (up to 16).
•
•
2
Connect 2-wire smoke detectors across zone 1 terminals (10 through 11) as
shown in Figure 6-2. Observe proper polarity when connecting the detectors.
3
Connect the EOL resistor across the loop wires at the last detector.
2K EOL resistors must be used on fire zones (standard 2K EOL resistors may be used on
burglary and panic zones) and must be connected across the loop wires of each zone at the
last detector.
The alarm current provided by zone 1 will support only one smoke detector in the alarmed
state.
(+)
(-)
(+)
11
(-)
ZONE 1
SMOKE
2k EOLR
2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR
10
Figure 6-2: 2-Wire Smoke Detector Connected to Zone 1.
Installing 4-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1-8
When programmed for fire warning usage, zones 1-8 can monitor 4-wire smoke detectors,
N.O. fire alarm initiating devices, or N.O. sprinkler system supervisory devices.
You may use as many 4-wire smoke detectors as can be powered from the panel's Auxiliary
Power output without exceeding the output's rating (see the Final Power-Up Procedure
section for auxiliary power ratings).
Auxiliary power to 4-wire smoke detectors is not automatically reset after an alarm, and therefore
must be momentarily interrupted using either an external switch or a 4204 Relay Module.
UL
•
•
Power to 4-wire smoke detectors must be supervised with an EOL device (use a System
Sensor A77-716B EOL relay module connected as shown in Figure 6-3).
2-wire smoke detectors may not be used in UL installations.
Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors
Use any UL Listed 4-wire smoke detector which is rated for 10-14VDC operation and which
has alarm reset time not exceeding 6 seconds. Some compatible 4-wire smoke detectors are
listed below.
Photoelectric, direct wire
System Sensor 2412
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire
System Sensor 2412TH
Ionization, direct wire
System Sensor 1412
6-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Wiring 4-wire Smoke Detectors
To wire 4-wire smoke detectors, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select from the list compatible 4-wire smoke detectors.
2
Connect detectors (including heat detectors, if used) across terminals of the zone
selected. All detectors must be wired in parallel. See figure 6-3.
3
Connect the EOL resistor across the loop wires at the last detector.
+
TO
PANEL
ZONE
(ZONE 2-8)
{
TO
PANEL
AUXILIARY
POWER
(TERMINALS 6, 7)
{
EOL
RELAY
+
–
–
4-WIRE
SMOKE
DETECTOR
+
–
–
+
NOTES:
• PROGRAM THE RELAY TO
TRANSFER ON FIRE ZONE
RESET (ACTIVATION CODE 54).
SEE 4204 RELAY MODULE
SECTION FOR DETAILS.
• SECOND CODE AND OFF
ENTERED AT CONSOLE
MOMENTARILY INTERRUPTS
DETECTOR POWER.
NO CONNECTION
C NC
NO
RESET
RELAY 1, 2, 3 OR 4
4204 RELAY MODULE
Figure 6-3: 4-Wire Smoke Detector Connections (Zones 1-8)
Installing 2-Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8
Use zone 8 for connection of compatible 2-wire latching-type glassbreak detectors. After an
alarm, the first code + OFF turns off the siren and disarms the system; the second code +
OFF clears the memory of alarm and resets the glassbreak detector.
Compatible Glassbreak Detectors
Use detectors that meet the following ratings:
Standby Voltage:
5VDC–13.8VDC
Standby Resistance:
Greater than 20k ohms (equivalent
resistance of all detectors in parallel)
Alarm Resistance:
Less than 1.1k ohms (see note below)
Alarm Current:
2mA–10mA
Reset Time:
Less than 6 seconds
The IEI 735L Series detectors have been tested and found to be compatible with these
ratings. You can use up to 50 IEI 735L Detectors connected in parallel.
You can use detectors which exceed 1.1k ohms in alarm, provided they maintain a voltage drop of
less than 3.8 volts in alarm.
6-4
Section 6 – Basic Hardwired Zones
•
The alarm current provided by zone 8 will support only one glassbreak detector in the alarmed
state.
Do not use other N.O. or N.C. contacts when using glassbreak detectors on zone 8. Other
contacts may prevent proper glassbreak detector operation.
•
Wiring 2-wire Glassbreak Detectors
To wire 2-wire glassbreak detectors, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select from the list compatible 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors.
2
Connect detectors across zone 8 (terminals 21 and 22). See Figure 6-4.
3
Connect the EOL resistor across the loop wires at the last detector.
GLASSBREAK
DETECTOR
2000
OHMS
EOLR
ZONE 8
21
(+)
22
(-)
LATCHING TYPE GLASS
BREAK DETECTOR LOOP
Figure 6-4. Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8
6-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
6-6
S E C T I O N
7
2-Wire Polling Loop Expansion
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ Polling Loop Overview
♦ Installing RPM Devices
♦ Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones
♦ Polling Loop Supervision
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Polling Loop Overview
You can expand the system from the basic 9 zones to up to 128 zones using the built-in 2-wire
polling loop. Each device that is connected to the polling loop has the capability to
communicate with the panel about its status. These devices are called RPMs (Remote Point
Modules). The polling loop:
•
•
•
Provides both power and data to the RPM zones
Constantly monitors the status of all zones enabled on the loop
Provides maximum current draw for all devices on the polling loop of 128mA (unless
using a 4297 Polling Loop Extender Module).
Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones
Polling loop zones have the following characteristics:
•
•
•
•
•
Must use RPM (Remote Point Module) devices
Supervised by control panel
Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions
Polling loop smoke detector LED will latch on the first detector to go into alarm.
Clearing alarm memory clears the latched LED.
Polling loop smoke detector LED periodically flashes to indicate communication with the
control.
Installing RPM Devices
All devices on the polling loop must be wired in parallel to the [+] and [-] polling loop
terminals of the control panel (24 and 25). You can wire from device to device, or have
multiple branches from the control panel in a star configuration as shown in Figure 7-1.
Although each polling loop device is wired in parallel, each device has its own unique zone
number (or group of zones if it is a zone expansion device). On some devices, this is
determined by the setting of DIP switches. Other devices have a built-in unique serial
number which must be "learned" into the control as the zone number desired.
•
UL
•
•
•
•
The 4208 must be mounted either inside the VISTA-128B cabinet or in a separate enclosure
which has a tamper-supervised cover.
The 4190WH right loop must not be used, and the left loop must be EOLR-supervised.
The 4278 Auxiliary Sensor Loop cannot be used.
The 4194 is not UL Listed.
The 4297 must be powered from the VISTA-128B Auxiliary Power Output or from a UL Listed
supplementary power supply.
7-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Compatible Polling Loop Devices
4208
4190WH
4278
8-Zone Expander
2-Zone Expander
Quad PIR
•
Accommodates up to 8 zones via the polling
loop.
•
DIP switch-programmable.
•
The first two zones can be either normal or fast
response (DIP switch selectable).
•
All zones are EOLR-supervised (first six zones =
4.7k ohms; last two zones = 30k ohms), provided
with the 4208.
•
Accommodates up to 2 zones via the polling
loop.
•
DIP switch-programmable.
•
The left zone can be EOLR-supervised (required
in UL installations), can accept either open or
closed circuit sensors, and can be set for fast
response.
•
The right zone is unsupervised and can accept
closed circuit sensors only (cannot be used in
UL installations).
•
Quad element PIR with built-in RPM (connects
directly to the polling loop).
•
DIP switch-programmable.
•
Includes mirrors for both wide-angle and
curtain/long-range applications.
Features a nonsupervised auxiliary sensor loop
that can accept closed circuit sensors only
(cannot be used in UL installations).
4275
4194
4192SD
4192SDT
4192CP
7-2
Dual PIR
Surface Mount Reed
Contact (Wide Gap)
Photoelectric Smoke
Detector Devices
Photoelectric Smoke
Detector w/Heat
Detector
Ionization Smoke
Detector
•
Dual-element PIR with built-in RPM (connects
directly to the polling loop).
•
DIP switch-programmable.
•
Includes mirrors for both wide-angle and
curtain/long-range applications and can use the
1875PA Pet Alley mirror.
•
Built-in selectable pulse count capability.
•
Wide-gap, surface-mounted reed contact with
built-in RPM (connects directly to the polling
loop).
•
DIP switch-programmable.
•
One-piece photoelectric smoke detector with
built-in RPM.
•
DIP switch-programmable.
•
One-piece photoelectric smoke detector with
135°F (57°C) heat detector and built-in RPM.
•
DIP switch-programmable.
•
One-piece products of combustion ionization
detector with built-in RPM.
•
DIP switch-programmable.
Section 7 - 2-Wire Polling Loop Expansion
Compatible Polling Loop Devices
4101SN
4939SN-BR
4939SN-GY
4191SN-WH
4959SN
4208U
Serial Number Single
Output Relay Module
Serial Number Surface
Mount Reed Contacts
Serial Number
Recessed Reed Contact
Aluminum Overhead
Door Contact
Universal 8-Zone
Expander
•
Form C relay rated at 2A, 28VAC/VDC with
contact supervision.
•
One class B/style B EOLR-supervised aux input
zone.
•
Serial Number ID learned by control panel.
•
Tamper-protected cover.
•
Compact surface-mount magnetic reed contact
with built-in RPM.
•
Serial number ID learned by control panel.
•
Recessed (1/2” dia.) magnetic reed contact with
built-in RPM.
•
Serial number ID learned by control panel.
•
24-inch armored cable
•
Serial number ID learned by control panel.
•
Uniquely identifies 8 EOLR supervised zones
(all zones use 10k resistors, supplied).
Can be used in zone assignment mode or serial
number mode.
When used in the serial number mode, each
serial number in the selected group can be
assigned to any zone number.
Loops A&B can be programmed for fast
(10msec) response.
Can be optionally powered from an external DC
power supply to reduce current draw from the
polling loop.
Tamper protected
•
•
•
•
•
4193SN
Serialized 2-Zone
Expander
•
•
•
•
•
Single-zone expander used to connect alarmsensing devices to control panels.
Can be configured as one unsupervised zone
(normally closed devices only).
Serial number ID learned by control panel.
7500
Single Technology
Glass Break Detector
•
•
Glassbreak detector with built-in RPM.
DIP switch programmable.
9500
Dual Technology Glass
Break Detector
•
Dual technology glass-break detector with
built-in RPM
DIP switch programmable.
4293SN
Serialized 1-Zone
Expander
•
•
UL
Two-zone expander used to connect alarm
sensing devices to control panels.
Can be configured as one supervised zone (10K
EOLR) and one unsupervised zone, or two
unsupervised zones (normally closed devices
only).
Serial number ID learned by control panel.
Models 7500 and 9500 glassbreak detectors are not UL Listed.
7-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Wiring Polling Loop Devices
When running polling loop wires, they must not be run within 6" of AC power, telephone, or
intercom wiring. Since the polling loop is carrying data between the control panel and the
devices, interference on this loop can cause an interruption of this communication. The polling
loop can also cause outgoing interference on the intercom or phone lines. If this spacing cannot
be achieved, shielded wire must be used. (Note that the maximum total wire length supported is
cut in half when shielded wire is used.)
To wire the polling loop devices, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Select from the list compatible polling loop devices.
2
Run wires to each device on the polling loop. No individual wire run may exceed
the lengths given in the table to follow. In addition, no more than 64mA may be
drawn on any individual wire run. When a star configuration is used, the total
length of all wire runs combined cannot exceed 4000 ft (2000 ft. if using
unshielded wire in conduit or shielded wire). Twisted-pair is recommended for
all normal wire runs.
Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs
Wire Gauge
Max. Length
#22 gauge
650 feet
#20 gauge
950 feet
#18 gauge
1500 feet
#16 gauge
2400 feet
3
Wire each device to the polling loop, making sure to use correct polarity when
making connections (refer to the device's instructions).
4
If you are using serial number devices, and intend to have the control enroll
each serial number automatically, wire no more than 25 of these devices to the
control at a time. Then power up and program them before connecting the next
25. Leave previously enrolled devices connected.
Note: If you intend to manually enter the serial numbers through the keypad or
through Compass downloading software, all the devices may be connected before
powering up to program.
5
If you are using devices with DIP switches, set each device's DIP switches
for the zone number you are assigning it. Refer to the device's instructions or the
DIP Switch Tables at the end of this manual when setting addresses.
Certain polling loop devices have a DIP switch which can be used either to select the device's
zone number or to select the enrolling of a unique, embedded serial number by the control panel.
When used with VISTA-128B, these devices MUST be set for the serial number mode of
operation.
Be sure to include the total current drawn on the polling loop when figuring the total auxiliary load
on the panel's power supply (use the AUXILIARY CURRENT DRAW WORKSHEET in the Final
Power Up Procedure section.
7-4
Section 7 - 2-Wire Polling Loop Expansion
21
22
23
24
+
POLLING LOOP
Polling loop rating:
128mA maximum.
25
4190
RPM
TO RIGHT LOOP
4192SD
SMOKE
4278
PIR
Figure 7-1: Polling Loop Connections to the VISTA-128B
The 4297 Polling Loop Extender may be used to provide additional polling loop current, to
extend the polling loop wire run length, and/or to provide individual electrically isolated
polling loops. Refer to Figures 7-2 and 7-3, to follow.
DO NOT use the 4197 Polling Loop Extender module with the VISTA-128B.
Notes: - Do not use the 4197 module.
- Refer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information.
The limits shown below supercede the limits described in the 4297 instructions.
- Do not connect 4297 modules in series.
Input Polling Loop
CONTROL
PANEL
RPM
- - -
RPM
Input Loop Limits:
- 128mA max. No more than 64mA
on any individual wire run.
- No individual wire run may exceed:
Gauge
#22
#20
#18
#16
Length
650 ft.
950 ft.
1500 ft.
2400 ft.
Extension Polling Loop
4297
MODULE
RPM
- - -
RPM
Extension Loop Limits:
- Same as for the input polling loop.
Combined Input and Extension Polling Loop Limits:
- No more than 119 devices combined.
- Total length of all wire runs on all loops combined cannot exceed 6400 ft. (3200 ft. if using unshielded wire in
conduit or shielded wire)
- Total length of all wire runs combined cannot
exceed 4000 ft. (2000 ft. if using unshielded
wire in conduit or shielded wire).
Figure 7-2: Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module
7-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Notes:
- Do not use 4197 module.
- Refer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information.
The Limits shown below supercede the limits described in the 4297 instructions.
- Do not connect 4297 modules in series.
Extension Loop #1
Input Polling
Loop
4297
RPM
- - -
RPM
Extension Loop #2
RPM
- - -
RPM
---
4297
---
CONTROL
PANEL
Extension Loop #8
4297
RPM
- - -
RPM
Extension Loop Limits:
Each individual loop has the
same limits as the input loop.
Up to 8 modules may be connected
in parallel. Extension loops will be
electrically isolated if blue jumper
on each 4297 is left in tact.
}
Combined Input and Extension Loop Limits:
- No more than 119 devices combined on all loops
- To calculate the maximum wire run allowed on each extension loop:
1. Determine the total wire length of all input loops combined.
2. Subtract this number from 6400 ft. (3200 ft. for shielded cable or
unshielded cable in conduit).
The result is the maximum wire run length for each extension loop.
Figure 7-3. Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules
Note: The input loop limits stated in Figure 7-2 apply to Figure 7-3 as well.
Polling Loop Supervision
A short on the polling loop is indicated by a trouble on its supervisory zone and reports as a
trouble condition only. As such, a polling loop should be assigned zone type 05 if
annunciation as a trouble condition is desired.
If a device on the polling loop fails (the panel cannot "see" that device), the partition or
partitions that use that device will display a trouble condition for all zones associated with
that device. If the panel is armed when a device fails, and the zone is programmed as a
burglary type, that device will cause an alarm on the corresponding partition(s). Otherwise
the zone will generate a trouble condition.
A trouble on zone 997 will not prevent a partition from being armed, as long as all polling loop
zones on that partition are bypassed.
7-6
S E C T I O N
8
Wireless Zone Expansion
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones
♦ Installing the 5800TM Module
♦ RF System Operation and Supervision
♦ House ID Sniffer Mode
♦ RF System Installation Advisories
♦ 5800 Series Transmitter Setup
♦ Installation and Setup of the 5881 RF Receiver
♦ Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones
UL
•
Supervised by control panel for check-in signals (except certain nonsupervised
transmitters)
•
Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions
•
Individually assignable to access points
Wireless devices may not be used in UL Commercial Burglary installations.
The following receivers may be used and supports the number of zones shown below:
5800 Series Receivers
Recvr
Zones
5881L
up to 8
5881M
up to 16
5881H
up to 128
In Canada, 5800 systems must use 5882 Series receivers: 5882L/5882H. Information in this
manual relative to the 5881 Receivers applies as well to the 5882 Receivers. 5881 and 5882
Receivers can all use the same transmitters.
RF System Operation and Supervision
•
The receiver responds to status and alarm signals from wireless transmitters (at 345MHz
USA; 315MHz in Canada) within a nominal range of 200 feet, and relays this information
to the control.
•
Each supervised transmitter sends a supervisory signal to the receiver every 70-90
minutes. If, after a programmed interval of time (e.g., 12 hrs), the receiver does not hear
from a particular transmitter, the word “CHECK” or “TRBL” will appear at the
corresponding partition’s keypad(s) accompanied by the zone number in question. The
trouble will not prevent you from arming the panel, but the zone must first be bypassed.
8-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
•
Zones 988 and 990 are used to supervise the RF reception of receivers 2 and 1,
respectively. The reception is supervised for two conditions.
1. If, within a programmed interval of time (defined by program field 1*30), the receiver
does not hear from any of its transmitters. A “CHECK” or “TRBL” message will
nd
st
appear for zones 988 (2 receiver) or 990 (1 receiver) if response type 05 is assigned
to these supervisory zones and if programmed, Contact ID event code 333 is sent to
the central station. This message is an indication that the RF receiver is “deaf.” The
fault may be accompanied by a supervision fault for one or more RF transmitters.
2. If, the receiver has detected a condition that may impede proper RF reception (i.e.,
jamming or other RF interference). The control checks the receiver for this condition
nd
every 45 seconds. A “CHECK” or “TRBL” message will appear for zones 988 (2
st
receiver) or 990 (1 receiver) if response type 05 is assigned to these supervisory
zones and if programmed, Contact ID event code 344 is sent to the central station
UL
A response type must be programmed for zones 990 (1st receiver) and 988 (2nd receiver) if being
used, for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.
•
The control checks the receiver connections about every 45 seconds. If the panel has lost
communication with the receiver, a “CHECK” or “TRBL” message will appear for the
respective receiver supervisory zone (8 + 2-digit receiver device address; for example,
Device address 05 = supervisory zone 805). Supervisory zones must be programmed for
Day/Night (type 05). The “CHECK” or “TRBL” display may be an indication that the
wiring to the receiver is incorrect, or that the DIP switches are not set for the same
address the receiver was assigned to in the control’s Device Programming in the #93
Menu Mode.
•
Two identical receivers can be used to provide either a greater area of coverage or
redundant protection.
•
Any zone from 1 to 128 can be used as a 5800 Series wireless zone, with the exception of
zone 64 (reserved for a wireless keypad).
RF System Installation Advisories
8-2
•
Place the receiver in a high, centrally located area for best reception. Do not place it on or
near metal objects. This will decrease the range and/or block transmissions.
•
For maximum range, install the RF receiver at least 10 feet from the control panel or any
keypads to avoid interference from the microprocessors in these units.
•
If dual receivers are used:
•
Both must be at least 10 feet from each other, as well as from the control panel and
remote keypads.
•
Each receiver must be set to a different device address. The receiver set to the lower
st
address is considered the 1 RF receiver for supervisory purposes.
•
The House IDs must be the same.
•
Using two receivers does not increase the number of transmitters the system can
support (128 zones using the 5881H, plus a wireless keypad).
Section 8 – Wireless Zone Expansion
Installation and Setup of the 5881 RF Receivers
To install and setup the 5881 RF Receiver, see to figure 8-1 and perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Mount the receiver. It must be mounted externally to the control and can detect
signals from transmitters within a nominal range of 200 feet. Take this into
consideration when determining mounting location.
2
Connect the receiver’s wire harness to the keypad terminals (6, 7, 8, 9). Plug the
connector at the other end of the harness into the receiver.
3
Refer to the Installation Instructions provided with the receiver for further
installation procedures regarding antenna mounting, etc.
4
Set the receiver’s DIP switches for an address (01-07) which is not being used by
another device (i.e., keypads, relay modules, etc.).
Note: Take note of this address setting, because you will need it when
programming the receiver into the system in Device Programming in the #93
Menu Mode.
TO CONTROL'S REMOTE KEYPAD
CONNECTION POINTS. EACH RECEIVER
MUST BE ON INDIVIDUAL HOME RUN.
ANTENNAS
INSERT IN
RIGHT-HAND
TERMINALS
CIRCUIT
BOARD
USE MAX. OF 220 ft. (67m0 OF #22 (0.64mm)
WIRE OR 550 ft. (168m) OF #18 (1mm) WIRE
FOR EACH RUN. 20 ft. MAX. IN COMMERCIAL
FORE INSTALLATIONS. (SEE RECEIVER'S
INSTRUCTIONS.)
YELLOW
RED
BLACK
GREEN
MOUNTING
HOLES
DIP SWITCH WHIRE AREAS = SWITCH
HANDLES. POSITION 2-4 DETERMINE
RECEIVER'S ADDRESS. CONSULT
CONTROL'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR
ADDRESS TO USE. DIP SWITCH BELOW
SHOWN SET FOR ADDRESS "0."
WIRING
OPENING
SWITCH RECEIVER ADDRESS SETTINGS
(" - " MEANS OFF)
POSITION
0
5
4
DIP SWITCH
INTERFERENCE
INDICATOR LED
PLUG & SOCKET
DIP SWITCH #5 (PRESET ONLY ON 5881EH)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PRESENT ONLY ON 5881EH (SEE TEXT AT LEFT)
3
2
1
ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON ON ON
FOR FUTURE USE
ON: SETS 5881EH FOR USE IN COMMERCIAL
FIRE APPLICATIONS (SEE THE RECEIVER'S
INSTRUCTIONS)*.
OFF: USE IN NON-COMMERCIAL FIRE
INSTALLATIONS.
* FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE APPLICATIONS
THE 5881EH PC BOARD MUST BE MOUNTED
IN A SEPARATE CABINET (SEE RECEIVER'S
INSTRUCTIONS FOR DETAILS).
Figure 8-1. 5881 RF Receiver (cover removed)
Take note of the address you select for the RF receiver as this address must be enabled in the
system’s Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
8-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Installing the 5800TM Module
Installation of this module is necessary only if you are using one or more 5827BD Wireless
Bi-directional keypads.
The 5800TM must be located next to the 5881 Receiver (between one and two feet from the
receiver’s antennas). The 5800TM must not be installed within the control cabinet. Mount the
unit using its accompanying mounting bracket.
Wiring the 5800TM
To wire the 5800TM,perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Mount the 5800TM within 2 feet of the 5881 RF Receiver.
2
Connect the 5800TM to the control panel’s keypad connection terminals, using
the supplied connector with flying leads, as follows:
WIRE
TERMINAL ON CONTROL
RED (+12VDC)
Terminal 6
BLACK (Ground)
Terminal 7
GREEN (Data to Control)
Terminal 8
YELLOW (Data from Control)
Terminal 9
BLUE: Not Used
3
Cut the red jumper for Address Setting 28; cut the white jumper for Address 29;
cut both jumpers for Address 30.
4
For additional information, refer to the 5800TM’s instructions.
The address setting must be enabled in the control’s Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode
as a keypad and then assigned to a partition.
House ID Sniffer Mode
This mode applies only if you are using a wireless keypad (5827/5827BD). Use the House ID
Sniffer Mode to make sure you do not choose a House ID that is in use in a nearby system.
To enter this mode, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Enter your [Installer Code] + [#] + [2].
2
The receiver will now “sniff” out any House IDs in the area and display them.
Keep the receiver in this mode for about 2 hours to give a good indication of the
House IDs being used. Use a House ID that is not displayed.
3
To exit the Sniffer Mode, simply enter your [Installer Code] + OFF.
4
If you need to re-program the House ID of the receiver, do so before proceeding.
Since Sniffer Mode effectively disables RF point reception, Sniffer Mode cannot be entered while
any partition is armed.
8-4
Section 8 – Wireless Zone Expansion
5800 Series Transmitter Setup
5800 Series transmitters have built-in serial numbers that must be “learned” by the system
using the #93 Menu Mode Programming, or input to the control via the downloader. 5800
Series transmitters (except 5827, described separately) do not have DIP switches.
Some transmitters, such as the 5816 and 5817, can support more than one “zone” (referred to
as loops or inputs). On the 5816, for example, the wire connection terminal block is Loop 1,
the reed contact is Loop 2. Each loop must be assigned a different zone number.
For button-type transmitters (wireless keys), such as the 5804, 5804BD, 5803, and 5801, you
must assign a unique zone number to each individual button used on the transmitter. Each
button on the transmitter also has a pre-designated loop or input number.
Transmitter Supervision
Except for some transmitters that may be carried off premises (5802, 5802CP, 5803, 5804,
5827, and 5827BD), each transmitter is supervised by a check-in signal that is sent to the
receiver at 70–90 minute intervals. If at least one check-in is not received from each
supervised transmitter within a programmed period (field 1∗31), the “missing” transmitter
number(s) and “CHECK” or “TRBL” will be displayed.
The supervision for a transmitter may be turned off by learning it as a “UR” (unsupervised
RF) type, as described later in this manual.
Some 5800 Series transmitters have built-in tamper protection and will annunciate a
“CHECK” or “TRBL” condition if covers are removed.
Transmitter Input Types
All of the transmitters described have one or more unique factory-assigned input (loop) codes.
Each of the inputs requires its own programming zone (e.g., a 5804’s four-button inputs
require four programming zones).
Transmitters can be programmed as one of the following types:
Type
Description
RF
Sends periodic Check-in signals, as well as Fault, Restore, and Low
Battery signals. The transmitter must remain within the receiver’s range.
(Supervised RF)
UR
(Unsupervised RF)
Sends all the signals that the RF type does, but the control does not
supervise the Check-in signals. The transmitter may be carried offpremises.
BR
(Unsupervised Button RF)
These only send Fault signals. They do not send Low Battery signals
until they are activated. The transmitter may be carried off-premises.
Transmitter Battery Life
•
•
•
•
•
•
Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4 to 7 years, depending on the
environment, usage, and the specific wireless device being used. Factors such as
humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature may all
reduce the actual battery life in a given installation.
The system can identify a true low battery situation, thus allowing time to arrange a
change of battery and maintain protection for that given point within the system.
Some transmitters (e.g., 5802, and 5803) contain long-life but nonreplaceable batteries.
At the end of their life, the complete unit must be replaced (and a new serial number
learned by the control).
Button-type transmitters (e.g., 5801, 5802, 5802CP & 5803) should be periodically tested
for battery life.
Do not install batteries in wireless transmitters until ready to learn. After learning, batteries
need not be removed.
Before mounting transmitters permanently, conduct Go/No Go Tests to verify the signal
strength and reorient or relocate transmitters if necessary. See the Testing the System
section.
8-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters
Model
Product
Input Type
Description
5801
Wireless Panic
Transmitter
UR or RF
•
Has four pushbuttons, each with a
unique input (loop) code.
•
Programmable responses (e.g.,
Panic, Arm–STAY, Arm–AWAY,
Disarm, etc.
•
For arming/disarming functions,
button must be assigned to a user
code when “adding a user.”
•
Has single pushbutton.
•
Usually be programmed for
response type of 24 Hr. Audible
or 24 Hr. Silent (other zone
responses are possible).
•
Contains a nonreplaceable
battery. At the end of the
battery’s life, the entire unit must
be replaced.
•
If using for arming/disarming,
the button must be assigned to a
user code when “adding a user.”
•
Has single pushbutton
•
Usually programmed for a
response type of 24 Hr. Audible or
24 Hr. Silent (other zone
responses are possible.
•
If using for arming/disarming, the
button must be assigned to a user
code when “adding a user.”
•
Contains a replaceable battery.
•
Has four pushbuttons, each with a
unique input (loop) code.
•
Programmable responses (e.g.,
Arm–STAY, Arm–AWAY, Disarm,
etc.).
•
Contains a replaceable battery.
•
If using for arming/disarming, the
button must be assigned to a user
code when “adding a user.”
•
One-piece smoke detectors with
built-in transmitter.
•
UL Listed for residential fire
usage only with VISTA-128B.
5802
5802CP
5802MN
5804
5806/5807
5808
8-6
Pendant (Personal
Emergency
Transmitter)
BR Only
Belt Clip (Personal
Emergency
Transmitter)
Miniature (Personal
Emergency
Transmitter)
Wireless Key
Transmitter
Wireless Photoelectric
Smoke Detectors
UR or RF
BR Only
RF
Section 8 – Wireless Zone Expansion
Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters (cont’d)
Model
Product
Input Type
Description
5816
Door/Window
Transmitter
RF
•
Has two unique input (loop) codes:
one for a wired closed circuit
contact loop; the other for a builtin reed switch (used in
conjunction with a magnet).
5817
Multi-Point Universal
Transmitter
RF
•
Has three unique input (loop)
codes: one for a “Primary” contact
loop with programmable options;
the others for two “Auxiliary”
closed circuit contact loops.
5818
Recessed Transmitter
RF
•
Reed switch magnetic contact
sensor that is easily concealed in
the frame and edge of a door or
window.
•
Has a unique input (loop) code.
•
Can be used to turn the burglary
protection on and off
•
Features the same built-in panic
functions as wired keypads
•
The keypad is identified as zone
“000" on wired keypads when it
transmits with a low battery .
•
(Used with 5800TM Module)
•
Operates the system similarly to
wired keypads
•
Can indicate system status via its
3 LEDs and sounder.
•
Includes 3 panic keys.
•
House ID must be set.
•
Requires 5800TM Transmitter
Module (must be enabled in #93
Menu Mode –Device Programming
and assigned to a partition in 1*48
•
Requires both sound and shock of
breaking glass to cause alarm to
be transmitted.
•
Has unique input code.
•
Dual-element passive infrared
detector/transmitter with built-in
selectable pulse count.
•
Has unique input code
•
3 minute lock-out between fault
transmissions to conserve battery
life.
5827
5827BD
5849
5890
Wireless Keypad
Wireless Bi-directional
Keypad
Glassbreak Detector
PIR Detector
House ID
House ID
RF
RF
8-7
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
8-8
S E C T I O N
9
Output Devices
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Wiring the 4300 Transformer
♦ Installing the 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules
♦ Programming Output Devices
♦ Installing the FSA Modules
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
The VISTA-128B supports up to 96 outputs to activate and de-activate as desired. Each
device must be programmed as to how to act (ACTION), when to activate (START), and when
to deactivate (STOP). Each of these is described later in this section. This is provided by
4204, 4204CF, FSA-8, FSA-24, 4140SN and/or Powerline Carrier devices.
They can be used to:
• Turn lights on and off
• Control sounders
• Control doors
• Give status indications.
4204/4204CF Relay Modules
Each 4204 module provides 4 relays with Form C (normally open and normally closed)
contacts. Each 4204CF module adds two additional style Y supervised bell outputs to the
system. If 4204CF modules are used exclusively, only relays 1 and 3 on each module can be
programmed. The other 2 relays (relays 2 and 4) on each module are used for supervision
purposes.
FSA Modules
The 8-Zone LED Fire System Annunciator FSA-8 and 24-Zone LED Fire System Annunciator
FSA-24 provide the ability for a fire response unit to identify quickly and easily the
point/zone of a fire. These indicators may be used for other functions as well, such as status
indication. A maximum of 4 FSA modules, in any combination, can be supported. Each FSA
module can support up to 24 LEDs dependent upon model selection.
4101SN Relay Modules
The 4101SN V-Plex Single Output Relay Module is a serial number polling loop output
device. The 4101SN features the following:
•
Form C relay contacts rated at 2A, 28VAC/VDC with contact supervision.
The position of the relay is supervised, but not the actual external contact wiring.
9-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
•
One class B/style B EOLR-supervised auxiliary input zone.
•
Operating power and communication with control panels via the V-Plex polling loop.
•
Electronics mounted in a small plastic case with tamper-protected cover.
Powerline Carrier Devices
Powerline Carrier devices are controlled by signals sent through the electrical wiring at the
premises via a 4300 transformer. Therefore, if using Powerline Carrier devices, a 4300
transformer must be used in place of the regular system transformer.
This section is used to program relays to activate in response to a programmed condition. The
system can also be programmed to activate relays at specific times by using the #80 Scheduling
Menu Mode–Time Driven Events function.
Installing the 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules
The relay module will not operate until the device address you have set the DIP switches for is
enabled in the control’s Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
To wire the relay modules, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Set the 4204 or 4204CF’s DIP switches for a device address between 01-15. See
Figures 9-1 and 9-2.
Make sure the address is not being used by another device (keypads, RF
receivers, etc.).
2
Mount the 4204 and 4204CF Modules as per the instructions provided with the
modules.
3
Connect the module’s wire harness to the keypad terminals (6, 7, 8, and 9). Plug
the connector at the other end of the harness into the module.
If mounted remotely homerun each module to the control. The table
below shows the maximum wire run lengths from the control to each
4204. Refer to the instructions provided with the 4204CF for its
maximum permissible wire lengths.
9-2
Wire Gauge
Maximum Length
#22
125 feet
#20
200 feet
#18
300 feet
#16
500 feet
Section 9 – Output Devices
SWITCH
POSITION
4204 ADDRESS SETTINGS
("—" means "OFF")
➞
ON
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
2
ON
—
ON
—
ON
—
ON
—
ON
—
ON
—
ON
—
ON
—
3
ON
ON
—
—
ON
ON
—
—
ON
ON
—
—
ON
ON
—
—
4
ON
ON
ON
ON
—
—
—
—
ON
ON
ON
ON
—
—
—
—
5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
➞
➞
➞
➞
2
3
4
5
4204
RELAY
➞
TYPICAL
(SHOWN "OFF")
10 11 12
➞ ON
9
8
NC
7
6
NO
C
5
NC
4
NO
RELAY
C
1
NC
NO
3
COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH
➞
RELAY
➞
2
EITHER OR BOTH
CAN BE USED ➞
➞
TB1
13 14 15 16
YEL
▲
DATA IN
FROM CONTROL
BLK
NO
C
RELAY
4-PIN CONSOLE PLUG
NC
3
DIP SWITCH
FOR SETTING DEVICE ADDRESS
AND ENABLING/DISABLING TAMPER
15
C
2
4
1
➞
OFF
TB2
(–) GROUND
GRN
DATA OUT
TO CONTROL
RED
(+) 12V
Figure 9-1: 4204 Relay Module
SWITCH
POSITION
4204CF ADDRESS SETTINGS
("—" means "OFF")
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ON
—
ON
—
ON
—
ON
—
ON
—
ON
—
ON
—
3
ON
ON
—
—
ON
ON
—
—
ON
ON
—
—
ON
ON
—
—
4
ON
ON
ON
ON
—
—
—
—
ON
ON
ON
ON
—
—
—
—
5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
9 10 11 12
5
2
—
DIP SWITCH
FOR SETTING DEVICE
ADDRESS AND
ENABLING/DISABLING
TAMPER
➞
➞
NC
15
NC
▲
DATA IN
FROM CONTROL
TB2
16
YEL
BLK
6
4
3
NC
(–) GROUND
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE B
2K EOLR
#610-7
POLARIZED
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE
–
+
2
14
+
1
13
➞
TB1
NC
5
➞
EITHER OR BOTH
CAN BE USED ➞
NC
NC
COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH
4-PIN CONSOLE PLUG
–
8
4
1
ON
7
➞
➞
➞
➞
3
➞
ON
1 2
0
2
–
➞ ON
+
➞
OFF
}
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE A
2K EOLR
#610-7
- ALARM POLARITY
SHOWN
- EACH OUTPUT
PROVIDES
STYLE Y
SUPERVISION
- EACH OUTPUT
RATED 1.2A MAX
- USE
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCES
COMPATIBLE
WITH
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE
POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
RATING
POWER FOR
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE A,
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE B
8-28VDC OR VFW. UP TO 2.4A
DEPENDING ON BELL CURRENT
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE AND
CONSOLE DATA OUTPUTS ARE
POWER LIMITED
GRN
DATA OUT
TO CONTROL
RED
(+) 12V; SUPPLIES POWER TO MODULE
CIRCUITRY (INCLUDING NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE RELAY COILS). CURRENT
DRAIN AT 12V IS: 25 mA + (80 mA PER
ACTIVE OUTPUT)
Figure 9-2: 4204CF Relay Module
9-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Installing the FSA Modules
The module will not operate until the device address you have set the DIP switches for is enabled
in the control’s Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
To install the FSA module, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Set the FSA module’s DIP switches for a device address between 08-23. See the
module’s instructions for the DIP switch table.
Make sure the address is not being used by another device (keypads, RF
receivers, etc.).
2
Mount the FSA module horizontally to a duplex box (quad box for FSA-24).
3
Connect the module to the control’s keypad terminals (6, 7, 8, and 9).
Optional
Keyswitch
Connection
Dip Switch
00000
Terminal
Block
SIDE
VIEW
All Switches shown
in Up position.
(ECP Address 23)
Connect to
Keypad
Terminals
ECP Bus
Figure 9-3: Wiring the FSA Module
Wiring the 4300 Transformer
Powerline Carrier devices (such as X-10, ACT, Leviton) are either plugged into standard AC
outlets or wired into the AC electrical system by a licensed electrician, depending on the type
of device used. They respond to “on” and “off” commands sent from the panel, through the
4300 transformer, to the receiving devices.
Note each device’s House and Unit Code setup, as these codes will be used to program the
devices in the Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
9-4
Section 9 – Output Devices
4300 TRANSFORMER/INTERFACE
5
6
7 8
9
J8 CONNECTOR
BROWN
BLUE
BLACK
4
GRAY
Sync Data Com
3
YELLOW
WHITE
RED
GREEN
2
IN
GR 2
OU
N
IN D
3
1
3 4 5 6
GR
OU
OU ND
T
OU 5
T
GR 6
O
GR UND
OU
ND
Earth
AC Ground AC
VIOLET
1 2
4142TR CABLE
TB1 TB1
-1 -30
TB1
-2
Figure 9-4: 4300 Wiring Connections
To connect the 4300 transformer, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Run a 6-conductor cable between the 4300 interface and the panel.
2
Splice a 4142TR cable to the 6-conductor cable. See Figure 9-4.
Note that the white and yellow wires of the 4142TR must be spliced
together.
3
Connect the 4142TR cable to J8 on the control’s PC board.
4
Set the proper House and Unit Codes for each device following the instructions
provided with each device.
Programming Output Devices
Each output must be programmed to begin one of four types of ACTIONS at a designated
START event, and end that ACTION at a designated STOP event.
The letter(s) in parentheses after each function described below, such as (A) after ACTION,
are those that appear in the various summary displays of programmed data during
programming.
ACTION (A)
The "ACTION" of the device is how the device will respond when it is activated by the
"START" programming. You may want the device to activate momentarily, to pulse on and
off continuously, or to remain activated until some other event occurs to stop it.
There are five different choices of actions:
• ACTIVATE for 2 SECONDS and then reset.
• ACTIVATE and REMAIN ACTIVATED until stopped by some other event.
• PULSE ON and OFF until stopped by some other event.
• NO RESPONSE when the device is not used.
• TOGGLE on and off alternately with each activation of event.
START (STT)
The "START" programming determines when and under what conditions the device will be
activated. The following START options are available:
1) EVENT (EV) is the condition (alarm, fault, trouble, restore) that must occur to a zone or
group of zones (zone list) in order to activate the device. These conditions apply only
when a zone list or zone number is used.
9-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
ZONE LIST (ZL) is a group of zones to which the “EVENT” applies in order to activate
a particular device. Note that there are a total of 15 zone lists that can be programmed;
when the selected EVENT (alarm, fault or trouble) occurs in any zone in the selected
“Start” ZONE LIST (01-15), activation of the selected device will START.
2) ZONE # A specific zone going into alarm, fault, trouble, or restore (Event programming)
can be used to start the relay action. Enter the 3-digit zone number (000-128).
3) ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION (ZT). If all zones to be used to start the device
have the same response type, and there are no other zones of this type which are not to
activate this device, then “ZONE TYPE” may be used instead of using a "ZONE LIST"
and "EVENT” to activate the device.
If a System Operation, such as “DISARMING” or “ANY FIRE ALARM” is to activate the
device, the appropriate choice would also be entered under the “ZONE TYPE” option.
The “ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION” option functions independently of the
“EVENT/ZONE LIST” combination.
If a specific "ZONE TYPE" is chosen, any zone of that response type going into alarm,
trouble, or fault will cause the device to activate as selected in "ACTION.” If the same
“ZONE TYPE” is also chosen for the STOP programming, any zone of that type that
restores will de-activate the device.
If a "SYSTEM OPERATION" is chosen, that operation will cause the device to activate
as selected in "ACTION.” The different choices for "ZONE TYPE" and "SYSTEM
OPERATION" are listed in “Programming Relays” later in this section, and on the
Programming Form.
4) PARTITION No. (P). The device's "Start" ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION may be
limited to an occurrence on one partition (1-8), or any partition (0).
STOP (STP)
The "STOP" programming determines when and under what conditions the device will be
de-activated. The following options are available:
1). RESTORE ZONE LIST (ZL). If a "ZONE LIST" is used as the “Stop” event, the device
will de-activate when all the zones in that list restore from a previous fault, trouble, or
alarm condition. This will occur regardless of what is programmed to "START" the
device; therefore, a "RESTORE ZONE LIST" would normally only be used when a
"ZONE LIST" is used to start the device.
2). ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION (ZT). Instead of using a "RESTORE ZONE
LIST," a specific zone (response) type or system operation action can be selected to deactivate the device.
If a specific "ZONE TYPE" is chosen, any zone of that response type that restores from a
previous alarm, trouble, or fault condition will cause the device to de-activate.
If a "SYSTEM OPERATION" is chosen, that operation will cause the device to deactivate. The different choices for "ZONE TYPE" and "SYSTEM OPERATION" are
listed in “Programming Relays” later in this section, and in the Programming Form.
3) PARTITION No. (P). The device's "Stop" Zone Type/System Operation may be limited
to an occurrence on one partition (1-8), or on any partition (0).
The “ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION” option functions independently of the
“RESTORE/ZONE LIST” combination.
See the Programming Guide for a detailed explanation and the display prompts for
programming output devices.
9-6
S E C T I O N
1 0
4285/4286 VIP Module
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Wiring the VIP Module
♦ Mounting the VIP Module
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
UL
The 4285/4286 VIP Module is not permissible for UL commercial burglary installations.
General Information
The 4285/4286 VIP Module is an add-on accessory that permits the user to access the
security system (and relays) via a TouchTone telephone, either from the premises or by
calling the premises from a remote location. Only one VIP Module can be used in a security
system. This module must be enabled as Device Address 4 in the Device Programming in the
#93 Menu Mode, and must be assigned to a partition.
The 4285/4286 VIP Module offers the following features:
•
Allows the user to receive synthesized voice messages over the phone regarding the
status of the security system.
•
Allows the user to arm and disarm the security system and perform most other
commands using the telephone keypad.
•
Allows the user to control relays using the telephone keypad.
•
Provides voice annunciation over the phone to confirm any command that is entered.
•
Announces many of the same words that would normally be displayed on an Alpha
keypad under the same system conditions. Refer to the words in bold on the Alpha
Vocabulary list found in the #93 Menu Mode Programming section.
•
Can be supervised for connection to control panel (annunciated and reported as Zone
804).
Detailed operating instructions for phone access to the security system are provided with the VIP
Module. In addition, a Phone Access User's Guide is supplied with the VIP Module for the user
of the system.
10-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Mounting the VIP Module
The VIP Module may be mounted in the control cabinet if space is available or, if this is not
possible, on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it. Pry off the VIP Module's cover prior to
wiring.
Do not mount the VIP Module on the cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC board.
To mount the VIP module, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
If you are mounting the VIP module inside the control cabinet, attach it to the
cabinet's interior surface with 2-faced adhesive tape. You may leave the module's
cover off.
2
If you are mounting the VIP module outside the control cabinet, use the screw
holes at the rear to mount horizontally or vertically (2-faced adhesive tape may be
used, if preferred). You can bring wires out from the side or back (a round
breakout is also available on the back). When you complete the Module's
mounting and wiring, you should install the module's cover (with label affixed, as
indicated next).
3
Affix the 4285/4286 connections label (supplied separately) to the inside of the VIP
Module's cover if the cover is used. Otherwise, affix the label to the inside of the
control cabinet's door.
Wiring the VIP Module
The 4285/4286 is wired between the control panel and the premises’ handset(s). It listens for
TouchTones on the phone line and reports them to the control panel. During on-premises
phone access, it powers the premises phones; during off-premises phone access, it seizes the
line from the premises phones and any answering machines.
To wire the VIP module, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Make 12V (+) and (–) and data-in and data-out connections from the VIP Module
to the control, using the connector cable supplied with the VIP Module see figure
10-1. These are the same connections as for remote keypads.
2
Insert the keyed connector into the mating header on the VIP Module.
3
Connect terminals 1 through 7 on the VIP Module as shown in the table below.
4285/4286 Terminal
Connects to:
1. Phone In (Tip)
green wire of direct connect cord
2. Phone In (Ring)
red wire of direct connect cord
3. Phone Out (Tip)
brown wire of direct connect cord
4. Phone Out (Ring)
gray wire of direct connect cord
5. No Connection
6. Audio Out 1∗
Speaker
7. Audio Out 1∗
Speaker
∗Supported by the 4286 only
10-2
Section 10 – 4285/4286 VIP Module
SPEAKER NOTE: IF CONNECTING SINGLE SPEAKER, USE 8-ohm SPEAKER ONLY.
IF CONNECTING 2 SPEAKERS, USE 4-ohm or 8-ohm SPEAKERS
AND CONNECT IN SERIES.
SPEAKER
VOLUME
CONTROL
NO
CONNECTION
YELLOW
GREEN
4500
THERMOSTAT
KEYED
HEADER
GREY
BROWN
CALLER ID
UNIT
EARTH
GROUND
TO CONTROL PANEL
KEYPAD CONNECTIONS
TIP
RING
INCOMING TELCO LINE
TIP
RJ31X
JACK RING
GREEN
RED
LOUDER
NOTE:
4286 DEVICE
ADDRESS IS
FACTORY SET
TO “4”
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
4286 VIP MODULE
SEE SPEAKER NOTE
PREMISES
ANSWERING
MACHINE AND
PHONES
ANSWERING
MACHINE
TIP RING TIP RING
HANDSET INCOMING
TELCO LINE
YELLOW
NO CONNECTION
RED
BLACK
GREEN
IMPORTANT NOTE FOR EXISTING INSTALLATIONS:
EXISTING WIRES CONNECTED TO THE “HANDSET”
TERMINALS ON CONTROL MUST BE MOVED FROM
THERE TO TERMINALS 3 AND 4 ON THE 4286.
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH FCC RULES, PART 68
FCC REGISTRATION No. AC3USA-74659-KX-N
RINGER EQUIVALENCE: 1.0B
U.S. PATENT No. 4791658
Figure 10-1: 4285/4286 VIP Module Connections
Use an RJ31X Jack with the phone cable supplied with the control. Use an additional RJ31X
Jack and a direct-connect cord to make connections to the 4285/4286. Make all connections
exactly as shown in Figure 10-1. This is essential, even if the system is not connected to a
central station. The 4285/4286 will not function if this is not done. If the leads on the
cable are too short to reach their assigned terminals, splice additional wires to them, as
required.
If Touch-tones are not present following phone access to the security system via an onpremises phone, try reversing the pair of wires connected to terminals 3 and 4 on the
4285/4286.
If the phone plug is disconnected from the control, the premise’s phones will not operate.
10-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
10-4
S E C T I O N
1 1
Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) Unit
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ AAV Module Operation
♦ Audio Alarm Verification Module Program
Options
♦ Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
UL
The Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) feature is not UL Listed.
General Information
An Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) Module (also known as two-way voice), such as the Eagle
1250, is an add-on accessory that permits voice dialog between an operator at a central
station and a person at the alarm installation, for the purpose of alarm verification. This
feature is supported only if Alarm reports are programmed to be sent to the primary phone
number.
Make connections from Eagle 1250 Module terminals 7 and 8 to the control's zone 5
terminals 16 and 17. The purpose of this connection is to silence and restore the sounders at
the premises. It is also used to postpone noncritical dialer reports while the AAV session is
in progress. Note that zone 5 is then no longer available as a protection zone. When using
the AAV, zone 5 must be assigned a zone response type (e.g., response type 10), and option
1*60 must be enabled to silence sounders on the premises.
AAV Module Operation
After all messages have been sent during a reporting session to the primary phone number,
the control will trigger the AAV if at least one of the messages was an Alarm report. If
Contact ID format is selected for the primary phone number, the control will send a Listen-in
to Follow message (Event Code 606), which signals the 685 (rev. 4.6 or higher) to hold the
phone connection for 1 minute.
Once triggering occurs, the control will give up the phone line to the AAV Module, without
breaking connection with the central station. During the time the AAV is active, all sirens
and all continuous keypad sounds in all partitions will be shut off. When the AAV indicates
that the audio alarm verification session is completed, all keypad sounds will be restored.
Sirens will be restored if the alarm timeout period has not expired.
As part of its fail-safe software, the control will limit all audio alarm verification sessions to
15 minutes. This is because once the session begins, the AAV Module controls the duration.
If a new fire alarm should occur during a session, the control will break the phone connection
and send the new Fire Alarm report, then re-trigger the AAV Mode. All other dialer
messages triggered during ongoing conversation will be held until either the AAV Module
signals that it is inactive, or the 15-minute timeout occurs.
11-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
One way to trigger the AAV Module is by selecting option 3 in field 1*46 and make
connections as shown in Figure 11-1. Field 1*46 can be used to set ground start, remote
console sounding, long range radio, or open/close trigger. If any one of these functions are
absolutely necessary in a given installation, the alternative AAV trigger method is via the
use of a 4204 Relay Module as shown in Figure 11-2. If this method is selected, program the
start and stop conditions for that relay as choice 60 "Audio Alarm Verification" during Output
Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
Some AAV Modules allow remote triggering by ring detection at the alarm installation.
Please be advised that if this option is selected, it may defeat modem download and
4285/4286 VIP Module remote access capability. The DIP switch settings shown in Figure
11-1, Figure 11-2, and Figure 11-3 disable remote AAV Module trigger option. The control
requires the AAV Module trigger-type as falling edge, which is set in DIP switch settings
shown.
•
•
685 Receiver software must be rev. 4.6 or higher. Earlier versions will not hold the phone line
connection.
Contact ID code for “Listen-in-to-Follow” is 606. Contact ID is the only reporting format that will
send a "Listen-in-to-Follow."
Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections
Connect the Audio Alarm Verification Module's falling edge trigger input (terminal 5 on
Eagle model 1250) to J7 connector trigger output, or to a 4204 relay module, as shown in
Figure 11-1, Figure 11-2, and Figure 11-3.
•
•
If also using a 4285/4286 VIP Module, be sure to follow the corresponding diagram when
making connections.
If the phone plug is disconnected from the control, the premise’s phones will not operate.
(–) EDGE TRIGGER (YELLOW)
PIN 3
CONTROL
••
••
••
••
DIODE FROM
EOLR PACKAGE
J7
}
ZONE 5
EAGLE
SUPPLIED
CABLE
6
(+)
SYSTEM POWER (RED)
(–)
16 17
(–)
(+)
26 27 28 29 30
EARTH
GROUND
RED (R)
GREEN (T)
GREY (R)
BROWN (T)
RJ31X
➤
➤
SYSTEM GROUND (BROWN)
7
CONTROL/
DIALER HEADER
ON
123456
DIP Switch
NOTE:
REFER TO AAV MODULE
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
CONNECTIONS TO AUDIO
SPEAKERS AND MICROPHONE.
TO PREMISES
HANDSET
INCOMING
PHONE LINE
BROWN (–)
••
••
•
RED (+)
EAGLE
1250
TIP
RING
Figure 11-1: AAV Connections Using the J7 Trigger
11-2
Section 11 – Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) Unit
••
••
••
••
J7
ZONE 5
}
CONTROL
EAGLE
SUPPLIED
CABLE
16 17
7
6
EARTH
GROUND
26 27 28 29 30
(+)
RED (R)
GREEN (T)
GREY (R)
BROWN (T)
RJ31X
➤
➤
(–)
CONTROL/
DIALER HEADER
RED
123456
ON
BROWN
4204
13 V+
14
15 GND
16
RELAY 1
SHOWN
OFF
TO PREMISES
HANDSET
INCOMING
PHONE LINE
YELLOW
DIP Switch
NO NC C
BROWN (–)
•
••
•
•
RED (+)
NOTE:
REFER TO AAV MODULE
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
CONNECTIONS TO AUDIO
SPEAKERS AND MICROPHONE.
EAGLE
1250
TIP
RING
Figure 11-2: AAV Connections Using a 4204 Relay Module
(–) EDGE TRIGGER (YELLOW)
PIN 3
CONTROL
•
••
••
•••
DIODE FROM
EOLR PACKAGE
J7
}
ZONE 5
EAGLE
SUPPLIED
CABLE
6
(+)
7
(–)
SYSTEM POWER (RED)
16 17
(–)
(+)
EARTH
GROUND
26 27 28 29 30
RED (R)
GREEN (T)
RJ31X
➤
➤
SYSTEM GROUND (BROWN)
CONTROL/
DIALER HEADER
INCOMING
PHONE
LINE
BROWN (–)
••
••
•
GREY (R)
TO PREMISES
HANDSET
BROWN (T)
ON
123456
DIP Switch
NOTE:
REFER TO AAV MODULE
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
CONNECTIONS TO AUDIO
SPEAKERS AND MICROPHONE.
4 3 2 1
RED (+)
EAGLE
1250
TIP
RING
4286
Figure 11-3: AAV and 4286 VIP Module Connections Using the J7 Trigger
Audio Alarm Verification Module Program Options
If you need information about actual programming procedures, see The Mechanics of
Programming section.
•
Program the following data fields:
*45
PRIMARY DIALER FORMAT: Set for 1 (Contact ID).
1*46
AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE: Set for 3 (unless using 4204 Relay Module).
1*60
ZONE 5/AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION: Set for 1.
Set CANCEL REPORT to a non-zero digit in System Group #1 in Report Code Programming
in the #93 Menu Mode.
11-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
11-4
•
Zone 5 must be programmed for response type 10 and the EOLR must be removed,
regardless of whether or not EOLRs have been enabled in field *41. Zone 5 is no
longer available as a protection zone.
•
If using a 4204 relay instead of the J7 trigger, program the relay to trip on Zone
Type/Sys. Op. 60 Audio Alarm Verification (see the Output Devices section).
S E C T I O N
1 2
J7 Trigger Outputs
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) Equipment
♦ Ground Start Operation
♦ Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment
♦ Remote Keypad Sounder
♦ Event Log Printer
♦ Remote Keyswitch
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
The J7 connector, located in the upper right-hand corner of the main PCB, provides 1 input
and seven trigger outputs that can be used to interface to the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ground start module
Remote keypad sounder
UL Listed keyswitch
Audio alarm verification device (two-way voice)
Auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such as an ADEMCO Long Range Subscriber Radio
Event logging serial printer (via the 4100SM Interface Module)
PC computer used to direct-wire download the panel's programming information (via the
4100SM Interface Module)
The trigger output ratings are listed below. Note that all outputs are power-limited.
Output 1:
LOW: 2K to ground
HIGH: 10-14 VDC @ 20 mA max
Remaining Outputs:
LOW: 1K to ground
HIGH: 10-14 VDC through 5K
The pin assignments for the J7 connector are shown in Figure 12-1. Use a 4142TR 9-wire
trigger cable (1 supplied) to interface with this connector. The panel does not supervise field
wiring connected to this connector.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J7 CONNECTOR
BLUE (GROUND)
BLACK (OUT 4)
BROWN (OUT 3)
RED (OUT 2)
GREEN (GROUND)
WHITE (GROUND)
GRAY (GROUND)
YELLOW (OUT 1)
N/U
4142TR CABLE
OUT 1: GROUND START OR OPEN / CLOSE
OUT 2: FIRE OR KEYSWITCH ARMED LED
OUT 3: BURGULARY/AUDIBLE PANIC/AUXILLIARY
OUT 4: SILENT PANIC/DURESS OR KEYSWITCH READY LED
Figure 12-1. J7 Pin Assignments and Functions
12-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Ground Start Operation
UL
Not intended for use in UL Listed applications..
You cannot use Output 1 for an Ground Start if using it for a Remote Keypad Sounder, Open/Close
trigger, or an AAV module.
Output 1 may be used to trigger an optional 675 Ground Start Module for installations
requiring ground start operation instead of loop start operation to obtain dial tone.
When the panel has a message to transmit to the central station, it will seize the line, and
then trigger the 675 Module to connect the RING side of the telephone line to earth ground.
The panel will cause the module to break the connection between RING and earth ground
when it obtains a dial tone.
Ground Start Operation Setup
To setup the system for ground start operation, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Connect the 675 Ground Start Module to the panel's J7 connector trigger output
1, to auxiliary power, and to the RING side of the telephone line, see figure 12-2.
2
Determine which side of the telephone line is the RING side by connecting the (+)
lead of a DC voltmeter to earth ground, and the (-) lead to one side of the
telephone line. The wire which reads + 50VDC is the RING side.
3
Program the following data field:
1*46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE: Set to "0" (factory default)
J7 CONNECTOR
3
4
WHITE (GROUND)
RED (OUT 2)
BLUE (GROUND)
BLACK (OUT 4)
9
GREEN
BROWN
TO
EARTH
GROUND
BROWN (OUT 3)
8
TO AUX. POWER
TERM. 6
(50mA CURRENT DRAW)
7
VIOLET
GREEN (GROUND)
6
TO AUX. POWER
TERM. 7
5
BLACK
(CUT ORANGE
JUMPER)
TO
TELCO
RING
GRAY (GROUND)
YELLOW (OUT 1)
2
GROUND START
TRIGGER
BLUE
1
675
GROUND
START
MODULE
N/U
4142TR
CABLE
IF USED:
1. OUT 1 IS NO LONGER
USABLE FOR OPEN / CLOSE
(SEE FIELD 1*46).
2. OUT 2, 3, 4 CAN STILL BE
USED TO PROVIDE ALARM
STATUS INDICATIONS OR
TO OPERATE A KEYSWITCH
(SEE FIELD *15).
3. THE 675 IS NOT UL LISTED.
Figure 12-2: Ground Start Module Connections
If you need information about actual programming procedures, see: The Mechanics of
Programming section.
12-2
Section 12 – J7 Trigger Outputs
Remote Keypad Sounder
An optional Amseco PAL 328N Piezo Sounder can be used to duplicate the sounds produced
by the keypad's built-in sounder. The panel will remote all sounds (e g.,. alarm, trouble,
chime, entry/exit, etc.) produced by the keypad's built-in sounder except for the short beeps
associated with keypad key depression. One application of this feature might be to produce
chime sounds at a distant location from the panel's keypads.
Remote Keypad Sounder Setup
To setup for a remote keypad sounder, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Connect the piezo sounder to the panel’s positive auxiliary power output and to
Output 1 on the J7 connector as shown in Figure 12-3.
2
Program the following data field:
1*46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE: Set to "1"
IF USED:
1. OUT 1 IS NO LONGER
USABLE FOR OPEN/CLOSE
OR GROUND START (SEE
FIELD 1*46).
2. OUT 2, 3, 4 CAN STILL BE
USED TO PROVIDE ALARM
STATUS INDICATIONS OR
TO OPERATE A KEYSWITCH
(SEE FIELD *15).
J7 CONNECTOR
5
RED (OUT 2)
BROWN (OUT 3)
9
BLACK (OUT 4)
8
BLUE (GROUND)
RED
7
+
GREEN (GROUND)
6
AMSECO PAL-328N
PIEZO SOUNDER
TO AUX POWER+
TERMIANL 6
(10mA CURRENT DRAW)
4
_
3
WHITE (GROUND)
2
YELLOW (OUT 1)
BLACK
1
GRAY (GROUND)
N/U
4142TR
CABLE
Figure 12-3: Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring
Remote Keyswitch
An optional UL-Listed remote keyswitch, such as the ADEMCO 4146, can be used for remote
arming/disarming of the burglary portion of the system and for remotely silencing alarms.
The keyswitch can operate in only one particular partition.
Remote Keyswitch Setup
To setup for a remote keyswitch, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Connect the keyswitch as shown in figure 12-4. The tamper switch need not be
used for fire or UL household burglary installations.
For UL commercial burglary installations, the tamper switch must be wired to
zone 8, and zone 8 must be programmed for day trouble/night alarm (zone type 5).
When the keyswitch is removed from the wall, the tamper switch will open,
causing an alarm or trouble on zone 8, and causing the control to disable
keyswitch operation until the associated partition is disarmed from a keypad.
2
Program the following data fields:
*15
KEYSWITCH ENABLE: Assign the keyswitch to a partition (1-8).
*40
OPEN/CLOSE REPORT ENABLE: Enter 1 to enable.
1*46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE: Set to "0" (factory default)
*93
ZONE PROGRAMMING: Assigned Zone 7 a non-zero response type.
12-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
TO AUX POWER
(TERMINAL 6)
YELLOW
WHITE
RED
(ARMED)
GREEN
(READY)
820
ohms
820
ohms
RED
BLACK
TO J7 / OUT 2
TO J7 / OUT 4
ZONE
+
2K ELOR
TAMPER SWITCH
(CONTACTS CLOSE WHEN
SWITCH DEPRESSED.
ZONE
LOCK SWITCH
(NORMALLY OPEN)
TO ZONE 7 (+)
(TERMINAL 20)
2K ELOR
Figure 12-4: Remote Keyswitch Wiring
Keyswitch Operation With System Disarmed and No Alarms Present:
A momentary short across zone 7 will arm the partition in the AWAY mode, and a short held
for more than 10 seconds will arm the partition in the STAY mode. A subsequent short will
disarm the partition. The keyswitch LEDs indicate the partition status (see table below).
Faulted zones must either be corrected or bypassed before the system will arm.
Keyswitch Operation With Alarms Present:
A momentary short across Zone 7 will silences alarm bell and keypad sounds, and disarms
the system if it was armed. The keyswitch LEDs provide a memory of alarm indication (see
table below). A subsequent short across Zone 7 will clear the alarm memory indication and
reset 2-wire smoke and glassbreak detectors (if used).
LED INDICATIONS
GREEN
RED
MEANING
OFF
OFF
DISARMED AND NOT READY
ON
OFF
DISARMED AND READY
OFF
ON STEADY
ARMED AWAY
OFF
SLOW FLASH
ARMED STAY
OFF
RAPID FLASH
ALARM MEMORY
If Open/Close reporting for the keyswitch is enabled in field *40, the keyswitch reports as user 0.
12-4
Section 12 – J7 Trigger Outputs
Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) Equipment
An Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) Module (also known as two-way voice), such as the Eagle
1250, is an add-on accessory that permits voice dialog between an operator at a central
station and a person at the alarm installation, for the purpose of alarm verification. This
feature is supported only if Alarm reports are programmed to be sent to the primary phone
number. For a detailed explanation on the operation and wiring of the AAV, see the Audio
Alarm Verification section.
Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment
The J7 connector can be used to provide triggers for the following conditions:
•
Fire alarm
•
Burglary/audible panic alarm
•
Silent panic/duress alarm
•
Opening/closing (arming/disarming)
These triggers may be used to trip auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such as ADEMCO's
7720, 7720ULF, and 7920SE Long Range Radios.
The open/close, fire alarm, burglary/audible panic alarm, and silent panic/duress alarm
triggers are common to all partitions and must be enabled for each partition (data field 2*20).
The open/close trigger is LOW when all enabled partitions are armed, and HIGH when any
enabled partition is disarmed. The remaining triggers are normally LOW and go HIGH
when the corresponding condition occurs in at least one enabled partition. The fire and
burglary/audible panic alarm triggers remain HIGH until a [User Code] + OFF is entered in
all enabled partition(s) which display these conditions. The silent panic/duress trigger works
the same way, except that it is momentary when initiated by duress.
Wiring Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment
Refer to Figure 12-5, Figure 12-6 and Figure 12-7 to make connections to the 7720, 7920SE
and 7720ULF Long Range Radios.
7720 RADIO
SEE 7720 INST. INSTR. FOR
INSTRUCTIONS ON POWERING UNIT
▲
▲
FAULT
7720 WIRING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4142TR CABLE
▲
GND
BURG/AUDIBLE PANIC
SILENT PANIC/DURESS
FIRE
J7
FAULT
FAULT
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
GND
CONTROL
PANEL
(GRAY)
(BROWN) REQUIRED
(BLACK) OPTIONAL
(RED)
OPTIONAL
28 29 30
SEE NOTE 2
TO C-COM AUX PWR
(35mA DRAW)
ORANGE
YELLOW
GREEN
SEE NOTE 4
}
(PROGRAM FOR SHORT ON FAULT)
659EN LINE FAULT MONITOR
7 BLACK
6 RED
+12V GND
▲
▲
FAULT
▲
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PHONE LINE MONITOR
(+12V ON FAULT)
OPTIONAL
PHONE LINE MONITOR
(OPENS ON FAULT)
REQUIRED
INCOMING PHONE LINE
}
EARTH GROUND
RING
TIP
NOTES:
FOR UL LISTED COMMERCIAL BURGLARY
INSTALLATIONS:
1. MOUNT THE 7720 WITH 3 FEET OF THE
C-COM. RUN WIRING FROM C-COM TO
7720 IN CONDUIT.
2. CONNECT RADIO OK OUTPUT TO C-COM
EOLR SUPERVISED ZONE (ZONE 2-8 ONLY).
USE 2K EOLR.
3. SEE UL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ON A
LATER PAGE TO DETERMINE WHEN 659EN
USAGE IS REQUIRED.
4. CONNECT TO C-COM EOLR SUPERVISED
ZONE (ZONE 2-8 ONLY) WHEN DESIRED TO
HAVE PANEL LOCALLY ANNUNCIATE PHONE
LINE FAULTS.
RADIO FAULT OUTPUT
Figure 12-5: Connections to 7720 Long Range Radios
12-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
7920SE RADIO
CONNECT TO
C-COM EARTH
GROUND SCREW
(TB30)
7920SE WIRING
EARTH GROUND
CABINET GROUND
SEE 7920SE INST. INSTR. FOR
INSTRUCTIONS ON POWERING UNIT
TB1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TB2
▲
J7
28 29 30
(RED)
SILENT PANIC/DURESS
BURG/AUDIBLE PANIC
(BLACK) OPTIONAL
(BROWN) REQUIRED
4.7K
(NOT SUPPLIED)
SEE NOTE 2
TO C-COM AUX PWR
(35mA DRAW)
}
7 BLACK
OPTIONAL
RADIO OK OUTPUT
(LOW ON FAULT)
659EN LINE FAULT MONITOR
6 RED
+12V GND
ORANGE
YELLOW
GREEN
▲
▲
FAULT
▲
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PHONE LINE MONITOR
(OPENS ON FAULT)
REQUIRED
INCOMING PHONE LINE
PHONE LINE MONITOR
(+12V ON FAULT)
OPTIONAL
SEE NOTE 4
}
EARTH GROUND
RING
TIP
NOTES:
FOR UL LISTED COMMERCIAL BURGLARY
INSTALLATIONS:
1. MOUNT THE 7920SE WITH 3 FEET OF THE
C-COM. RUN WIRING FROM C-COM TO
7920SE IN CONDUIT.
2. CONNECT RADIO OK OUTPUT TO C-COM
EOLR SUPERVISED ZONE (ZONE 2-7 ONLY).
USE 2K EOLR.
3. SEE UL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ON A
LATER PAGE TO DETERMINE WHEN 659EN
USAGE IS REQUIRED.
4. CONNECT TO C-COM EOLR SUPERVISED
ZONE (ZONE 2-8 ONLY) WHEN DESIRED TO
HAVE PANEL LOCALLY ANNUNCIATE PHONE
LINE FAULTS.
GND (GRAY)
FIRE
FAULT
ZONE 6
ZONE 2
ZONE 1
4142TR CABLE
ZONE 3
CONTROL
PANEL
Figure 12-6: Connections to 7920SELong Range Radios
SEE 7720 ULF INSTRUCTIONS FOR
MORE DETAILED INSTALLATION
INFORMATION
7720 ULF RADIO
FAULT
J5
FAULT
RADIO FAULT
(PROGRAM FOR
SHORT ON FAULT)
SEE NOTE 1
9
8
GRAY
FAULT
- CUT RESISTOR JUMPERS Z1-Z3.
- DO NOT USE 2k EOL RESISTOR.
- PROGRAM 7720 ULF FOR SLAVE
OPERATION. PROGRAM ZONES 1-3
AS ALARM ZONES
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3 4 5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
GROUND
ZONE 1
4142TR
CABLE
GRAY GROUND
J7 CONNECTOR
RED FIRE ALARM
BLACK SILENT PANIC / DURESS ALARM
BROWN BURG / AUDIBLE PANIC ALARM
NOTE 1: CONNECT TO CONTROL PANEL'S HARDWIRE ZONES (2-8) USE 2K EOLR
NOTE 2: MOUNT THE 7720 WITHIN 3 FEET OF THE C-COM. RUN WIRING FROM C-COM TO 7720 IN CONDUIT.
7720ULF_1
Figure 12-7: Connections to 7720ULF Long Range Radio
Programming for Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment
Program the following data fields:
*15
KEYSWITCH ENABLE: Make sure this field is set to 0. The keyswitch and the
auxiliary alarm signaling equipment cannot be used together.
1*46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE: Set to "0" (factory default)
Event Log Printer
The VISTA-128B's event log can be printed on a local serial printer.
Connect a UL EDP Listed serial printer to the J8 connector using an ADEMCO 4100SM
Interface Module. Refer to Event Log Options section for wiring connections, printer
configuration, and a description of the keypad commands for event log printing.
12-6
S E C T I O N
1 3
Long Range Radio (ECP)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Programming for the Long Range Radio
♦ Wiring the Long Range Radio
♦ Trouble Messages
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
The control can support an ECP Long Range Radio (LRR) (7820, 7835C, and 7845C are
supported). These connect to keypad terminals. All messages programmed to be sent via the
phone lines may also be enabled to be sent via the LRR. These messages will be transmitted
in Contact ID format regardless of the format programmed for the control in fields 45 and 47.
It is recommended that if possible, you use Contact ID format for the main dialer. If Contact ID is
not used certain types of reports such as “Listen To Follow” (606), will not be sent at all.
Supervision
The data lines between the control and the LRR can be supervised, as well as certain
functions in the radio. If communication is lost or a trouble condition occurs, both the LRR
and the control’s dialer to the central station can be programmed to send a Trouble message.
Note: For complete information, see the Installation Instructions that accompany the radio.
Operation
The LRR reporting options are defined by selecting categories of events for each subscriber
ID in fields 58 and 59. The reporting categories are Alarms, Troubles, Bypasses,
Openings/Closing, System Events, and Test. In addition, within an enabled category, the
specific event must be enabled for dialer reporting. If, for instance, zone 10 is enabled to
report, but zone 11 is not, zone 10 will report via the LRR, but Zone 11 will not.
The priority of events from most to least important, transmitted from the VISTA-128B to the
LRR is: Fire Alarms, Panic Alarms, Burglary Alarms, Fire Troubles, Non-Fire Troubles,
Bypasses, Openings/Closings, Test messages, and all other types of reports when occurring at
the same time. Otherwise, messages are transmitted on a “first in/first out” basis.
There are two subscriber ID’s programmed into the LRR: primary and secondary. These
correspond to the two subscriber ID’s programmed into the control for each partition. If a
subscriber ID for a partition is not programmed (disabling reports to that central station), the
events enabled for the corresponding subscriber ID in the LRR will not be transmitted.
If the event is to be reported to both phone numbers, dual reporting, then reporting through
the LRR, will be done in an alternating sequence. The first event in the queue will be
transmitted to the primary radio central station. Then this event will be transmitted to the
secondary radio central station. Once the event is reported successfully via the control’s
dialer, it is deleted from the radio’s queue and then the control proceeds to the next event.
If split reporting is selected for the VISTA-128B, then the LRR will follow that option. The
radio will send the appropriate reports to the primary and secondary central stations.
13-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Wiring the Long Range Radio
Connect the data in/out terminals and voltage input terminals of the radio to the control’s
keypad connection points, terminals 6, 7, 8, and 9, as shown below.
6
7
8
9
RED
BLACK
GREEN
ECP RADIO
YELLOW
CONTROL
TERMINALS
Figure 13-1. Wiring Long Range Radio to Keypad Terminals
Programming for the Long Range Radio
The control’s subscriber ID can be passed to the LRR and incorporated into the transmitted
data; or the LRR can transmit the subscriber ID programmed in its own EEPROM.
The programming options for the LRR are as follows:
• To send the reports only via the LRR, bypassing the control’s dialer (field ∗56).
• To stop transmissions via the LRR if communication via the control’s dialer to the central
station was successful (field ∗57).
• Selecting categories of events for each subscriber ID. Field ∗58 is for the primary
subscriber’s ID; field ∗59 for the secondary subscriber’s ID. The reporting categories are:
Alarms, Troubles, Bypasses, Openings/Closings, System Events, and Tests. The control
can be programmed to transmit these reports by partition.
Trouble Messages
The following messages will be displayed on the 6139 (alpha keypad) when a problem exists
the Long Range Radio:
1. “LRR Battery”: The battery connected to the radio is low.
2. “PLL out of Lock”: The radio has an internal fault and cannot transmit any messages.
3. “Early Power Detect”: RF power is detected without a valid transmission.
4. “Power Unattained”: Full RF power was never attained.
5. “Frwd. Power Loss”: RF power was not sustained throughout the transmission.
6. “Antenna Fault”: A problem with the antenna has been detected.
7. “LRR CRC is bad”: The radio’s EEPROM is corrupt (the internal CRC is bad).
Items 2 and 3 require factory service.
Items 4 and 5 could be the result of a bad or low battery.
Item 6 check the antenna, connection and cable otherwise, this requires factory service.
NOTE: All these messages will be displayed in conjunction with the “CHECK 8xx” message
which indicates a trouble on the address to which the LRR unit is programmed in the control.
All of the above events except Antenna Fault will be sent to the event log and reported to the
central station using Contact ID Event Code 333 (expansion device trouble). Antenna Fault
will use Event Code 357. If the tamper is tripped on the LRR, it will use Event Code 341
(expansion device tamper).
13-2
S E C T I O N
1 4
Access Control
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Access Control Using VistaKey
♦ Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point Using
VistaKey or PassPoint
♦ Access Control Using the PassPoint Access
Control System
♦ Using the VISTA-128B for Stand-alone Access
Control
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Interfacing the VISTA-128B with the PassPoint Access Control System via the Vista Gateway
Module is not permissible for UL commercial burglary installations.
UL
General Information
The VISTA-128B is capable of utilizing access control operation via one of two methods:
•
Interfacing with a VistaKey module
•
Interacting with the ADEMCO PassPoint Access Control System (PassPoint ACS) via
VISTA Gateway Module.
The VISTA-128B processes fire, burglary, arm, disarm and other information. The VistaKey
module and PassPoint ACS process card reader information and control the locking and
unlocking of doors.
DO NOT USE BOTH the VistaKey and a PassPoint Access Control System on the same alarm
panel.
Access Control Using VistaKey
The VistaKey is a single-door access control module that, when connected to the VISTA128B, provides access control to the protected premises. The alarm system can support up to
8 VistaKey modules (8 access points).
For detailed instructions on how to install and program the VistaKey, refer the Installation and
Setup Guide that accompanies the VistaKey-SK.
UL
The VistaKey module contains three zones. These zones should ONLY be used for access
control functions in UL installations. THESE INPUT ZONES ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR FIRE
AND BURGLARY APPLICATIONS IN UL INSTALLATIONS.
14-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
VistaKey Features
VistaKey features are as follows:
•
Each VistaKey communicates with the VISTA-128B via a special global polling protocol
of the V-Plex polling loop.
•
In the event local power to the VistaKey is lost, the VistaKey module provides back-up
monitoring of the Access Point door via a built-in V-Plex device that is powered solely
from the polling loop. It is programmed as a new type of V-Plex device as part of the
control’s V-Plex Device Programming. A serial number label is affixed to the VistaKey
module for manual entry of its serial number.
•
The VistaKey supports up to 250 cardholders.
•
All configurable options for each VistaKey are accomplished via software, firmware, and
non-volatile memory, eliminating the need for PC board jumpers.
•
Access Point zone numbers (1-15) are assigned via a user-friendly, 16-position rotary
switch.
•
The addition and removal of VistaKey modules from the system is easily accomplished
via the VISTA-128B keypad.
•
Each VistaKey provides one open-collector output trigger (sink 12mA @ 12VDC).
Mounting and Wiring the VistaKey
To mount and wire the VistaKey module, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Mount the VistaKey, Door Strike or Mag Lock, and Card Reader.
2
If applicable, mount the Door Status Monitor (DSM) and/or Request to Exit (RTE)
devices.
3
Using Figure 14-1 at the end of this section as a reference, connect the Card
Reader interface cable to TB3, making the +5v or +12v connection last.
4
Connect the leads to TB1 in the following order:
a. All ground leads to terminals 2, 5 and 9).
b. The (optional) DSM, RTE, and General Purpose leads to terminals 6, 7, and
8, respectively.
c.
Door Strike (or Mag Lock) lead to terminal 10.
d. Local +12v or +24v supply lead to terminal 1.
e.
14-2
Local +12v or +24v supply lead to the N/C relay terminal 11 (if a Mag Lock is
being used), OR to the N/O relay terminal 10 (if a door strike is being used).
5
Connect the – polling loop and + polling loop leads (from the VISTA-128B) to
terminals 4 and 3 respectively.
6
Set the Address Select switch to the desired access door number (1-15).
7
Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each VistaKey being installed.
Section 14 – Access Control
TO TB1, 11 OR 12
14V MAX (12V @ 85-160mA Nominal)
GND
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 CLASS A
LIMITS OF FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT
TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) IT MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE.
(2) IT MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT
MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
POLLING LOOP +
POLLING LOOP GND
ZONE A (DSM)
ZONE B (RTE)
ZONE C (General)
GND
POLE Door Strike/Mag Coil
N/C MAG COIL POWER
N/O DOOR STRIKE POWER
THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL FIRE
PROTECTION ASSOCIATION'S STANDARDS 70 &
74 (NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOC.,
BATTERYMARCH PARK, QUINCY, MA. 02269).
PRINTED INFORMATION DESCRIBING PROPER
MAINTENANCE, EVACUATION PLANNING AND
REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE PROVIDED WITH
THIS EQUIPMENT.
TB 3
READER INTERFACE CABLE
RDR LED (ORANGE)
GND (BLACK)
DATA 1 (WHITE)
DATA 0 (GREEN)
GND
+5V
+12V (RED)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+ 12 VDC TO ONLY
ONE OF THESE INPUTS.
(FROM TB1-1)
RELAY CONTACT RATINGS:
3A @ 28VDC MAX. (RESISTIVE LOAD)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
TB 1
K1
DOOR
CONTROL
RELAY
FOR ADDITIONAL RATINGS AND
SPECIFICATIONS, REFER TO
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
FOR THE VISTAKEY-SK.
WEEKLY TESTING IS REQUIRED
TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION
OF THIS SYSTEM.
TO ALARM SYSTEM
CONTROL PANEL
POLLING LOOP TERMINALS.
NO
CONNECTION
TRIGGER (SEE NOTE 3)
+
NOTE 1: USE UL LISTED ENERGY CABLE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS.
NOTE 2: VISTAKEY TB3 TERMINAL 5 IS A GROUND AND MAY BE
USED INSTEAD OF TB3 TERMINAL 2. TB3 TERMINALS 2 AND 5 ARE
A COMMON GROUND.
VISTAKEY
NOTE 3: WHEN USING TRIGGER TO TURN ON AN LED OR BUZZER,
RETURN HIGH SIDE OF LED OR BUZZER TO TB3 TERMINAL 7.
TRIGGER RATING IS 15mA AT 12VDC.
Figure 14-1: Wiring the VistaKey
Connecting the Card Reader
Lead from Reader
Lead Color
To VistaKey TB3
Terminal #
Green LED
Orange
1
Ground*
Black
2
DATA 1 (Clock)
White
3
DATA 0 (Data)
Green
4
+5VDC†
Red†
6
+12VDC†
Red†
7
* TB-3 Terminal 5 is also a ground and may be used instead of
terminal 2. Terminals 2 and 5 are a common ground.
Connect to +5VDC OR +12VDC per reader manufacturer’s
specification.
14-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Programming for the VistaKey
The VISTA-128B contains additional programming options in the #93 Menu Mode for the
VistaKey. See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup Guide for the detailed programming
instructions. These options include:
Zone Programming Input Types
•
06 = Serial Number Polling Loop − (Select for Door Status Monitor Backup DSMB). In
the event local power to the VistaKey is lost, the status of the DSM can no longer be
reported to the control panel via the normal microprocessor circuits of the VistaKey. In
this case a V-Plex SIM, which is located on the VistaKey board and powered directly from
the polling loop, is activated and reports the state of the DSM via the standard V-Plex
polling system.
NOTE: To obtain the DSMB function, the Input Type must be defined as 06 and the next
prompt (Access Point) must contain the Access Point # (01-15) (address of the VistaKey
module).
•
11 = VistaKey Door Status Monitor (DSM) − This input type is used to define the
zone that will monitor when the door (access point) is open. It is used by the system to be
able to determine if the door is opened after a card swipe or if the door is being held in an
open position. The device is normally a magnetic switch mounted on the door where the
status of the switch will be different while the door (access point) is in an open condition.
•
12 = VistaKey Request to Exit (RTE) − Use this input type to map an uncommitted
RTE zone to an alarm panel zone and is not normally used if the zone is used for a
request to exit function.
•
13 = VistaKey General Purpose (GP) − This input type operates in the same manner
as other VISTA-128B alarm panel zones and is provided so that a zone in the proximity
of the VistaKey can be wired without having to run additional wiring from the VISTA–
128B control panel.
Access Point Programming
This is part of the #93 Menu Mode. It is used to define the parameters for each of the
VistaKey access points including which group(s) have access through an access point (door).
Access Group Programming
This is part of the #93 Menu Mode. It is used to define the capabilities (privileges) for each
group of users.
Event/Action Programming
This is part of the #93 Menu Mode. It is used to define events and time windows for a group.
This area specifies when a group may be provided entry and/or exit authorization and the
action to be taken on entry or exit. This action covers functions such as system arming,
system disarming, output activation, and etc.
Note:
14-4
•
Output Device Control may be accomplished via the [User Code] + [#] + [77] mode.
•
Access Control Test may be accomplished via the [User Code] + [#] + [78] + [Grant
Command]
•
Card enrollment may be accomplished via the [User Code] + [#] + [79] mode.
Section 14 – Access Control
VistaKey Dialer Enables
When the VistaKey is installed with an alarm system, the system defaults are set so that the
system does not send reports to the central station. The programming is accomplished in field
1∗35 for the following events:
•
•
•
•
•
ACS Troubles - To enable or disable ACS trouble reporting.
ACS Bypasses - To enable or disable ACS bypass reporting.
ACS System - To enable or disable ACS system reporting, (i.e., ACS module reset).
ACS Alarms - To enable or disable ACS alarm reporting.
Dialer (Trace) To enable or disable access grant/denial events sent to the central station.
Access Control Using the PassPoint Access Control System
The VISTA-128B interfaces with the PassPoint ACS via the VISTA Gateway Module (VGM).
The VGM is connected between the ECP bus (keypad terminals) of the control and the
network bus of the PassPoint ACS (see Figure 14-2). The control sends the VGM its status
information, event log entries and entry/exit requests, (inputs programmed with response
type Access Point), from keypads, hardwired zones, and RF transmitters. The VGM then
reformats and retransmits this information to the Main Logic Board, (MLB) on the PassPoint
ACS network bus.
The VISTA-128B is able to control the following on the PassPoint ACS:
• Access Points
The PassPoint ACS is able to control the following on the VISTA-128B:
• Relays
• Arming/disarming schedules
• Keypad Display
See the documentation that comes with the PassPoint ACS for details.
The PassPoint ACS can dedicate some of its inputs for use as regular VISTA-128B hardwired
zones (the zone response type is ACS). The PassPoint ACS can also utilize the VISTA-128B’s
dialer for reports to the central station.
Using ACS Zone Inputs
If the PassPoint ACS has uncommitted zones, these may be used by the VISTA-128B as
hardwired zones.
Programming the ACS Zone Inputs
Step
Action
1
Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
2
Program this zone as any other zone. Indicate the input type as ACS (10).
3
Enter the PassPoint ACS’s zone ID (00-31)
See Zone Programming in #93 Menu Mode Programming in the Programming Guide for a
detailed explanation.
PassPoint Dialer Events
All PassPoint ACS events can be sent to the VISTA-128B’s dialer via the VGM. These events
will also be logged into the control’s event log. This is enabled in the PassPoint ACS. See the
PassPoint ACS documentation for a detailed explanation.
Wiring the Vista Gateway Module
The Vista Gateway Module is connected between the ECP bus (VISTA-128B keypad
terminals) and the network bus of the PassPoint Access Control System. See Figure 14-2 for
the proper wiring connections.
14-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
}
PROM C
ECHELON NETWORK
(PASSPOINT ACS)
4-PIN
KEYPAD
PLUG
TRANSFORMER
GREEN
BLACK
RED
YELLOW
}
TO
CONTROL’S
KEYPAD
TERMINALS
Figure 14-2: Wiring the Vista Gateway Module
Programming the Vista Gateway Module
See the PassPoint ACS instructions to program the Vista Gateway Module.
Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point Using VistaKey or PassPoint
The control can send entry and exit requests to the VistaKey or PassPoint ACS utilizing
keypads, and button type (BR) RF transmitters. A zone is programmed with a response type
27 (Access Point) and an appropriate input type (console, RF).
Using the Alpha Keypad
The following entries at the keypad provide access of a door.
•
•
Code + #73
Code + #74 + access point
These entries allow a user to gain access to an access point.
Code + #75 + access point + function
The selectable functions available are Grant, Protect, Bypass. Selecting ‘Grant” will
temporarily unlock a door. Selecting “Protect” will cause the door to unlock only when a
valid keypad entry is received. Selecting “Bypass” will cause the door to be permanently
unlocked to allow continuous access.
•
Programming the Keypad
Step
Action
1
Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
2
Program the zone with a response type 27 (Access Point).
3
Enter the access point number (00-31) of the door and indicate whether this is an
entry or exit console.
4
Program whether this is an entry or exit point.
5
Enter the partition number.
6
Enter the input type as CS (09).
7
Enter the keypad ECP address.
See Zone Programming in #93 Menu Mode Programming in the Programming Guide for a
detailed explanation.
14-6
Section 14 – Access Control
Using an RF Transmitter Zone
A button type RF button-type transmitter (5804) can be used to provide access or egress for
up to 4 doors. One button will control one door. Also, a button can be used to provide access
or egress due to a panic or duress condition.
An RF transmitter (5816) can be used with a remote switch to provide exit in case of a fire
alarm using a PassPoint event action.
Programming the RF Transmitter
Step
Action
1
Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
2
Program the zone with a response type 27 (Access Point).
3
Enter the access point number (00-31) of the door.
4
Indicate whether RF device is for entry or exit.
5
Enter the partition number
6
Enter the input type: button RF (05).
7
Enter the loop number.
8
Enroll the serial number
See Zone Programming in #93 Menu Mode Programming in the Programming Guide for a
detailed explanation.
•
RF buttons and pendants must be assigned to a user number in order to function. See the
User Access Codes section for the procedure.
An RF transmitter will not provide access or grant if the system is in any test mode.
•
Using Wireless Keypads
Wireless keypads (5827 & 5827BD) can provide another way of entering or exiting the
premises. They function the same as alpha keypads, except when the code + # 73 is entered.
This entry will allow momentary access to ALL access points in the partition to which the
keypad is assigned
Programming the Wireless Keypad
Enter the partition the keypad is assigned to in field 1*48.
Control of Lighting and Appliances
Lighting and appliances can be controlled when an access or exit event occurs. Lights or
appliances can be automatically turned on or off when a valid entry or egress request is
presented at an access point. To control these devices, the VISTA-128B relays or the ACS
relays or triggers are used with keypads and/or RF transmitters whose response type is
Access Point (27).
Programming the Control of Lighting and Appliances
Step
Action
1
Enter Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
2
Program all the information for the relay.
3
Select the output type: ECP (1) (4204/4204CF) or (2) (X-10).
See Output Programming in #93 Menu Mode Programming in the Programming Guide for a
detailed explanation.
14-7
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Using the VISTA-128B for Stand-alone Access Control
The VISTA-128B can be used for access control without interfacing to PassPoint ACS. A user
can trigger an access point (i.e., door strike) for 2 seconds by entering [User Code] + [0].
Programming the Control for Stand-alone Access Control
Step
Action
1
Enter Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
2
Program the output type as 1, 2, or 3.
3
For type 1, program the ECP address and relay #.
4
For type 2, program the house and unit codes
5
Program the relay number in field 1∗76 (partition-specific).
See Output Programming in #93 Menu Mode Programming in the Programming Guide for a
detailed explanation.
14-8
S E C T I O N
1 5
External Sounders
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Alarm Output Supervision
♦ Installing Alarm Indicating Devices to the
Alarm Output
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
The VISTA-128B provides a bell circuit output for operating fire and burglary alarm
notification appliances. The alarm output is rated as follows: 10VDC - 14VDC, 1.7A max.,
power limited.
UL
For household fire and combination household fire/burglary installations, the total current drawn
from the auxiliary power, polling loop, and alarm output combined, must not exceed 750mA.
For household burglary installations the total current drawn from the alarm output must not
exceed 1.7A. A battery must be installed since the combined auxiliary power, polling loop, and
alarm output in excess of 750mA must be supplied by the battery.
The output has the following options:
UL
•
Selectable for supervision
•
Selectable for confirmation of arming ding (1-2 sec. sounding to confirm system has
armed)
•
Selectable to chime when entry/exit or perimeter zones are faulted
•
Selectable for no timeout or timeout of 2-30 minutes
Burglary bell circuits must be programmed for a timeout of 16 minutes or longer.
15-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Alarm Output Supervision
When supervision is enabled, the panel monitors the alarm output wiring for open and short
circuit faults while the output is inactive. The VISTA-128B will provide a trouble indication
(Zone 970) when there is an open circuit in the alarm output wiring that disconnects all
indicating devices from the panel, or when there is a short circuit between the Bell (+)
and Bell (-) terminal wiring, (or between the Bell (+) terminal wiring and earth ground
provided that the panel's earth ground terminal #30 is connected to a proper earth ground).
The VISTA-128B will indicate a trouble condition regardless of whether the system is armed
or disarmed. The supervisory zone will display on the keypads, report to the event log, and
transmit to the central station (if programmed), on Partition 1. The Contact ID event code is
321, Bell Trouble.
To use the supervision feature, do the following:
•
Wire polarized fire-indicating devices to the alarm output as shown in Figure 15-1.
•
Wire nonpolarized burglary indicating devices to the alarm output using a polarizing
diode (two 2A diodes supplied), as shown in Figure 15-2.
•
Program Zone 970 with a response type of 05 (trouble by day/alarm by night). See Zone
Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
The minimum load on the alarm output must exceed 5mA at 12V for proper supervision operation.
If a device such as a siren driver with a high resistance trigger input (drawing less than
5mA) is being used, do the following:
UL
•
Cut the blue jumper on the upper left-hand corner of the panel's PC Board.
•
Program Zone 970 with a response type of 00 (no response). See Zone Programming in
the #93 Menu Mode.
•
Mount the siren driver in the panel's cabinet.
If a device such as a siren driver with a high resistance trigger input (drawing less than 5mA) is
being used in a UL household fire installation, the siren driver must independently supervise siren
speaker wiring.
To disable the supervision feature, do the following:
15-2
•
Cut the blue jumper on the upper left-hand corner of the panel's PC Board.
•
Program Zone 970 with a response type of 00 (no response). See Zone Programming in
the #93 Menu Mode.
Section 15 – External Sounders
Installing Alarm Indicating Devices to the Alarm Output
Be sure to follow the proper guidelines below, depending on whether the system is installed
in a UL or Non-UL application.
Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices
UL
Use only UL Listed sounding devices for UL installations
Model Number
Device Type
Requires Polarizing Diode
719
Compact Outdoor Siren
(not UL Listed)
Yes
747
Indoor Siren
Yes
AB12
Grade A Bell
Yes
System Sensor MA 12/24D
Fire Piezo Horn
No
System Sensor P12575
Fire Horn/Strobe
No
Wheelock AS-121575W
Fire Horn/Strobe
No
UL985 Household Fire or Combination Household Fire/Burglary Installations
For installations, which must provide UL Listed protection, the total current drawn from the
alarm output, auxiliary power output, and polling loop combined, must not exceed 750mA in
order to comply with the battery independence requirements. If, for example, two System
Sensor PA400 piezo alarm sounders, wired in parallel, are used (24mA total), then 726mA
(750mA – 24mA) is available for auxiliary output and polling loop use.
UL
This control complies with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) requirements for temporal
pulse sounding of fire notification appliances.
Wire polarized fire-indicating devices to the alarm output as shown in Figure 15-1.
1
2
3
+
4
5
-
6
7
8
ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT 10VDC - 13.8VDC
1.7A maximum
+
-
BELL
HORN
Figure 15-1: Wiring Polarized Fire Indicating Devices
15-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
UL1023 Household Burglary Installations
For household burglary installations the total current drawn from the alarm output must not
exceed 1.7A. A battery must be installed since the combined auxiliary power, polling loop,
and alarm output, in excess of 750mA must be supplied by the battery.
Wire nonpolarized burglary indicating devices to the alarm output using a polarizing diode
as shown in Figure 15-2.
POLARIZING DIODES
(MUST MOUNT AT INDICATING DEVICE)
PANEL BELL
+
BELL
HORN
BELL
-
}
TO OTHER
DEVICES
PANEL BELL
NON- POLARIZED BURGLARY
INDICATING DEVICES
POLARIZED FIRE
INDICATING DEVICE
Figure 15-2: Wiring Nonpolarized Burglary Indicating Devices
Non-UL Installations
For non-UL installations, the total current drawn from this output can be up to 1.7 amps. A
battery must be installed since current in excess of 750mA is supplied by the battery. Up to
two 719 sirens can be used wired in parallel.
Programming the Alarm Output
Program the following data fields:
15-4
*13
Select Timeout for Bell
*16
Confirmation of Arming Ding for Bell
*21
PREVENT FIRE TIMEOUT (1=no timeout; 0=fire timeout
*23
MULTIPLE ALARMS (partition-specific)
1*47
Enable Chime for Bell
S E C T I O N
1 6
Event Log Options
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Programming Event Log Options
♦ Event Log Printer Connections
♦ Event Logging Procedures
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
This system has the ability to record up to 512 events of various types in a history log. Each
event is recorded in one of six categories with the time and date of its occurrence (if real-time
clock is set). These categories are:
•
Alarm
•
Supervisory/check
•
Bypass
•
Open/close
•
System conditions
•
Test
The log may be viewed (Display Mode) on an alpha keypad, or can be printed (Print Mode) on
a serial printer (connected to the system via a 4100SM Serial Interface Module).
Event Log Printer Connections
The VISTA-128B's event log can be printed on a local serial printer.
Connect a UL EDP Listed serial printer to the J7 connector using an ADEMCO 4100SM
Interface Module, as shown in Figure 16-1.
The 4100SM Module must be connected to the panel using the distance of the trigger cable. The
wires cannot be lengthened to mount the module in a remote location.
The printer must be configured as follows:
•
7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
•
300 or 1200 baud (1200 required if alpha numeric pager interface is installed)
•
Hardware handshaking using DTR signal
The 4100SM Module is supplied with a 10-foot RS232 cable. A longer cable or an extension
cable can be used if the VISTA-128B is separated from the serial printer by more than 10
feet, but the total cable length should be less than 50 feet.
16-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J8 CONNECTOR
GREEN
OU
T6
BROWN
GR
OU
ND
BLUE
GR
OU
ND
BLACK
RED
OU
T5
GR
OU
ND
PR IN 2
INT
GR ER D VIOLET
OU TR
ND
GREY
IN
3
YELLOW
NU
4142TR CABLE (SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM)
4100SM SERIAL MODULE
To TB6 Aux. Power (+)
(25mA current draw)
To TB7 Aux. Power (-)
4100SM JUMPERS
(CUT TO SET RESPECTIVE SIGNAL FLOATING)
COLOR
RED
BLUE
WHITE
FUNCTION
CD
CTS
DSR
PIN#
8
5
6
8
+ PWR
7
- (GND)
6
RXD
5
not used
4
not used
3
TXD
2
not used
1
DTR
RED
USE GENDER CHANGER
SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM
IF PRINTER HAS DB25
MALE CONNECTOR
BLUE WHITE
3M
Cable
Supplied with
4100SM
SERIAL PRINTER
SET FOR: 8 DATA BITS
EVEN PARITY
STOP BIT
300/1200 BAUD
HARDWARE HANDSHAKE
USING DTR SIGNAL
Figure 16-1. Event Log Printer Connections
Most printers either ignore the CTS, DSR, and CD signals, or require them to be high (i.e., 315VDC as measured on RS232 DB25 Connector Pins 5, 6 & 8, respectively, with respect to
Ground Pin 7). The 4100SM Module sets these pins high. If the printer being used will not
operate with these pins high, then clip the blue (CTS), white (DSR), or red (CD) jumpers on
the 4100SM Module to set the corresponding signal floating. Important pins on the RS232C
cable are Pin 3 (data out), Pin 7 (ground) and Pin 20 (DTR - ready).
The DTR signal, as measured at 4100SM TB1, should be high (9.5-14VDC) when the printer
is powered, properly connected, on-line and ready to print. This signal will be low (01.5VDC) when the printer is not powered, not properly connected, off-line or out of paper.
The VISTA-128B will not send printing data to the printer unless the DTR signal is high.
Programming Event Log Options
Program the following data fields:
1*70 EVENT LOG TYPES (1=enable; 0=disable for each type)
1*71 12/24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT (0=12 hr; 1=24 hr)
1*72 EVENT LOG PRINTER ON-LINE (0=disable; 1=enable)
1*73 PRINTER BAUD RATE (1=300; 0=1200)
Enter Report Code Programming in the #93 Menu Mode to program report codes for the
event log (System Group #4 codes).
If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see The Mechanics of
Programming section.
16-2
Section 16 – Event Log Options
Event Logging Procedures
In order for proper time and date stamping to occur, the system's real-time clock must be set.
Refer to the Setting the Real Time Clock section.
If you have selected the printer to be "on-line" (field 1*72), events will print automatically, as
they occur. To display or print on demand, the following commands apply:
Commands
Display Mode:
Installer or Master Code + [#] + [6] + [0]
Print Mode:
Installer or Master Code + [#] + [6] + [1]
Clear Event Log:
Installer or Master Code + [#] + [6] + [2]
To EXIT Event Log:
Press [∗] at any time.
Display/Printing: After entering either the Display or Print Mode, the following will be
displayed:
ENTER 0 = RECENT
1 = COMPLETE
SCAN LOG BY PART
0=NO 1-8=PART #
The event log holds up to 512 events, and can display or print all
events in a category (complete), or only those events in a category
occurring since the last “Clear Event Log” command (recent). Note
that once the event log is full, the oldest event will be erased upon
the logging of any new event. Press the desired Display Mode key,
0 or 1.
The system allows viewing of any partition's event log. Enter the
partition number for the partition whose events are to be displayed.
Entering 0 (NO) will display all events that occurred in the system,
regardless of partition. Events are displayed in chronological
order, from most recent to oldest.
For display and printing purposes, events are stored on a partitionby-partition basis (except system events), and are grouped into five
categories, as follows.
Use the [3] & [1] keys to scroll to the next and previous screens, respectively:
ALARM EVENT LOG
TYPE
CCC UUU
CHECK EVENT LOG
TYPE
CCC UUU
BYPASS EVENT LOG
TYPE
CCC UUU
OP/CL EVENT LOG
TYPE
CCC UUU
SYSTEM EVENT LOG
TYPE
CCC UUU
Displays time/date for zones that have either caused an alarm or
have been restored in selected partition.
Displays time/date for zones that have caused a trouble or
supervisory condition in selected partition.
Displays time/date for zones that have been bypassed in selected
partition.
Displays time/date and user number for each arming and
disarming of the system for the partition selected.
Displays time/date for system problems, such as AC loss,
communication failure, etc., regardless of partition.
16-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
ALL EVENT LOG
TYPE
CCC UUU
Displays all test events.
TEST EVENT LOG
TYPE
Displays all categories of events in chronological order, from
most recent to the oldest.
CCC UUU
To display the events in a particular category, press [8] at the desired category screen.
If in Display Mode, the most recent event is displayed. Press [1] to display older events; press
[3] to go forward in time.
If in Print Mode, the first press of [8] will cause the printer to print all events in that
category, with each event automatically scrolled on the display keypad. The following is a
typical display:
P8 01/01
12:02A
BURGLARY
003
Shows burglary alarm occurred in zone 3 of Partition 8, at
12:02AM on January 1.
After the last event in the selected category has been displayed (using either the [1] or [3]
keys), the following will appear for a few seconds:
END OF EVENT LOG
TYPE
CCC UUU
CLEAR EVENT LOG
0=NO 1=YES
Press [1] if Event Log Clear function is to be performed.
Clearing the event log does not erase any events from the system
memory. All events in the log will still be displayed if the
COMPLETE option is selected. Only those events occurring
from the time of the CLEAR command will be displayed if
RECENT display option is selected. Press [0] if event log is not
to be cleared at this time.
If [1] is pressed, the following will appear:
Press [1] if it is desired to clear the event log. Press [0] if event
log is not to be cleared.
ARE YOU SURE?
0=NO 1=YES
SCREEN DEFINITIONS
16-4
RECENT
Events since last CLEAR
COMPLETE
Displays all events
TYPE
Type of event (burglary, fire, etc.)
CCC
Zone (contact) number
UUU
User number
S E C T I O N
1 7
4100APG Pager Interface
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Programming the Control for the Pager
♦ Mounting the 4100APG
♦ 4100APG LED Indications
♦ Wiring the 4100APG
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
The VISTA-128B supports sending messages to a pager using the 4100APG Pager Interface.
The 4100APG transmit to the pager any message programmed to be sent to the event log
printer, even if the printer is not being used.
The types of messages are divided into 6 categories: Alarms; Troubles; Bypasses;
Openings/Closings; System and Test. Each type has its own programming field for the pager
phone number and pager ID. This allows each message either to be sent to a different paging
service or to the same service.
The 4100APG will hang up between each message. Multiple messages will be sent in the
order received. If the 4100APG cannot make contact with the paging service, it will retry up
to 10 times. If the interface loses contact with the VISTA-128B, it will send a message to the
paging service to notify the user.
The pager interface must be wired to a different phone line than the VISTA-128B itself. Otherwise,
the communication of both will not function properly.
Mounting the 4100APG
The 4100APG may be mounted either inside or outside the control cabinet.
Do not mount the 4100APG on the cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC board.
To mount the 4100APG, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
If you are mounting the 4100APG inside the control cabinet, attach it to
the cabinet's interior surface with 2-faced adhesive tape. You may leave the
interface's cover off.
2
If you are mounting the 4100APG outside the cabinet, use the screw holes
at the rear to mount horizontally or vertically (2-faced adhesive tape may be used,
if preferred). You can bring wires out from the side or back (a round breakout is
also available on the back).
17-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Wiring the 4100APG
The 4100APG may be used either with or without a serial printer. The 4100APG connects to
the VISTA-128B via the 4100SM. The 4100SM connects to the J8 connector on the control
via the 4142TR Cable.
Without the Event Log Printer
Connecting the 4100SM to the Control:
To connect the 4100SM to the control, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Connect the 4142TR to J8 on the control. See figure 17-1.
2
Connect the RED wire of 4142TR to TB1-6 of 4100SM (RxD).
3
Connect the VIOLET wire of 4142TR to TB1-1 of 4100SM (DTR).
4
Connect TB1-7 of 4100SM to terminal 7 (Auxiliary Power -) of the control.
5
Connect TB1-8 of 4100SM to terminal 6 (Auxiliary Power +) of the control
Connecting the 4100APG to the 4100SM
To connect the 4100APG to the 4100SM, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Connect the Incoming telephone line to the 4100APG RJ11 connector labeled
LINE. See figure 17-1.
2
(Optional) Connect the Handset side of telephone line to 4100APG RJ11 connector
labeled PHONE.
3
Connect the DB25M to DB-9M Cable (supplied), from 4100SM (25 pin) to
4100APG (9 pin) connector labeled SERIAL PORT INPUT.
7
Aux. Pwr
Aux. Gnd
Brown
6
Violet
J8
4100SM
Red
Black
RxD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DB-25
4100APG
DB-9
RJ-11
Serial Port Input
Line
To Telco
Figure 17-1: Wiring the 4100APG Without the Serial Printer
17-2
Section 17 – 4100APG Pager Interface
With the Event Log Printer
The serial printer must be configured for 1200 baud rate, seven data bits, even parity, and one stop
bit. (7/E/1).
To connect the 4100APG with a serial printer, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Perform the steps outlined for connecting 4100APG Without a Serial Printer.
2
Connect a DB-25 to DB-25 cable from the printer to the 4100SM. See figure 17-2.
3
Configure the printer for 1200 baud rate, seven data bits, even parity, and one
stop bit. (7/E/1).
7
Aux. Pwr
Aux. Gnd
Brown
6
Violet
J8
4100SM
Red
Black
RxD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DB-25
DB-25
1200 Baud Serial
Printer 7-E-1
4100APG
DB-9
RJ-11
Serial Port Input
Line
To Telco
Figure 17-2: Wiring the 4100APG With the Serial Printer
When you complete the module's mounting and wiring, you should install the module's cover
(with label affixed).
17-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Programming the Control for the Pager
•
In field *64 enter 1 to enable the 4100APG pager interface.
•
In field *65 enter the phone number of the paging service for Alarm reports. Up to 17
digits may be entered.
•
In field *66 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Alarm reports. This is
the PIN number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.
•
In field *67 enter the phone number of the paging service for Trouble reports. Up to 17
digits may be entered.
•
In field *68 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Trouble reports. This is
the PIN number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.
•
In field *69 enter the phone number of the paging service for Bypass reports. Up to 17
digits may be entered.
•
In field *70 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Bypass reports. This is
the PIN number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.
•
In field *71 enter the phone number of the paging service for Open/Close reports. Up to
17 digits may be entered.
•
In field *72 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Open/Close reports. This
is the PIN number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.
•
In field *73 enter the phone number of the paging service for System reports. Up to 17
digits may be entered.
•
In field *74 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for System reports. This is
the PIN number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.
•
In field *75 enter the phone number of the paging service for Test reports. Up to 17
digits may be entered.
•
In field *76 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Test reports. This is the
PIN number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.
•
In field 1*70 enable the events for the event log.
•
In field 1*72 enable the Printer On-Line option. This must be turned on to allow events
to be sent to the pager interface when they occur.
4100APG LED Indications
Below is a table outlining the LED indications:
LED Name
Power
Blinking
Off
OK
On Battery (B/U)
No Power
Pulse
Line
Not in use (OK)
Call
Call in Progress
Page Retry
Idle
Busy
Telephone Busy
No Dial Tone
OK
Page Fail
OK
Page OK
Data
No Data
Msg Data
Load
No Data
Prog Data
Page
TRBL
17-4
Steady
In Use
Trouble
OK
S E C T I O N
1 8
Final Power-Up Procedure
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Earth Ground Considerations
♦ Determining the Control Panel Power Supply
Load
♦ Connecting the Transformer
♦ Determining the Size of the Standby Battery
♦ Programming Power and AC Options
♦ Connecting the Battery
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
UL
•
You can power the control from the supplied 1361 Transformer (1361CN in Canada),
rated 16.5VAC, 40VA, which plugs directly into a 24 hour, 120VAC, 60 Hz outlet.
•
If you are using powerline carrier devices, you must use the 4300 Transformer instead.
Use 1361CN Transformer in Canadian installations.
Power Limiting Outputs
All outputs are power-limited as per UL985/UL1023. The following table shows the
maximum current that may be drawn from each output.
Output
Maximum Current Draw
Auxiliary Power
750mA
Polling Loop
128mA
Alarm Output
1.7A
For Household Fire or Combination Household Fire/Burglary Installation: the total
current drawn from the auxiliary power, the polling loop and the alarm output combined
must not exceed 750mA in order to comply with the battery independence requirements in
UL985.
For Household Burglary Only Installations: the total current drawn from the alarm
output may be up to 1.7A. A battery must be installed to supply combined the auxiliary
power, the polling loop and the alarm output current in excess of 750mA.
18-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Earth Ground Considerations
In order for the lightning transient protective devices in this product to be effective, the
designated earth ground terminal (terminal 30), must be terminated in a good earth ground.
We recommend using #16 AWG copper wire run at a maximum length of 25 ft. The following
are examples of good earth grounds available at most installations:
•
Metal Cold Water Pipe: Use a non-corrosive metal strap (copper is recommended)
firmly secured to the pipe to which the ground lead is electrically connected and secured.
•
AC Power Outlet Ground: Available from 3-prong, 120VAC, power outlets only. To test
the integrity of the ground terminal, use a three-wire circuit tester with neon lamp
indicators, such as the UL-Listed Ideal Model 61-035, or equivalent, available at most
electrical supply stores.
Connecting the Transformer
Failure to observe the polling loop current rating will cause polling loop malfunction. Failure to
observe the auxiliary power current rating will result in a battery that does not charge properly or
possibly a tripped circuit breaker.
18-2
Step
Action
1
Use the Polling Loop Current Draw and Auxiliary Device Current Draw
Worksheets found later in this section to make sure that the currents drawn
by the devices connected to the system do not exceed the system's respective
ratings.
2
Connect all installed devices to the control.
3
Wire the 1361 Transformer (1361CN in Canada) to the panel (before
connecting the battery) as shown in Figure 18-1, or wire the 4300 Transformer
as shown in Figure 18-2 (if using Powerline Carrier devices).
4
Plug the transformer into a 24 hour, uninterrupted, 120VAC, 60Hz outlet.
After a few seconds, the keypad display will appear.
Section 18 – Final Power-Up Procedure
GEL CELL
BATTERY
CHARGING
VOLTAGE
13.7 VDC
1
Connect to
24hr. source
of AC mains
NOTE:
WHEN POWERING UP
THE PANEL, PLUG THE
TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE
CONNECTING THE BATTERY.
2
3
TRANSFORMER
16.5VAC, 40VA
ADEMCO No.1361
or 4300, XM10E, or
XF10 if X-10 DEVICES
WILL BE USED.
NO CONNECTION
Connect to
12VDC, 4AH
or 12VDC, 7AH
RED (+)
BATTERY
TABS
BLK (-)
PRIMARY
POWER
Supplied by a
transformer which
is rated at
16.5VAC, 40VA.
Caution must be
taken when wiring
this transformer to
the panel to guard
against blowing the
fuse inside the
transformer (nonreplaceable).
Figure 18-1: 1321 Transformer and Battery Connections
4300 TRANSFORMER/INTERFACE
4
5
6
BROWN
BLUE
BLACK
SyncData Com
YELLOW
WHITE
RED
GREEN
3
J8 CONNECTOR
GR
OU
OU ND
T
OU 5
T
GR 6
O
GR UND
OU
ND
2
IN
GR 2
OU
N
IN D
3
1
GRAY
Earth
AC Ground AC
VIOLET
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4142TR CABLE
TB1 TB1
-1 -30
TB1
-2
Figure 18-2: 4300 Transformer Connections
Programming Power and AC Options
Program the following data fields:
*17 AC POWER LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING (1=yes; 0=no)
*19 AC RANDOMIZE (1=randomize; 0=no)
*28 POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE (1=yes; 0=no)
If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see The Mechanics of
Programming section.
18-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Determining the Control Panel Power Supply Load
Use the following tables to calculate the total current for the Auxiliary Power, Alarm Output
and Polling Loop. In each table, multiply each device's standby and/or alarm current by the
number of units used.
1. Table 1: Total Polling Loop Current Draw
Refer to the instruction accompanying the device for the current draw. Refer to the
POLLING LOOP section for device restrictions for fire and burglary usage.
Polling Loop
Current
# of Units
Total
Polling Loop Subtotal
(terminals 24 & 25 – 128mA) ✳
✳ The total current cannot exceed 128mA. If total load exceeds 128mA, then a 4297 loop
Extender Module can be used. This module is powered from the panel's auxiliary
power, and provides a separate polling loop output, which can support an additional
128mA load. Note that the total number of points connected to the panel cannot
exceed 119.
18-4
Section 18 – Final Power-Up Procedure
2. In table 2, enter devices used on Auxiliary Power. Calculate standby and alarm currents,
then add to get Auxiliary Power current subtotal.
Table 2: Auxiliary Power Current Load
Total Current
Device Model #
Device Current X # of Units =
Standby
Alarm
Auxiliary Power Subtotal
(terminals 6 & 7 – 750mA max.)
3. In table 3, enter devices connected to the Alarm Output. Calculate alarm currents, then
add to get the Alarm Output current subtotal.
Table 3: Alarm Output Current Load
Total Current
Device Model #
Device Current X # of Units =
Standby
Alarm
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
Alarm Output Subtotal
(terminals 4 & 5 - 1.7A max.)
18-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
4. In table 4, enter the total calculated subtotals of all listed outputs from Tables 1 through
3, then add to get the combined current.
Table 4: Total VISTA-128B Current Load
Total Current
Standby
Alarm
250mA
330mA
Polling Loop Subtotal (see Table 1)
Auxiliary Power Subtotal (see Table 2)
Alarm Output Subtotal (see Table 3)
VISTA-128B PCB Current (Includes 2-wire smoke
detector loading on zones 1 & 2)
Total Current Load
Determining the Size of the Standby Battery
The cabinet supplied with the VISTA-128B panel can house up to 12V, 14AH batteries (two
12V, 7AH batteries wired in parallel). The VISTA-ULKT kit provides a cabinet that can
house up to 12V, 17.2AH batteries and that may be used with this panel. The total standby
current drawn from the auxiliary power and polling loop outputs combined must be limited
to 270mA when 14AH batteries are used; and 390mA when 17.2AH batteries are used.
DO NOT use Gates batteries (sealed lead-acid type). These batteries require a different charging
voltage than is supplied by the panel.
UL
Household Fire or Combination Household/Fire/Burglary installations require the use of a backup
battery that is capable of proving 24 hours of standby time followed by 4 minutes of alarm time.
UL1023 Household Burglary-only installations require the use of a backup battery that is capable
of providing 4 hours of standby time followed by 4 minutes of alarm time.
Use Table 6 to determine the required backup battery capacity and use Table 7 to determine
the battery model number. A dual battery harness is supplied that allows two batteries
to be wired in parallel for increased capacity.
18-6
Section 18 – Final Power-Up Procedure
Battery Capacity Calculation Table
Using the total calculated from Table 4, calculate the battery capacity required for the
installation.
Calculated
Value
Capacity
Formula
Standby Capacity
For 4-hour standby time:
Total standby current X 4 hours X 1.4 contingency factor.
For 24-hour standby time:
Total standby current X 24 hours X 1.1 contingency factor.
Alarm Capacity
For 4-, 5-, or 15-minute alarm time
Total alarm current X 0.067 (4 minutes)
0.250 hours (15 minutes)
Total Capacity
Add standby and alarm capacities
Battery Selection Table
Use the Battery Selection Table to select the appropriate battery for the installation.
Capacity
Recommended Battery
Comment
4AH
Yuasa NP4-12
7AH
Yuasa NP7-12
12AH
Yuasa NP12-12
Fits in large mercantile cabinet only.
14AH
Yuasa NP7-12
Connect two in parallel
17.2AH
Yuasa NPG18-12
Fits in large mercantile cabinet only.
The standby battery is automatically tested for 10 minutes every 4 hours, beginning 4 hours after
exiting programming mode. In addition, entry into the Test Mode will cause a battery test to be
initiated. The VISTA-128B will also run a 5-second battery test every 60 seconds to check if the
battery is connected
18-7
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
18-8
S E C T I O N
1 9
The Mechanics of Programming
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ Using Data Field Program Mode
♦ Entry Errors
♦ Entering Data Field Programming Mode
♦ Programming System-Wide Data Fields
♦ Moving from One Page of Programming to
Another
♦ Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields
♦ #93 Menu Mode Programming
♦ Viewing Data Fields
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Using Data Field Program Mode
Data Field Program Mode is the program Mode whereby many system options are
programmed. The field numbers on the program form show the number of entries required
for each field. When an entry is completed, the keypad beeps three times and advances to
the next field. At this point, you can either make the required entry in the new field, or press
[∗] + the next field number you want to program.
There are several "question and answer" modes, which we call "Menu" Modes, that can be
accessed once Data Field Program Mode has been entered. These modes prompt the user for
information, and for this reason, a 2-line alpha keypad (6139) is required.
The factory-loaded defaults (*97) enable keypad addresses 00-03 only. A keypad set to one of
these addresses must be used to program the system.
Entering Data Field Programming Mode
Enter Program Mode using either method A or B:
A. Press both the [∗] and [#] keys at the same time within 30 seconds after power is
applied to the control.
B. Enter the [Installer Code] + [8] + [0] + [0] + [0] keys. The factory installer code
can be changed once in the Program Mode (field ∗00).
NOTE: The default for the Installer Code is 4140.
Local keypad programming can be disabled through Compass downloading software. If this is
done, programming can only be accomplished via the downloading software.
19-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Moving from One Page of Programming to Another
The data fields are grouped into four levels (referred to as "pages"). The first page is accessed
as soon as Programming Mode is entered.
The second, and third pages of data fields are indicated at the keypad by a 1, and 2,
respectively, in front of the 2-digit field address. The words "ALT PROGRAM MODE" is
displayed along with a "100, or "200," depending on which page of program fields is accessed,
to indicate the higher page of fields.
1. To access the next level of fields, press ∗94.
2. Then press [✴] + [XX], where XX = the last two digits of the program field, and make the
desired entry.
3. To return to the previous page of fields, press ∗99.
Press *94 to move to 2nd page;
press *99 to move back to 1st page
second page of fields
(1*01-1*76)
Press *94 to move to 3rd page;
press *99 to move back to 2nd page
third page of fields
(2*00-2*24)
Viewing Data Fields
To view the contents of a data field, press [#] plus the 2-digit field address. The field's entries
will be displayed, but no changes can be made.
Entry Errors
•
If an address is improperly entered, the keypad will display “FC”.
•
If a program entry is improperly entered (for example, a larger number than that which
is permitted), the keypad display will go blank.
•
In either of the above cases, simply re-enter [✴] + the correct field number.
SUMMARY OF DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING COMMANDS
*91
Select partition for programming partition-specific fields
*92
Will display the software revision level of the control panel
*93
Enters Menu Mode programming
*94
Go to next page of fields
*99
Go back to previous page of fields or exit Programming Mode with no
installer code lockout
*98
Exit Programming Mode with Installer Code lockout
Programming System-Wide Data Fields
Values for some programming fields are system-wide (global), and some can be different for
each partition (partition-specific). Note that the partition-specific programming fields are
automatically skipped when programming the global fields. If the system has only 1
partition, the partition-specific fields will not be automatically skipped.
19-2
Section 19 - The Mechanics of Programming
To program system-wide data fields, do the following:
Step
Action
1
Enter Program Mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 0.
After entry into the Program Mode, the following will be displayed:
Program Mode
*Fill # View -00
2
If the control has not been programmed before, enter *97 to load factory
defaults.
3
Press [✴] and enter the first field number to be programmed (for example,
∗00, Installer's Code). Make the desired entry. When the field is complete, the
keypad will beep three times and will advance to the next field. If you do not
desire to change the next field, press [✴] and enter the next field number to be
programmed.
First Page of fields
(*00-*90)
4
To change to the next page of fields, press *94. To return to the previous page of
fields, press *99.
5
Press *99 or *98 to exit Program Mode
•
If the number of digits that you enter in a data field is less than the maximum permitted
(for example, a phone number), the keypad displays the last entry and waits. To proceed,
enter [✴] + the next data field you wish to program (e.g., press ∗08).
Partition-Specific Programming Fields are skipped unless entered specifically.
•
Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields
To program partition-specific data fields once in Program Mode, do the following:
Step
Action
1
Enter Program Mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 0.
After entry into the Program Mode, the following will be displayed:
Program Mode
*Fill # View -00
2
Press *91, which will prompt you for the partition number desired.
3
Enter a partition-specific field number (e.g., ∗09) to begin programming. When
the first field’s entry is completed, the next partition-specific field will
automatically be displayed. When all partition-specific fields are programmed,
the system returns to the global programming fields (page 1 fields). To return to
the global program fields before finishing all fields, enter any global field number.
4
Repeat this procedure for each partition in the installation.
19-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
PROGRAMMING PARTITION-SPECIFIC FIELDS
Press *91 to select a partition.
↓
Enter the partition to be programmed.
↓
Enter a partition-specific field # and make entry.
↓
After partition-specific fields are programmed,
press *91 to select next partition.
Enter any global field number to return to the global fields at any time.
#93 Menu Mode Programming
The #93 Menu Mode is a mode through which much of the system's programming is done. It
offers main menu selections for the following:
•
Zone Programming
•
Expert Mode Programming
•
Report Code Programming
•
Alpha Programming
•
Device Programming
•
Output Programming
•
Relay Voice Descriptors
•
Custom Index Programming (VIP Module substitute words)
•
Access Point Programming (used for VistaKey modules)
•
Access Group Programming (used for VistaKey modules)
•
Event/Action Programming (used for VistaKey modules)
Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES) in response to the displayed menu selection. Pressing 0 will display
the next choice in sequence. The keypad will then prompt you with questions regarding the
programming of a particular zone or device. (Refer to the individual sections to program
each option shown.)
The following is a list of commands used while in the Menu Mode.
#93 Menu Mode Key Commands
#93
Enters Menu Mode.
[✴]
Serves as ENTER key. Press to have keypad accept entry.
[#]
Backs up to previous screen.
0
Press to answer NO.
1
Press to answer YES.
00+ [✴]
19-4
Escapes from Menu Mode, back into Data Field Programming Mode,
if entered at the first prompt of each main menu option.
S E C T I O N
2 0
Zone Type Definitions
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ Zone Number Designations
♦ Zone Type Definitions
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Zone Number Designations
The VISTA-128B supports up to 128 zones of hardwire, polling loop and/or wireless
protection, distributed among up to 8 partitions. The following table lists the zone numbers
and the types of sensors that can be used with each in this system, and some alternate
functions the zones may be used as:
Zone
Sensors
1
2-wire Smoke Detectors (if used)
5
Audio Alarm Verification (if used)
7
Keyswitch (if used)
8
Latching-Type Glassbreak Detectors (if used)
1-9
9
Traditional Hardwired Zones
Programmable for Fast Response
1-128
5800 Series Wireless Devices
10-128
Polling Loop Devices
995
✴ + 1 Panic
996
# + 3 Panic
999
✴ + # Panic
Zone Type Definitions
Each zone must be assigned a zone type, which defines the way in which the system responds
to faults in that zone. In addition, there are three keypad-activated zones (panic keys; see
note) for each partition, a polling loop supervision zone, and four RF supervisory zones, two
for each RF receiver installed. Zone types are defined below.
Type 00: Zone Not Used
Program a zone with this zone type if the zone is not used.
Type 01: Entry/Exit #1 Burglary
Provides entry delay whenever the zone is faulted and the system is armed in the AWAY or
STAY mode. When the panel is armed in the INSTANT or MAXIMUM mode, no entry delay
is provided. Exit delay begins whenever the control is armed, regardless of the arming mode
selected. These delays are programmable.
Assign this zone type to zones that are used for the primary entry and exit of the facility.
20-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Type 02: Entry/Exit #2 Burglary
Provides a secondary entry delay whenever the zone is faulted and the system is armed in
the AWAY and STAY mode. When the panel is armed in the INSTANT or MAXIMUM mode,
no entry delay is provided. Secondary exit delay begins whenever the control is armed,
regardless of the arming mode selected. These delays are programmable.
Assign this zone type to zones that are used for entry and exit of the facility and require more
time than the primary entry and exit point. Delay times for this zone type must be greater
than zone type 01 (e.g., a garage, loading dock, or basement door).
Type 03: Perimeter Burglary
Provides an instant alarm if the zone is faulted and the system is armed in the AWAY, STAY,
INSTANT or MAXIMUM mode.
Assign this zone type to all zones of exterior doors and windows.
Type 04: Interior, Follower
Provides a delayed alarm (using the programmed entry delay time) if an entry/exit zone is
faulted first. Otherwise it produces an instant alarm. It is active when the system is armed in
the AWAY or MAXIMUM mode, but the MAXIMUM mode eliminates the entry delay.
Interior Follower zones are automatically bypassed when the panel is armed in the
STAY or INSTANT mode.
Assign this zone type to a zone covering an area such as a foyer, lobby, or hallway through
which one must pass upon entry or exit (to and from the keypad).
Type 05: Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night
Provides an instant alarm if the zone is faulted and the system is armed in the AWAY, STAY,
INSTANT or MAXIMUM mode. During the disarmed state (day), the system annunciates a
latched trouble sounding from the keypad (and a central station report, if desired).
Assign this zone type to a zone that contains a foil-protected door or window (such as in a
store), or to a zone covering a “sensitive” area such as a stock room, or drug supply room. It
can also be used on a zone in an area where immediate notification of an entry is desired.
Type 06: 24-Hour Silent Alarm
Sends a report to the central station but provides no keypad display or sounding. Assign this
zone type to a zone containing an Emergency button.
Type 07: 24-Hour Audible Alarm
Sends a report to the central station and provides an alarm sound at the keypad and an
audible external alarm. Assign this zone type to a zone containing an Emergency button.
Type 08: 24-Hour Auxiliary Alarm
Sends a report to central station and provides an alarm sound at the keypad only. (No bell
output is provided.) Assign this zone type to a zone an Emergency button, or one
containing monitoring devices such as water sensors, or temperature sensors.
Type 09: Supervised Fire (Without Verification)
Provides a fire alarm on a short circuit and a trouble condition on open circuit. A fire alarm
produces a pulsing of the bell output. A zone of this type is always active and cannot be
bypassed.
20-2
Section 20 – Zone Type Definitions
Type 10: Interior with Delay
Provides entry and exit delays (using the programmed entry/exit time), if tripped when the
panel is armed in the AWAY mode and exit delay only when armed in MAXIMUM mode.
Interior with Delay zones are automatically bypassed when the panel is armed in
the STAY or INSTANT mode. Delay begins whenever sensors in this zone are violated,
regardless of whether or not an entry/exit delay zone was tripped first.
Assign this zone type to a zone covering an area such as a foyer, lobby, or hallway through
which one must pass upon entry or exit (to and from the keypad).
Type 20: Arm-STAY✳
Causes the system to arm in the STAY mode when the zone is activated.
Type 21: Arm-AWAY✳
Causes the system to arm in the AWAY mode when the zone is activated.
Type 22: Disarm✳
Causes the system to disarm when the zone is activated.
Type 23: No Alarm Response
Used on a zone when an output relay action is desired, but with no accompanying alarm (e.g.,
for lobby door access).
Type 27: Access Point
Indicates that an input device (hardwired zone, wireless zone, keypad, access control relay,
etc.) is controlling an access point entry (e.g., a door). The access point entry relay can be
assigned to an access control relay (controlled by the VISTA-128B), ECP relay (4204), or to
the access control system independent of the VISTA-128B.
Type 28: Main Logic Board (MLB) Supervision
Used to supervise the MLB. If communication between the MLB and the Vista Gateway
Module (VGM) fails, a trouble condition is annunciated for the zone. Also, if the
communication fails, all access control system (ACS) input zones will also display a
“CHECK.”
Type 29 Momentary on Exit
Used to cause an access point programmed for entry to revert to an exit point for 15 seconds.
After the 15 seconds it automatically reverts back to an entry point. This zone type should be
only used with VistaKey modules.
✳ Note that these zone types are for use by 5800 Series devices only!
NOTE FOR PANIC KEYS: Keypad panic zones share the same zone response type for all 8
partitions, but panics may be individually enabled for each partition.
IMPORTANT! FAULT ANNUNCIATION
Polling loop and RF troubles (zones 988, 990 & 997) will report as trouble conditions only, and as
such, should be assigned zone type 05 if annunciation is desired. See Polling Loop Supervision
in the 2-Wire Polling Loop Expansion section and RF System Operation and Supervision in the
Wireless Expansion section for more information.
20-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
20-4
S E C T I O N
2 1
Zone Index/Zone Type Defaults
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ Zone Index
♦ Zone Type Defaults
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Zone Index
The VISTA-128B has 128 protection zones, as well as supervisory zones for relays, ECP
devices (devices which communicate through the keypad terminals), and system troubles.
These zones are designated as follows:
ZONE # RANGE
ZONE FUNCTION
ACTUAL ZONE
001 - 128
Protection zones
As indicated
601 - 632
Relay Supervisory Zones
6 + 2-digit Relay Number; e.g., Relay
Number 03, if supervised, is zone
603.
800 - 830
ECP Device Supervisory Zones
(includes keypads, wireless
receivers, VIP Module, relay
modules, etc.)
8 + 2-digit Device Address; e.g.,
Device Address 01, if supervised, is
zone 801. The 4285/4286 VIP
Module is zone 804 (since its Device
Address must be set to 4).
970, 988,-990, & 997
System Supervisory Zones
970: Bell Supervision
988: 2nd Wireless Receiver - not
receiving signals
990: 1st Wireless Receiver - not
receiving signals
997: Polling Loop (short circuit)
995 - 999
Keypad Panics
995: 1 + ∗ panic (A key)
996: 3 + # panic (C key)
999: ∗ + # panic (B key)
Response types for zones are enabled in Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
Supervisory zones should be given a response type of 05 (Trouble by Day, Alarm by Night).
21-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Zone Type Defaults
Following are the zone type defaults for zones on the VISTA-128B:
Zone #
21-2
Zone Type
Zone #
Zone Type
001
09
010–128
00
002
03
601-632
05
003
03
800-830
00
004
03
970
00
005
03
988
00
006
03
990
00
007
03
995
00
008
03
996
00
009
03
997
05
999
06
S E C T I O N
2 2
Data Field Descriptions
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
The following is a description of all data fields provided by this control. If you have followed
earlier instructions during the installation of the various devices, some of these fields may
already have been programmed.
If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see The Mechanics of
Programming section.
*00
INSTALLER CODE
[4140]
|
|
|
The Installer’s Code is a 4-digit code reserved for installation company use. This is the
only code that can be used to enter the Program Mode from the keypad. This code
cannot be used to disarm the system if not used to arm the system. This code cannot
reenter Programming Mode if exited by the *98 command.
*09
ENTRY DELAY #1 (partition-specific)
[02]
|
Entry delay defines the delay time which allows users to re-enter the premises through
a door that has been programmed as an entry delay door and disarm the system without
sounding an alarm. The system must be disarmed within this period or an alarm will
occur. Enter the entry delay time (01-15 multiplied by 15 seconds, or 00 for no delay),
up to a maximum delay of 225 seconds (entry 15 multiplied by 15 seconds), for zones
assigned to Zone Type 01.
*10
EXIT DELAY #1 (partition-specific)
[03]
|
Exit delay defines the delay period that allows users to leave the premises through a
door that has been programmed as an entry/exit delay door after arming the system
without setting off the alarm. Enter the exit delay time (01-15 multiplied by 15 seconds
or 00 for no delay), up to a maximum delay of 225 seconds, for zones assigned to Zone
Type 01.
*11
ENTRY DELAY #2 (partition-specific)
[06]
|
Entry Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than those
assigned to Entry Delay #1. This delay may not exceed 45 seconds for UL commercial
burglary installations.
*12
EXIT DELAY #2 (partition-specific)
[08]
|
Exit Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than those assigned
to Exit Delay #1. This delay may not exceed 60 seconds for UL commercial burglary
installations.
*13
BELL TIMEOUT (partition-specific)
[04]
|
Defines the length of time Bell Output 1 and the keypad's sounder will sound for all
audible alarms (multiply entry 01-15 by 2 minutes for actual duration).
Must be a minimum of 16 minutes for UL commercial burglary installations.
22-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
*14
[0]
ZONE 9 RESPONSE TIME
Enter 1 to set fast response mode (10 msec) for appropriate devices wired to zone 9.
Enter 0 for normal response (350 msec). Must be 0 for UL.
*15
[0]
KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT
Enter the partition number 1-8 in which the keyswitch is being used. Otherwise, enter
0.
Requires the use of zone 7 wired loop (zone 7 is no longer available as protection zone
when used for keyswitch operation). If the keyswitch is used, the fire and panic alarm
voltage triggers automatically become ARMING and READY status outputs for support
of the Keyswitch LEDs.
Reports openings/closing by user "0" if reporting is enabled in field *40.
*16
[0]
CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING (part.-specific)
Enter 1 to enable 1/2 second external alarm sounding ("ding") at the end of exit delay (or
after kissoff from the central station, if sending closing reports). Otherwise enter 0.
Must be 1 for UL commercial burglary installations. Bell test on arming is required in
UL commercial burglary installations.
*17
[0]
AC LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING
Enter 1 to enable sounding at the keypad (rapid beeping) when AC power is lost
(sounding occurs about 2 minutes after actual AC loss).
Enter 0 if no AC power loss keypad sounding is desired.
*19
[0]
RANDOMIZE AC LOSS REPORT
Selecting this option helps prevent an overload of AC loss messages at the central
station during a community blackout.
Enter 1 to randomize AC loss reporting between 10 and 40 min. after an actual AC loss.
Enter 2 for 6-12 hours after AC loss. Enter 0 for normal AC loss reporting (about 2
minutes after actual AC loss).
*20
VIP MODULE PHONE CODE
[00, 11]
|
|
If a 4285/4286 Voice Module is being used, enter the 2-digit phone code used to access
the system.
Enter 01-09 for first digit, and enter 11 (for ✴) or 12 (for #) for second digit.
To disable the voice module, enter 00 for the 1st digit and enter 11 for the 2nd digit of
the code (disable code = 00,11). Must be disabled for commercial fire and UL
commercial burglary installations.
*21
[0]
PREVENT FIRE TIMEOUT
Enter 1 to disable (no timeout) the alarm sounder duration for any zone designated as a
fire zone, regardless of partition, so that fire sounding continues until the system is
reset.
Enter 0 if the normal burglary sounder duration (programmed in partition-specific field
*13) should apply to fire alarms.
*22
KEYPAD PANIC ENABLES (partition-specific)
[001]
|
95
Enter 1 to enable the appropriate keypad panics used in this partition.
Otherwise enter 0.
22-2
|
96
99
Section 22 – Data Field Descriptions
*23
[1]
MULTIPLE ALARMS (partition-specific)
Determines whether or not more than one alarm can be sounded in a given zone during
an armed period. Note that multiple alarm soundings will not occur more frequently
than allowed by the programmed alarm sounder duration. This selection applies to local
sounding and has no impact on the number of communication messages transmitted.
Refer to ∗84 Swinger Suppression for limiting communication messages. Enter 1 if this
feature is desired. Enter 0 if not desired. Must be 1 for UL installations.
*24
[0]
IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER
Enter 1 to disable (ignore) tamper.
Enter 0 if tamper detection is desired. Must be 0 for UL installations.
Note: Only applicable to certain polling loop sensors with tamper switches or 5800
Series transmitters. This option is used to disable tamper detection on these devices.
*25
[1]
BURG. TRIGGER FOR RESPONSE TYPE 8
Enter 1 to allow optional triggering of the voltage output on Pin 3 of the J2 header to
include zone response type 8 (24-hr. auxiliary).
Enter 0 if only burglary and audible panic alarms (zone type 7) will trigger Pin 3.
*26
[0]
INTELLIGENT TEST REPORTING
Enter 1 if no test report is to be sent if any other type of report was sent since the last
test report.
Enter 0 if test reports are to be sent at the set intervals, regardless of whether or not
other reports have been sent. Must be 0 for UL applications.
*27
TEST REPORT INTERVAL
[024]
|
|
Enter the test reporting interval in hours, 001-999.
Enter 000 if no test reporting is desired. If a test report is desired, enter a test code in
Report Code Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
Set first test report time in field *83.
Max. 024 for UL commercial burglary installations.
*28
POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE
[1]
Enter 1 if upon power-up, after a prolonged power loss which caused the system's
battery to discharge, the system will assume the system status prior to the power loss.
Enter 0 if the system is always to power up in a disarmed state. When the system
powers up armed, an alarm will occur 3 minutes after arming if a zone is faulted. When
so armed, the system reports closing as User #0 if Open/Close reporting for installer was
enabled in field *39. Note that if the previous state was armed AWAY or STAY, the
system may not respond to sensor changes for a small period of time (1-3 min.), which
allows sensors such as PIRs to stabilize.
Note: Must be 1 for UL applications. Note that authority levels 0 or 5 cannot be used to
disarm the system if the control powers up armed.
*29
QUICK ARM (partition-specific)
[1]
Enter 1 to enable arming of the burglary system in AWAY, STAY, INSTANT or
MAXIMUM modes by using the # key instead of the user code. When armed, the system
reports closing as User 0 if Open/Close reporting for User #2 (typically a Master level
user) was enabled for a given partition. Enter 0 if Quick Arm is not desired. (The user
code must always be used to disarm the system.) Note that if Quick Arm is used, the
Installer Code and Authority Level 5 codes cannot disarm the system.
22-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
*30
[0]
TOUCHTONE OR ROTARY DIAL
Enter 1 if TouchTone service is being used.
Enter 0 if rotary phone service is used.
If selecting TouchTone, make sure the subscriber has requested and is paying for TouchTone
service. Note that whether or not TouchTone dialing for call placement is permitted, communication
by the use of DTMF signaling (ADEMCO High Speed) will still take place. See field 1*33 for
TouchTone w/Rotary backup.
*31
PABX ACCESS CODE
|
|
|
|
This field is used to enter up to four 2-digit numbers 00-09; B-F (11-15). If not required,
enter nothing and proceed to next address; otherwise, enter prefix needed to obtain an
outside telco line.
*32
|
|
|
|
[15
15
15
15]
PRIMARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT # (partition-specific)
Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)
Enter a 3-or 4-digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber account number
00-09; B-F (11-15). Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of
hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used, enter data only in
the first 3 locations, leaving the last one unfilled, by entering a *.
*33
PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
This field is used to enter the primary central station phone number, up to 17 digits, 09; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec. pause. This is the phone number
the control will use to transmit Alarm and status messages to the central station. Do
not fill unused spaces.
Note: Backup reporting is automatic only if a secondary phone number is entered.
*34
SECONDARY PHONE NUMBER
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
This field is used to enter the secondary phone number, up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11
for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec. pause. The secondary phone number is used if
communication on the primary number is unsuccessful, or if split/dual reporting is
desired. Do not fill unused spaces. If this field is programmed, a secondary subscriber
account number (field *90) must also be programmed (can be the same as the primary
account number).
*35
DOWNLOAD PHONE NUMBER
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
This field is applicable only if downloading will be utilized.
Enter the downloading phone number, up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #,
and #13 for a 2-sec. pause. Do not fill unused spaces.
*36
DOWNLOAD ID NUMBER
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enter eight digits, 00-09; A-F (10-15). Only applicable if downloading will be utilized.
Make entries as 2-digit numbers as follows:
00=0 02=2 04=4 06=6 08=8 10=A 12=C 14=E
01=1 03=3 05=5 07=7 09=9 11=B 13=D 15=F
22-4
Section 22 – Data Field Descriptions
*37
DOWNLOAD COMMAND ENABLES
Dialer
System
Not
Remote
Remote
Remote
Upload
Download
Shutdown
Shutdown
Used
Bypass
Disarm
Arm
Program
Program
Each of the various remote functions can either be enabled or disabled through Compass
downloading software. Disabling a function means that you will not be able to perform
that function from Compass. Default values = [11011111].
Enter 1 to enable a function, enter 0 to disable. See field 1*53 to disable the download
callback option. For UL commercial burglary installations, all entries must be 0.
*38
PREVENT ZONE XXX BYPASS (partition-specific)
[000]
|
|
Entering a zone number (001-128) prevents that zone from being bypassed by the user.
Enter 000 if this feature is not desired (all zones can be bypassed).
*39
ENABLE OPEN/CLOSE REPORT FOR INSTALLER CODE(partition-specific)
[1]
Enter 1 if Open/Close reporting for the installer is desired.
Otherwise enter 0.
*40
OPEN/CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH
[0]
Enter 1 to enable Open/Close reporting for the keyswitch.
Enter 0 if reporting is not desired.
*41
NORMALLY CLOSED OR EOLR (ZONES 2-8)
[0]
Enter 0 if end-of-line resistors are to be used.
Enter 1 if end-of-line resistors are not to be used, in which case only normally closed
devices must be used.
Must be 0 for UL installations.
*42
DIAL TONE PAUSE
[0]
This field sets the time the system will wait for dial tone before dialing. Applies if true
dial tone is not selected in field *43.
Enter the desired wait time for dial tone detection as follows: Enter single digit: 0 = 5
seconds; 1 = 11 seconds; or 2 = 30 seconds. Must be 0 for UL installations.
*43
DIAL TONE DETECTION
[1]
Determines whether the control will wait for a true dial tone before dialing, or if it will
wait for a predetermined delay before dialing (delay is programmed in Dial Tone Pause
field *42). The latter may be necessary in high-noise environment telco networks where
noise can be confused with dial tone, resulting in premature dialing.
Enter 1 for true dial tone wait. If no dial tone is detected, will dial at end of pause
programmed in field *42.
Enter 0 to pause for seconds entered in field *42, then dial.
22-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
*44
[00]
RING DETECTION COUNT
|
Only applicable if using a 4285/4286 VIP Module and/or if station-initiated downloading
will be used.
Enter 00 to disable ring detection.
Enter 01-14 for ring counts of 1-14.
Enter 15 to select Answering Machine Defeat Mode, which allows the system to receive
calls even when a telephone answering machine is connected to the same phone line. In
the Answering Machine Mode, the caller should let the phone ring once, then hang up,
and call again within 30 seconds. The system, upon hearing one ring followed by
nothing, will not answer the first call, but will ready itself to pick up on the first ring of
the next incoming call that is received within 30 seconds (i.e., the downloader calling
again). Must be 00 for UL commercial burglary installations.
Note: Do not enter 00 if a 4285/4286 is installed.
*45
PRIMARY FORMAT
[0]
This field selects the reporting format for use on the primary telephone number.
Enter the appropriate number for the primary format as follows: 0=Low Speed;
1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express
*46
LOW SPEED FORMAT (PRIMARY)
[0]
Enter the appropriate value: 0=ADEMCO Low Speed; 1=Sescoa/Radionics
*47
SECONDARY FORMAT
[0]
This field selects the reporting format for the secondary telephone number.
Enter the appropriate number for the secondary format as follows: 0=Low Speed;
1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express
*48
LOW SPEED FORMAT (SECONDARY)
[0]
Enter the appropriate value: 0=ADEMCO Low Speed; 1=Sescoa/Radionics
*49
CHECKSUM VERIFICATION
[0,0]
Enter 1 for either or both primary/secondary formats to send a verification digit to
validate the message at the receiver without having to send two message rounds.
Selection is valid for 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2 reports.
Enter 0 if not desired.
*50
SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT
[0]
Enter 0 if Radionics format is to be used with hexadecimal 0-9, B-F reporting. Enter 1 if
Sescoa format is to be used with only numeric reporting (0-9). Note that selection
applies to both primary and secondary phone numbers.
*51
DUAL REPORTING
[0]
This field allows all reports to be sent to both primary and secondary phone numbers.
Enter 1 if all reports are to be sent to both primary and secondary phone numbers. If
used with Split Reporting option 1 (1*34), Alarms go to both primary and secondary
numbers, while all other reports go to secondary only. If used with Split Reporting
option 2, Alarms go to both lines, Open/Close and Test messages go to secondary only,
while all other reports go to primary.
22-6
Section 22 – Data Field Descriptions
*52
STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT PRIMARY
Alm
Rst
Byp
Trbl
Opn/Cls Low Batt
Enter 0 for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the primary phone number; default
is 0.
Note: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.
*53
STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT SECONDARY
Alm
Rst
Byp
Trbl
Opn/Cls Low Batt
Enter 0 for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the secondary phone number;
default is 0.
Note: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.
*56
USE ONLY LRR (LONG RANGE RADIO)
[0]
Enter 1 if the built-in dialer is not being used and only the LRR will be used to
communicate. Otherwise enter 0.
*57
USE LRR (LONG RANGE RADIO) IF DIALER FAILS
[0]
Enter 1 if LRR is to be used as a backup to the built-in dialer if the dialer fails. The
radio messages begin transmitting the same time as the dialer. Once the dialer receives
a kissoff, the LRR will stop transmitting no matter where it might be within its
sequence. Otherwise enter 0.
*58
LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION #1 CATEGORY ENABLE
Alm
Trbl
Byp
Opn/Cls Syst
Test
Enter 1 to enable reports for primary Subscriber ID of Long Range Radio. Otherwise,
enter 0. Default = 0.
*59
LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION #2 CATEGORY ENABLE
Alm
Trbl
Byp
Opn/Cls Syst
Test
Enter 1 to enable reports for secondary Subscriber ID of Long Range Radio. Otherwise,
enter 0. Default = 0.
*64
ALPHA NUMERIC PAGER INSTALLED
[0]
Enter 1 if the alpha numeric pager interface is installed. Otherwise enter 0.
*65
PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR ALARMS
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for Alarm
reports. Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec.
pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Enter * after the last digit of the phone number.
*66
PAGER ID NUMBER FOR ALARMS
This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Alarm reports. Enter up to 10 digits.
If fewer than 10 digits are required, enter * after the last digit, (i.e., pager pin number).
22-7
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
*67
PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR SUPERVISION
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for Trouble
reports. Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec.
pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Enter * after the last digit of the phone number.
*68
PAGER ID NUMBER FOR SUPERVISION
This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Trouble reports. Enter up to 10
digits. If fewer than 10 digits are required, enter * after the last digit, (i.e., pager pin
number).
*69
PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR BYPASSES
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for Bypass
reports. Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec.
pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Enter * after the last digit of the phone number.
*70
PAGER ID NUMBER FOR BYPASSES
This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Bypass reports. Enter up to 10
digits. If fewer than 10 digits are required, enter * after the last digit, (i.e., pager pin
number).
*71
PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR OPENS/CLOSES
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for
Open/Close reports. Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for
a 2-sec. pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Enter * after the last digit of the phone
number.
*72
PAGER ID NUMBER FOR OPENS/CLOSES
This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Open/Close reports. Enter up to 10
digits. If fewer than 10 digits are required, enter * after the last digit, (i.e., pager pin
number).
*73
PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR SYSTEM
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for System
reports. Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec.
pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Enter * after the last digit of the phone number.
*74
PAGER ID NUMBER FOR SYSTEM
This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for System reports. Enter up to 10
digits. If fewer than 10 digits are required, enter * after the last digit, (i.e., pager pin
number).
*75
PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TEST
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for Test
reports. Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec.
pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Enter * after the last digit of the phone number.
22-8
Section 22 – Data Field Descriptions
*76
PAGER ID NUMBER FOR TEST
This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Test reports. Enter up to 10 digits.
If fewer than 10 digits are required, enter * after the last digit, (i.e., pager pin number).
*79
ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR ZONE TYPES 1-8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Enter 1 to enable Restore reporting for individual zone types.
Enter 0 if no Restore report is desired for a zone type. Default = 0.
*80
ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR TYPES 9/10
9
10
Enter 1 to enable Restore reporting for individual zone types.
Enter 0 if no Restore report is desired for a zone type. Default = 0.
*83
|
FIRST TEST REPORT TIME [00, 12, 00]
|
|
Enter the day (00-07) and time (00-23 hours/00-59 min.) that the first Test report shall
be transmitted.
Enter 00 in all locations if the Test report is to be sent immediately upon exiting.
Enter 00 in the day location if the report is to be sent at the next occurrence of the time
that is set.
Note: that day 01=Monday. See Report Code Programming (System Group 1) in the #93
Menu Mode Programming section for assigning the Test Report Code.
*84
[03]
SWINGER SUPPRESSION (partition-specific)
|
This option limits the number of messages (alarms or troubles) sent for a specific
channel in an armed period (Swinger Suppression). Enter 01-15. If 00 is selected, all
alarm or trouble codes are reported.
Must be 00 (disabled) for UL installations.
*85
ENABLE DIALER REPORTS FOR PANICS & DURESS
(partition-specific)
[0]
95
96
99
Duress
Enter 1 for each panic/duress for which reporting is desired.
Note: Non-zero report code must be assigned to zone 992 (duress) to enable Duress
reporting.
*87
ENTRY WARNING (partition-specific)
[1]
Enter 0 for 3 short beeps, or 1 for slow beeps that continue for the entire entry delay
period.
*88
BURG. ALARM COMM. DELAY (partition-specific)
[0]
Enter 0 for no delay on burglary alarm communication. Enter 1 for 16-second delay (no
delay on 24-hour reports). Must be 0 for UL installations.
*89
RESTORE REPORT TIMING
[0]
Enter 0 for instant Restore report as zone restores.
Enter 1 for reporting after bell timeout if zone restored. Enter 2 for Restore report
when system is subsequently disarmed. Must be 2 for UL commercial burglary
installation.
22-9
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
*90
SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT #
(partition-specific)
Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)
|
|
|
|
[15
15
15
15]
Enter the 3-or 4-digit number (depending on report format) for the secondary subscriber
account: 00-09; B-F (11-15). Each number requires a 2-digit entry to allow entry of
hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit number is to be used, enter data only in the first 6
locations, leaving the last two unfilled. Default=15 15 15 15. Erase the field by entering
*90*. NOTE: This field must be programmed if a secondary phone number is used (field
*34). This account number can be the same as the primary account number.
1*07 CHECK OR TRBL DISPLAY
[0]
Enter 1 to display the letters TRBL instead of CHECK when a zone or system trouble
occurs.
Enter 0 to display CHECK.
1*10 FIRE DISPLAY LOCK
[0]
0 = scroll all alarms
1 = lock display of first fire alarm (press * to display other alarms)
1*17 LOBBY PARTITION
[0]
Enter the Common Lobby Partition (1-8).
Enter 0 if none.
1*18 AFFECTS LOBBY (partition-specific)
[0]
Enter 1 if this partition affects the common lobby. Will cause lobby to disarm when this
partition disarms.
Enter 0 if it does not.
1*19 ARMS LOBBY (partition-specific)
[0]
Enter 1 if arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the common lobby
partition automatically. Can only arm lobby if all other affecting partitions are armed.
To enable this field, field 1*18 must also be enabled (partition-specific).
Enter 0 if arming this partition will not attempt to arm the common lobby partition.
1*20 EXIT ERROR LOGIC ENABLE
[0]
Enter 1 to enable Exit Error Logic (entry/exit doors and interior zones will be bypassed
if left open).
Enter 0 if Exit Error Logic is not desired. Must be 0 for UL commercial burglary
installations.
1*21 EXIT DELAY RESET
[0]
Enter 1 to reset exit delay to 60 seconds after door is closed.
Enter 0 if exit delay not to be reset. Must be 0 for UL commercial burglary
installations.
1*22 CROSS ZONING PAIR ONE
|
|
Enter the first pair of zones, which must both be faulted within a five-minute period to
cause an alarm.
Enter 00,00 to disable. Must be 00,00 for UL burglary installations.
22-10
Section 22 – Data Field Descriptions
1*23 CROSS ZONING PAIR TWO
|
|
Enter the second pair of zones, which must both be faulted within a five-minute period
to cause an alarm.
Enter 00,00 to disable. Must be 00,00 for UL burglary installations.
1*24 CROSS ZONING PAIR THREE
|
|
Enter the third pair of zones, which must both be faulted within a five-minute period to
cause an alarm.
Enter 00,00 to disable. Must be 00,00 for UL burglary installations.
1*25 CROSS ZONING PAIR FOUR
|
|
Enter the fourth pair of zones, which must both be faulted within a five-minute period
to cause an alarm.
Enter 00,00 to disable. Must be 00,00 for UL burglary installations.
1*26 PANIC BUTTON OR SPEEDKEY
[00,00,00,00]
|
|
|
|
A
B
C
D
For each lettered key A-C, enter 00 to assign that key’s respective panic function, or
enter a speedkey macro number 01-32 to assign a particular macro to that key. For the
D key, enter 00 to use the D key to select a macro to execute when key is pressed, or
enter a macro number 01-32 to execute a particular macro with the D key.
Instead of the 32 macros, each key can be programmed for any of 3 other functions.
Choice 33 = fire sounder silence. The key, when pressed, will silence fire alarms.
Choice 34 = display next fire alarm. The key, when pressed, will display the next fire
alarm present in the system.
Choice 35 = display previous fire alarm. The key, when pressed, will display the
previous fire alarm present in the system.
Note: Choices 34 and 35 should be used in conjunction with field 1*10 Fire Display
Lock.
1*28 RF TX LOW BATTERY SOUND
[0]
Enter 0 if display and audible beep annunciation upon RF transmitter low battery
condition is desired only in disarmed state.
Enter 1 if audible beep and display is desired in both armed and disarmed states.
Must be 1 for UL.
1*29 RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORTING
[0]
Enter 1 if a Trouble message for RF transmitter low battery condition is to be sent to the
central station.
Enter 0 if no report for transmitter low battery is desired. Note that a Trouble message
will be sent for a transmitter supervision failure, independent of this selection.
Must be 1 for UL.
22-11
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
[06]
1*30 RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK-IN INTERVAL
|
Enter the check-in monitoring interval in 2-hour increments.
Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours). Failure of a receiver to receive any RF signal
within the time entered will result in activation of the response type programmed for
zone 990 for the first receiver and zone 988 for the second receiver and their related
communication reports.
Enter 00 to disable receiver supervision.
Max. "2" (4 hr) for UL.
[12]
1*31 RF TRANSMITTER CHECK-IN INTERVAL
|
Enter the check-in monitoring interval in 2-hour increments.
Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).
Failure of an individual transmitter to send a supervision signal within the time entered
will result in a trouble response and related communication report. Enter 00 to disable
transmitter supervision.
Max. "2" (4 hr) for UL.
1*33 TOUCH-TONE W/ROTARY BACKUP
[0]
Enter 1 to enable rotary backup dialing if communicator is not successful in dialing
using TouchTone DTMF on first attempt.
Enter 0 if this option is not desired.
1*34 COMM. SPLIT REPORT SELECTION
[0]
This field allows certain reports to be directed to either the primary or secondary phone
number.
Enter 0, 1, or 2, in accordance with the following:
0 = split reporting disabled;
1 = Alarm, Alarm Restore and Cancel reports sent to primary telco number, all others to
secondary telco number;
2 = Open/Close and Test reports sent to secondary telco number and all other reports to
primary;
See *51 for split/dual reporting combinations.
1*35 ACCESS CONTROL DIALER ENABLES
[000000]
Trace Trbl
Byp
Not Used Systm Alm
Enter 1 for Trace to have the access grant/denial events sent to the central station.
Enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable each type of event.
1*42 CALL WAITING DEFEAT
[0]
Enter 1 for the panel to defeat Call Waiting on the first attempt (DO NOT enable unless
Call Waiting is being used).
Otherwise, enter 0.
1*43 PERMANENT KEYPAD DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING (partition-specific)
[0]
Enter 1 if backlighting for the keypad display is to remain on at all times.
Enter 0 if the display should remain unlit unless a key is pressed. The backlighting then
turns off again after a period of keypad inactivity. Note that when a key is pressed,
display backlighting turns on for all keypads in that partition.
22-12
Section 22 – Data Field Descriptions
1*44 WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT
[0]
Enter 1 to enable tamper detection on wireless keypad.
Enter 0 if tamper detection is not desired. If this feature is enabled, any attempt to
tamper by means of many trial entries at a wireless keypad will be blocked by the
control panel. If more than 40 key depressions are received without a valid sequence
(arm, disarm, etc.), the Control panel will disable the wireless keypad. The inhibit is
removed once a valid key sequence is received from a wired keypad.
1*45 EXIT DELAY SOUNDING (partition-specific)
[0]
Enter 1 if beeping from the keypads during exit delay are desired. Enter 0 for no
keypad sound during exit delay.
1*46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT MODE
[0]
Enter 0 if ground start output is required.
Enter 1 if the auxiliary output will be used to produce an open/close trigger (produced
only if ALL partitions are armed).
Enter 2 if the auxiliary output will be used to produce keypad-like sounding at an
auxiliary sounder (ex. 706-12). This option applies only to the partition enabled in field
*15.
Enter 3 if AAV module is being used.
NOTE: Only one of the above options may be active within the system.
1*47 CHIME ON EXTERNAL SIREN (partition-specific)
[0]
Enter 1 for chime annunciation using the external alarm sounder. If not desired, enter
0.
1*48 WIRELESS KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT
[0]
Enter the partition in which RF keypad is used, 1-8.
Enter 0 if no RF keypad is used.
1*49 SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUND
[1]
Enter 1 to disable trouble sounding for transmitter check-in failure.
Enter 0 if audible trouble sounding is desired.
Must be 0 for UL.
1*52 SEND CANCEL IF ALARM + OFF (partition-specific)
[0]
Enter 1 if Cancel reports are to be sent when the system is disarmed after an alarm,
regardless of how much time has gone by.
Enter 0 if Cancel reports are to be sent within Bell Timeout period only.
1*53 DISABLE DOWNLOAD CALLBACK
[0]
Enter 1 to disable the callback requirement for downloading.
Enter 0 to require a callback.
Must be 0 for UL commercial burglary installations.
1*56 AC 60Hz or 50Hz
[0]
Enter 1 for 50 Hz Standard or 0 for 60 Hz Standard. Must be set to 0 for U.S.
installations (this is the default).
22-13
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
1*57 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM
[0]
Enter 1 to have the system arm/disarm in accordance with the button's user's global
arming settings.
Enter 0 if the button is not to be used to global arm the system (however, home partition
arming will still occur).
1*58 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE ARM
[0]
Enter 1 to allow the RF button user to force a bypass of all faulted zones when arming
the system. When attempting to arm the system, the keypad will beep once after
pressing the button if any faulted zones are present. If this feature is enabled, the user
should then press the button again within 4 seconds to force-bypass those zones and
arm the system.
Enter 0 if RF button force bypass is not desired.
1*60 ZONE 5 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION
[0]
Enter 1 if 2-way audio (AAV) is being used.
Enter 0 if AAV is not being used. Must be 0 for UL installations.
1*70 EVENT LOG TYPES
Alm
Chck Byps O/C
Systm Test
Enter 1 for each type of event for which event logging is desired.
Otherwise enter 0.
Note: Events will also be logged into the PassPoint system, if installed.
1*71 12/24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT
[0]
Select the type of time stamping desired:
0=standard 12-hour; 1= 24-hour format.
1*72 EVENT LOG PRINTER ON-LINE MODE
[0]
Enter 1 to have the printer print events as they occur.
Enter 0 to enable the printer such that the logs are printed only upon request.
1*73 PRINTER BAUD RATE
[0]
Enter 0 if printer is set for 1200 baud (preferred).
Enter 1 if printer is set for 300 baud.
Note: Must be 1 if using the alpha numeric pager interface.
1*74 RELAY TIMEOUT XXX MINUTES
[000]
|
|
Enter the relay timeout, 000-127 in multiples of 2 minutes, desired for #80 Menu Mode
time-driven event relay command numbers "04/09" and Output Programming in the #93
Menu Mode Programming output command "56" (refer to #93 Menu Mode and
Scheduling sections in this manual).
1*75 RELAY TIMEOUT YYY SECONDS
[000]
|
|
Enter the relay timeout, 000-127 seconds, desired for #80 Menu Mode time-driven event
relay command numbers "05/10" Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode
Programming command "57" (refer to #93 Menu Mode and Scheduling sections in this
manual).
22-14
Section 22 – Data Field Descriptions
[00]
1*76 ACCESS RELAY # # (partition-specific)
|
The system can be programmed to provide user-activated access control. If enabled, the
assigned relay will pulse for 2 seconds when the user enters his code and presses 0.
Enter the relay number (00-96) for the relay that will be used for access control. Enter
00 if not used in this partition. This function has not been UL Listed for use with the
VISTA-128B control. Must be 00 for UL installations.
*Note: See the Access Control section for enhanced access control capability.
2*00 NUMBER OF PARTITIONS
[1]
Enter the number of partitions (1-8) to be used in the system.
2*01 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME START/END MONTH
[04,10]
|
|
Enter the months (00-12) in which daylight savings time starts and ends.
Enter 00, 00 if daylight savings time does not apply to the user's region. Standard
setting for U.S. is 04,10.
2*02 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME START/END WEEKEND
[1,5]
Enter the start and end weekends for daylight savings time as follows: 1=first;
2=second; 3=third; 4=fourth; 5=last; 6=next to last; 7=third from last. Standard setting
for U.S. is 1,5.
UL
Fields 2*05 – 2*08 must be set to 0 for UL installations.
2*05 AUTO-ARM DELAY (partition-specific)
[15]
|
Enter the time between the end of the arming window and the start of auto arm
warning time in values of 01-14 times 4 minutes.
Enter 00 if no delay is desired.
Enter 15 if auto arming is not desired.
2*06 AUTO-ARM WARNING PERIOD (partition-specific)
[15]
|
Enter the time 01-15 in one-minute increments during which the user is warned by a
keypad sounding and display to exit the premises prior to auto arming of the system.
Enter 00 to disable the warning period.
2*07 AUTO-DISARM DELAY (partition-specific)
[15]
|
Enter the time between the end of the disarming window and the start of auto
disarming of the system in values of 01-14 times 4 minutes.
Enter 00 if no delay is desired.
Enter 15 if auto disarming is not desired.
2*08 FORCE ARM ENABLE (FOR AUTO-ARM) (partition-specific)
[0]
Enter 1 if the system should automatically bypass any faulted zones when it attempts to
auto arm. Otherwise enter 0.
22-15
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
2*09 OPEN/CLOSE REPORTS BY EXCEPTION (partition-specific)
[0]
Enter 1 if Open/Close reports are to be sent only if the openings/closings occur outside
the arm and disarm windows. Open reports will also be suppressed during the closing
window in order to prevent false alarms if the user arms the system, then reenters the
premises to retrieve a forgotten item. Note that openings and closings are still recorded
in the event log. Enter 0 if exception reporting is not desired. Note: This field must be
set to 1 if No Opening and No Closing reports are to be sent.
2*10 ALLOW DISARMING ONLY DURING ARM/DISARM WINDOWS (partition-specific) [0]
Enter 1 if disarming of the system should be allowed only during the arming/disarming
windows, or if the system is in alarm (if 2*11 is set to 1). Note that this applies only to
operator level users. Installer, Master and Manager level users can disarm the system
at any time. Enter 0 if disarming can occur at any time.
0=disable for displayed partition; 1=enable for displayed partition
2*11 ALLOW DISARM OUTSIDE WINDOW IF ALARM OCCURS
[0]
Used only if field 2*10 (partition-specific field) is set to 1.
Enter 1 to allow the system to be disarmed outside the programmed disarm (opening)
window if an alarm has occurred.
Enter 0 to allow disarming only during the disarm window, regardless of system status.
If field 2*10 is set to 0 for a partition, this field (2*11) has no effect for that partition.
2*18 ENABLE GOTO FOR THIS PARTITION (partition-specific)
[0]
Enter 1 if this partition is to be accessed from another partition's keypad using the
GOTO command. Otherwise enter 0.
2*19 USE PARTITION DESCRIPTOR
[0]
Enter 1 if partition descriptors will be programmed. If enabled, the normal keypad
display will include a partition number and four-digit descriptor).
Enter 0 to cause the keypads to display a nonpartitioned system type of display (no
partition number will appear).
2*20 ENABLE J7 TRIGGERS FOR PARTITION (partition-specific)
2*21 SUPERVISION PULSES FOR LRR
[1]
[000]
|
F
|
B
S
Used for supervised connection to 7920SE.
Enter 1 to enable pulses for each type of LRR trigger (Fire, Burglary/Audible Panic,
Silent Panic/Duress. This option causes the control to send periodic short pulses on the
J7 radio triggers. These pulses are used by the 7920SE to determine that its connection
to the control is still intact.
Enter 0 if not desired.
Must be 1 for UL commercial burglary installations.
2*22 DISPLAY FIRE ALARMS OF OTHER PARTITIONS (partition-specific)
Enter 1 to allow fire alarms that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this
partition's keypad(s). Otherwise, enter 0.
22-16
[0]
Section 22 – Data Field Descriptions
2*23 DISPLAY BURG & PANIC ALARMS OF OTHER PARTITIONS
[0]
Enter 1 to allow burglary and panic alarms that occur on other partitions to be
displayed at this partition's keypad(s). Otherwise, enter 0.
2*24 DISPLAY TROUBLES OF OTHER PARTITIONS
[0]
Enter 1 to allow troubles that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this partition's
keypad(s). Otherwise, enter 0.
22-17
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
22-18
S E C T I O N
2 3
#93 Menu Mode Programming
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
The #93 Menu Mode is a mode through which much of the system's programming is done. It
enables the programming of the system via interactive screen prompts.
After programming all system related programming fields in the usual way, press #93 while
still in programming mode to display the first choice of the menu driven programming
functions. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES) in response to the displayed menu selection. Pressing 0
will display the next choice in sequence.
NOTE: The following field should be preset before beginning: 2*00 Number of
Partitions. In addition, receivers should be programmed via Device programming.
Below is a list of the main menu selections. For the detailed selections refer to the VISTA128B Programming Guide.
Menu selections are as follows:
ZONE PROG?
For programming the following:
1 = YES
•
Zone Number
•
Zone Response Type
•
Partition Number for Zone
•
Dialer report code for zone
•
Input Device Type for zone (whether RF, polling loop, etc.)
•
Enrolling serial numbers of 5800 Series transmitters & serial polling
loop devices into the system.
0 = NO
EXPERT MODE?
Same as Zone Programming except:
1 = YES
•
Done with a minimum number of keystrokes.
•
Can program wireless keys using pre-defined templates.
0 = NO
REPORT CODE PROG?
For programming the following:
1 = YES
•
Alarm report codes for zones
•
Restore & supervisory codes
•
All other system report codes
0 = NO
ALPHA PROG?
For entering alpha descriptors for the following:
1 = YES
•
Zone Descriptors
•
Installer's Message
•
Custom Words
•
Partition Descriptors
•
Relay Descriptors
0 = NO
23-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
DEVICE PROG?
1 = YES
0 = NO
OUTPUT PGM?
1 = YES
0 = NO
CUSTOM INDEX ?
1 = YES
0 = NO
ACCESS GRP PGM
1 = YES
0 = NO
EVENT/ACTION PGM
1 = YES
23-2
Device Address
•
Device Type
•
Keypad Options (incl. partition assignment)
•
RF House ID
•
LRR Options (incl. programming radio)
For defining output relay functions.
For entering voice descriptors for relays to be used with the 4285/4286
VIP Module.
For creating custom word substitutes for VIP Module annunciation.
0 = NO
ACCESS POINT PGM
1 = YES
•
0 = NO
RLY VOICE DESCR?
1 = YES
For defining the following device characteristics for addressable
devices, including keypads, RF receivers (5881), output relay
modules (4204/4204CF), 4285/4286 VIP Module, ECP long range
radio (7820), and vista gateway module:
0 = NO
For defining the parameters for each of the VistaKey zones including
which group(s) have access through an access point (door). See the
VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup Guide for the detailed programming
instructions.
For defining the capabilities (privileges) for each group of users. See the
VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup Guide for the detailed programming
instructions.
For defining events and time windows for an access group. See the
VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup Guide for the detailed programming
instructions.
S E C T I O N
2 4
Scheduling Options
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ Introduction to Scheduling
♦ Daily Open/Close Schedules
♦ Time Window Definitions
♦ Holiday Schedules
♦ Open/Close Definitions
♦ Time Driven Events
♦ Scheduling Menu Mode
♦ Limitation of Access Schedules
♦ Scheduling Menu Structure
♦ Temporary Schedules
♦ Time Windows
♦ User Schedule Menu Mode
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Introduction to Scheduling
This section describes the scheduling features provided with this control panel.
UL
•
•
You must program Bypass and Auto-Arm Fail reports for UL installations.
Auto-disarming is not for use in UL installations.
General
•
The scheduling features allow certain operations to be automated, such as auto-arming,
auto-disarming, auto-bypassing and unbypassing of zones, and activating relay outputs
(using 4204 modules).
•
The system uses time windows (a programmed period of time with a start and stop time)
for defining open/close schedules, holiday schedules, user-defined temporary schedules
and access schedules for users.
•
Scheduled events are programmed by user-friendly menu modes of programming (#80,
#81 and #83 modes), explained in detail in this section. These menus take you step by
step through the options.
Auto Arming
•
The system can automatically arm (AWAY Mode) a partition at the end of a predetermined closing (arming) time window.
•
Auto arming can be delayed three ways: by use of the auto arm delay, the auto arm
warning, or by manually extending the closing (arming) time window with a keypad
command.
•
The system can also automatically bypass any open zones when auto arming.
24-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Auto-Arm Delay
•
Auto-arm delay provides a delay (grace period) before auto arming.
•
It starts at the end of the closing time window.
•
The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56 minutes in partition-specific program
field 2*05.
•
At the expiration of this delay, the auto-arm warning will start.
Auto-Arm Warning
•
The auto-arm warning causes the keypad sounder to warn the user of an impending
auto-arm.
•
The warning can be set from 1 to 15 minutes prior to the arming in partition-specific
program field 2*06.
•
During this period the keypad beeps every 15 seconds and displays "AUTO ARM
ALERT.” During the last 60 seconds, the keypads begin to beep every 5 seconds.
•
The panel arms at the conclusion of the auto-arm warning period.
Extend Closing Window
•
A user can manually delay the arm (closing) time window by 1 or 2 hours.
•
This is done by entering a keypad command ([User Code} + #82), which then prompts the
user to enter the desired extension time of 1 or 2.
•
This feature is useful if a user must stay on the premises later than usual.
•
The auto-arm delay and warning periods will begin at the end of the extension.
Force Arm
•
The force arm option causes the panel to attempt to bypass any faulted zones prior to
auto-arming (panel will perform a force-arm).
•
This option is set in partition-specific program field 2*08.
Auto Disarming
•
The system can automatically disarm a partition at the end of a pre-determined opening
(disarm) time window.
•
The disarming time can be delayed by using the auto-disarm delay feature.
Disarm Delay
•
Auto-disarm delay provides a delay before auto disarming. This delay is added to the end
of the disarm time window.
•
The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56 minutes, in partition-specific program
field 2*07.
Restrict Disarming
24-2
•
This option allows disarming by users only during the disarm time window and during
the arming time window (in case user needs to re-enter premises after manually arming
the partition).
•
This option is set in partition-specific field 2*10.
•
If field 2*10 is set, it is highly recommended to set field 2*11 as well. This field allows
the partition to be disarmed outside the arm/disarm time windows only if the partition is
in alarm.
Section 24 – Scheduling Options
Exception Reports
•
This option allows the reporting of openings and closings to the central station only if the
arming and disarming occurs outside of the predetermined opening and closing time
windows.
•
This option is set in partition-specific field 2*09.
•
The system can be programmed to send No Opening and No Closing reports if the
partition is not armed or disarmed by the end of the corresponding time window.
Time-Driven Events
•
By using the time windows, the system can automatically activate and de-activate relays
at predetermined times to turn lights or other devices on and off.
•
The time-driven events can be activated at different times in relation to the time window:
1. At the beginning of a time window
2. At the end of a time window
3. During a time window active period only (on at beginning of window, off at end)
4. At both the beginning and end of the time window (e.g., to sound a buzzer at the
beginning and end of a coffee break)
•
The system can perform the same actions on a daily basis, or can be made to perform an
action only once (i.e., turn on the porch light this Wednesday at 8:00 pm).
•
The system also provides up to 20 programmable "timers" available to the end user for
the purpose of activating output devices at preset times and on preset days.
Limitation of Access of Users by Time
•
A user's access can be limited to a certain time period, during which he can perform
system functions. Outside this time, that user's code will be inactive.
•
The system provides up to 8 access schedules, each consisting of two time windows
(typically one for opening, one for closing) for each day of the week and two time windows
for holidays.
•
The access schedules are programmed in the #80 Menu Mode, and enabled for a given
user when that user’s access code is added to the system.
•
If a user tries to operate the system outside of the schedule, the alpha keypad will display
"Access Denied."
Time Window Definitions
General
•
Scheduled events are based on time windows, which are simply periods of time during
which an event may take place.
•
A time window is defined by a “Start” time and a “Stop” time.
•
The system supports up to 20 time windows.
•
The windows are shared by all 8 partitions, and are used when programming the various
schedules (open/close, limitation of access), as well as for time-driven event control.
24-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Scheduling Example
To understand scheduling, take, for example, a store that has the following hours:
Monday to Thursday:
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Holidays
9am to 6pm
9am to 9pm
10am to 4pm
Closed
Closed
Assume the owner desires the times to allow employees to arm or disarm the system:
Monday to Thursday:
Open (disarm)
Close (arm)
Open (disarm)
Close (arm)
Open (disarm)
Close (arm)
Closed
Friday
Saturday
Sunday & Holidays
8am to 9am
6pm to 6:30pm
8am to 9am
9pm to 9:30pm
9am to 10am
4pm to 4:30pm
To provide these schedules, the following five time windows need to be programmed:
Window Start Stop
Purpose
1
8am
9am
Monday-Friday open window
2
9am
10am
Saturday open window
3
4pm
4:30pm
Saturday close window
4
6pm
6:30pm
Monday-Thurs. close window
5
9pm
9:30pm
Friday close window
Using the #80 Menu Mode (described later in this section), the installer can program
open/close schedules by assigning each time window to a day of the week (windows
are entered as 2-digit entries):
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
Hol
Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl
Op/Cl Op/Cl
01/04
00/00
01/04
01/04
01/04
01/05
02/03
00/00
Note: 00 is entered for those days on which the store is closed.
Employees can arm and disarm the system, when programmed, within the open and close
time windows without causing a report to be sent to the central station (reporting by
exception, field 2*09). The system can be programmed to automatically arm/disarm in case
an employee fails to arm/disarm manually (auto-arm/auto-disarm).
Open/Close Definitions
General
•
The open/close scheduling is controlled by one of three schedules. Each schedule consists
of one time window for openings and one time window for closings.
•
There are three types of schedules available: Daily, Holiday, and Temporary.
Daily Schedule
•
Each partition can have one daily schedule consisting of one opening window and one
closing window per day.
Holiday Schedule
24-4
•
A holiday schedule will override the regular daily schedule on selected holidays
throughout the year.
•
The opening and closing windows are programmed in the daily schedule, but the holidays
themselves are defined in the Holiday Schedule Programming in the #80 Menu Mode.
Section 24 – Scheduling Options
Temporary Schedule
•
The temporary schedule provides a method for the end user to override the daily and
holiday schedules.
•
It consists of one opening window and one closing window for each day of the week.
•
The schedule takes effect for up to one week, after which it is automatically deactivated.
•
This schedule is programmed using the #81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode.
Additional Schedules
•
Additional opening and closing schedules can be programmed using the Time-Driven
Event Programming. For example, a schedule for normal store openings/closings can be
programmed with a daily open/close schedule, and another open/close schedule for a
lunch hour can be programmed using the time-driven event schedule programming.
•
Refer to “Time-Driven Events” later in this section for detailed information.
Open/Close Reports by Exception
•
The system can help reduce communication traffic to the central station by using the
Open/Close Reports by Exception feature.
•
The Open/Close by Exception option suppresses these reports from being sent to the
central station if an arm or disarm is done within the expected time window. Reports
are only sent if the arm or disarm occurs outside the assigned time window.
•
The system keeps a record of all openings/closings in its event log.
•
If a disarming occurs during a closing window (a person who arms the system forgets
something and has to reenter), the Opening report (although outside of the opening
window) will not be sent (as long as that disarming occurs within the closing window).
•
This option is programmed in partition-specific program field 2*09.
The following chart gives an example of how the Open/Close by Exception reporting works.
Example of Open/Close Exception Reporting & Scheduling
6:01PM
5:59AM
Early Opening reports will
be sent if system is
manually disarmed
before opening window
begins.
* Early and Late Opening
and Closing reports are
programmable options in
the Report Code
programming section.
They are not dependent
on the programming of
the Exception Reporting
option.
6AM
9AM
Opening Window
No reports sent if
system disarmed
during this time
window.
If an arming occurs, a
Closing report is sent
to the central station
regardless of how the
Exception Reporting
option is set.
9:01AM
3:59PM
Auto-disarm delay begins.
Auto-disarm occurs after delay (if
auto-disarm is enabled).
Missed Opening reports will be
sent if manual disarming has not
occurred at expiration of opening
window.
Late Opening reports will be sent
if disarm occurs after the opening
window expires.
Early Closing reports will be sent
if manual arming occurs before
the closing window begins.
* Missed Opening/Closing type
reports are programmed in the
Report Code programming
section. The Exception Reporting
option must be set for these to be
sent.
4PM
6PM
Closing Window
6:01PM
5:59AM
Auto-arm delay begins.
Auto-arm warning begins.
No reports sent if
system is armed*
during this time
window.
* or disarmed if
user needs to reenter premises.
Auto-arm occurs after
warning expires (if autoarm is enabled).
Missed Closing reports will
be sent if manual arming
has not occurred at
expiration of closing
window.
Late Closing reports will be
sent if system is manually
armed after the closing
window expires.
24-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Scheduling Menu Mode
The #80 Scheduling Menu Mode is used to program most of the scheduling and timed-event
options. To enter this mode, the system must first be in the normal operating mode (all
partitions disarmed). Enter [User Code] + [#] + 8 + 0. NOTE: Only users with an Installer
or Master level user code may enter the #80 mode.
The following can be programmed while in this mode:
• Define time windows
• Assign open/close schedules to each partition
• Assign holiday schedules
• Program time-driven events (for system functions and relay activation)
• Assign limitation of access schedules
Some scheduling features are programmed in Data Field Programming Mode ([Installer
Code] + 8 0 0 0). The general Programming Mode scheduling fields are listed below.
System-Wide Fields:
1*74 -1*75 Relay time-out values
2*01-2*02 Daylight savings time options
2*11
Allow disarming outside window if alarm occurs
Partition-Specific fields:
1*76
Access control relay for this partition
2*05
Auto-arm delay value
2*06
Auto-arm warning time
2*07
Auto-disarm delay value
2*08
Force-arm enable
2*09
Open/Close Reporting by Exception
2*10
Restrict disarm only during windows
Report Code Programming in #93 Menu Mode
(System Group #3)
Scheduling related report codes
Event-driven relay activation options are programmed using the Output Programming in the
#93 Menu Mode. These actions are in response to a programmed action. However, relay
activation can also be time-driven, and thus be used to initiate a desired action. Time-driven
relay activation options are programmed using the #80 Menu Mode. Refer to the TimeDriven Event Programming for procedures.
Steps To Programming Scheduling Options
This section contains examples of the worksheets only. For complete worksheets, see the
Programming Guide accompanying this Installation and Setup Guide.
In order to use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode, use the worksheets to do the following:
• Define time windows (up to 20)
• Define the daily open/close schedules (one schedule per day, per partition)
• Define the holidays to be used by the system (up to 16)
• Define limitation of access times (up to 8 schedules)
• Define the time-driven events (up to 20)
Note: Temporary schedules are programmed using the #81 Menu Mode.
Use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode to perform the following functions:
• Program the time windows
• Program the open/close schedules
• Program the time-driven events
• Program the access schedules
24-6
Section 24 – Scheduling Options
Scheduling Menu Structure
To program schedules, enter Scheduling Program Mode:
[User Code] + [#] + 80. (Installer or Master level user code.)
This mode can only be entered when all partitions are disarmed.
There are 5 sections of scheduling menus, as shown below. Entering 1 at a displayed main
menu prompt will select that menu section. Prompts for programming that scheduling
feature will then appear. Enter 0 to skip a section and display the next menu option.
Time Window ?
1 Yes
0 = No
0
Upon entering Schedule Menu Mode, this prompt will appear.
Enter 1 to program time windows. Refer to Time Windows
Programming later in this section for detailed procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “O/C Schedules?” prompt.
O/C Schedules ?
1 Yes
0 = No
0
Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules. Refer to
Open/Close Schedules Programming later in this section for
detailed procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “Holidays?” prompt.
Holidays ?
1 Yes
0 = No
0
Enter 1 to program holiday schedules. Refer to Holiday
Schedule Programming later in this section for detailed
procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “Timed Events?” prompt.
Timed Events ?
1 Yes
0 = No
0
Enter 1 to program timed events for relay outputs, additional
schedules, and other system functions. Refer to Time Driven
Event Programming later in this section for detailed
procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “Access Sched?” prompt.
Access Sched. ?
1 Yes
0 = No
0
Enter 1 to program access schedules. Refer to Limitation of
Access Schedules Programming later in this section for detailed
procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the "Quit?" prompt.
Quit ?
1 Yes
0 = No
0
Enter 1 to quit #80 Scheduling Menu Mode and return to
normal operating mode.
Enter 0 to make any changes or review the scheduling
programming options. If 0 is pressed, the “Time Window?”
prompt is displayed.
24-7
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Time Windows
The system provides 20 time windows that are defined with start and stop times. These
windows are used for various open/close and access schedules, as well as for output controls,
and are the basis of the scheduling system. These windows are shared among all 8 partitions.
Time Windows Worksheet
The following worksheet will help you define time windows and scheduling aspects of this
system before programming the time window definitions for this installation. Note that time
windows can span midnight.
Start Time
(HH:MM)
Time Window
Number
Stop Time
(HH:MM)
1
2
3…..20
A time window must have a start and a stop time.
Time Windows Programming
Enter Scheduling Mode by entering [Installer Code + [#] + 80. The keypad will display the
Time Window Programming prompt.
Enter 1 at this main menu prompt to program time windows.
Time Window ?
1 Yes
0 = No
0
Time Window # ?
01-20, 00 = Quit 01
Enter the 2-digit time window number (01-20) to be
programmed.
Press [∗] to accept the entry. Enter 00 + [∗] at the "TIME
WINDOW #?" prompt to quit time window programming and
display the “Quit ?” prompt.
01 TIME WINDOW
00:00AM 00:00AM
If a time window number was entered, the cursor will be
positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start of window
entry.
Enter the desired start of window hour and press [∗]. The
cursor will move to the minutes. Enter the desired minutes
and press [∗]. Toggle the AM/PM indication by pressing any
key 0-9 while the cursor is under the A/P position and then
press [∗]. Repeat this to program the stop of window entry.
When the entry is completed, the "TIME WINDOW #?" prompt
is displayed again.
Enter the next time window number to be programmed and
repeat the procedure.
Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to return to the main menu
choices and continue programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.
Since the time windows are shared among all partitions, it is important to make sure that changing
a time window does not adversely affect desired actions in other partitions.
24-8
Section 24 – Scheduling Options
Daily Open/Close Schedules
Open/Close Schedule Worksheet
Write in the previously defined time window numbers for open & close for each partition.
Part
Mon
Op
Tues
Cl
Op
Wed
Cl
Op
Thur
Cl
Op
Cl
Fri
Op
Sat
Cl
Op
Sun
Cl
Op
Hol
Cl
Op
Cl
1
2
3…8
Open/Close Schedule Programming
Each partition can be assigned one daily open/close schedule, plus a holiday open/close
schedule. Temporary schedules are programmed separately, using the #81 Temporary
Schedule Menu Mode. To program additional open/close schedules, see Time Driven Events
Programming.
After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press 0 until the “O/C Schedules?” prompt appears.
Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules.
O/C Schedules ?
1 Yes
0 = No
0
Partition # ?
01-08, 00 = Quit 01
Enter the appropriate partition number for which the following
open/close schedules will apply.
Enter 00 + [∗] at the "Partition #?" prompt to quit open/close
schedules programming and display the “Quit ?” prompt.
Mon P1 OP WIND.?
00:00 00:00
00
Enter the time window number 01-20 for the displayed day's
opening schedule beginning with Monday.
Enter 00 if no schedule is desired for a particular day. As the
number is keyed in, the actual time that has been stored for
that window number will be displayed as a programming aid.
Press [∗] to accept the entry.
Mon P1 CL WIND.?
00:00 00:00
00
Enter the time window number for the displayed day's closing
schedule. As the number is keyed in, the actual time that has
been stored for the window number will be displayed.
Press the [∗] key to accept the entry.
Tue P1 OP WIND.?
00:00 00:00
00
The keypad will now prompt for Tuesday's open/close schedule,
etc. Follow the procedure for Monday’s prompts.
When the last day of the week has been programmed, the
holiday opening and closing window prompts are displayed.
Hol P1 OP WIND.?
00:00 00:00
00
Repeat the procedure for the holiday opening and closing time
windows.
Press the [∗] key to accept the entry.
When the entries are completed, the “Partition #?” prompt is
displayed again. Repeat this procedure for each partition in the
system.
Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu
choices and continue programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.
24-9
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Holiday Schedules
A holiday schedule will override the regular daily open/close schedule on the programmed
holidays throughout the year.
Holiday Schedule Worksheet
The system provides up to 16 holidays that can be assigned for the system. Each holiday can
be assigned to any combination of partitions. List the desired holidays in a Month/Day format
on the worksheet. Check the partitions for which these holidays apply.
HOL
Partition
Month/Day
1
/
2
/
3…16
/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Holiday Schedule Programming
After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press 0 until the “Holidays ?” prompt appears.
Enter 1 to program holiday schedules.
Holidays ?
1 Yes
0 = No
0
HOLIDAY NUMBER ?
01-16, 00=Quit 01
Enter the 2-digit holiday number (01-16) to be programmed
and press [∗] to accept entry.
Enter 00 + [∗] at the “Holiday Number?” prompt to quit the
holiday menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.
01 ENTER DATE
00/00
The cursor will be positioned on the tens of months digit. Enter
the appropriate month, then press [∗] to proceed to the day
field.
Enter the appropriate day for the holiday.
Press [∗] to accept the entry.
Part ? 12345678
Hit 0-8 x x
Holidays can be set for any partition, as follows. Press 0 to
turn all partitions on or off, or use keys 1-8 to toggle the letter
“x” under the partition to which this holiday will apply.
Press the [∗] key when all desired partitions have been
assigned.
The “Holiday Number?” prompt will be displayed again.
Repeat the procedure for each holiday to be programmed.
Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu
choices and continue programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.
Time-Driven Events
These are the schedules used to activate outputs, bypass zones, etc. based on a time schedule.
There are 20 of these events that may be programmed for the system, with each event
governed by the previously defined time windows.
The actions that can be programmed to automatically activate at set times are: relay
commands, arm/disarm commands, zone bypassing commands, and open/close access
conditions.
24-10
Section 24 – Scheduling Options
Time-Driven Events Worksheet
Fill out the worksheet using the steps outlined below.
Sched
Time
Days
Action
Action
Activation
Num.
Window
M T W T F S S H
Desired
Specifier
Time
1
2
3…20
1) First enter the schedule number (01-20) and time window number (01-20), and
note the day of the week the action is desired.
2) Enter the code for the desired action and action specifier. The action codes are the
events that are to take place when the scheduled time is reached. Each action also
requires an action specifier, which defines what the action will affect (relay, relay group,
partition, zone list, user group). The action specifier varies, depending on the type of
action selected.
The following is a list of the "Action Codes” (desired actions) used when programming
time-driven events. Note that these codes are independent of the relay codes programmed
during the Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
Relay commands
Action Code
01 Relay On
02 Relay Off
03 Relay Close for 2 seconds
04 Relay Close XX minutes (set in field 1*74)
05 Relay Close YY seconds (set in field 1*75)
06 Relay Group On
07 Relay Group Off
08 Relay Group Close for 2 seconds
09 Relay Group Close XX minutes (set in field 1*74)
10 Relay Group Close YY seconds (set in field 1*75)
Action Specifier
Relay #
Relay #
Relay #
Relay #
Relay #
Relay Group #
Relay Group #
Relay Group #
Relay Group #
Relay Group #
Arm/Disarm Commands
Activation times 1 (Beginning), 2 (End), 3 (During) are the only valid choices for automatic
arming and disarming functions.
"During" can be used to arm and disarm the control for a specific time only. For example,
if "during" is selected with Arm-STAY, the system automatically Arms-STAY at the
beginning of the window and automatically disarms at the end of the window.
Action Code
20 Arm-STAY
21 Arm AWAY
22 Disarm
23 Force Arm STAY (Auto-bypass faulted zns)
24 Force Arm AWAY (Auto-bypass faulted zns)
•
•
•
Action Specifier
Partition(s)
Partition(s)
Partition(s)
Partition(s)
Partition(s)
The auto-arm warning (field 2*06) applies when using time-driven events to auto-arm.
Temporary schedules will not override an auto-arming or auto-disarming programmed in timedriven events.
The auto-arming window cannot be extended using the Installer Code + #82 Mode.
24-11
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Bypass Commands
Activation times 1 (Beginning), 2 (End), 3 (During) are the only valid choices for bypass
commands. If 3 (During) is selected for auto-bypassing, the system will bypass the zone(s)
specified on a particular zone list at the beginning of the window and unbypass the zone(s)
at the end of the window. If it is selected for auto unbypassing, the system will remove
the bypass of the zone(s) at the beginning of the window and will restore the bypass of the
zone(s) at the end of the window.
Action Code
Action Specifier
30 Auto bypass - Zone list
Zone list #
31 Auto unbypass - Zone list
Zone list #
Open/Close Windows
Activation time 3 (During) is the only valid choice for these commands.
Action Code
Action Specifier
40 Enable Opening Window by partition
Partition(s)
41 Enable Closing Window by partition
Partition(s)
42 Enable Access Window for access group
Access Group
50 Off-Normal Reminder
None
(Starts local keypad beeping if fire offnormal condition exists)
Access Control Commands (use only with VistaKey Modules)
24-12
Action Code
Action Specifier
55 Access Point Grant
Access Point #
56 Access Point Grant with Override
Access Point #
57 Access Point Protect
Access Point #
58 Access Point Bypass
Access Point #
59 Access Point Lock
Access Point #
60 Access Point Exit
Access Point #
61 Access Point Group Grant
Group #
62 Access Point Group Grant with Override
Group #
63 Access Point Group Protect
Group #
64 Access Point Group Bypass
Group #
65 Access Point Group Lock
Group #
66 Access Point Group Exit
Group #
67 Access Point Partition Grant
Partition #
68 Access Point Partition Grant with Override
Partition #
69 Access Point Protect by Partition
Partition #
70 Access Point Bypass by Partition
Partition #
71 Access Point Lock by Partition
Partition #
72 Access Point Exit by Partition
Partition #
73 Access Point Trigger On
Trigger #
74 Access Point Trigger Off
Trigger #
Section 24 – Scheduling Options
Additional Commands
Action Code
Action Specifier
75 Run Macro
Macro #
76 Run Script
Script #
77 Access Point Group Enable
Group #
78 Access Point Group Disable
Group #
3) Enter the desired activation time, which refers to when the action is to take place
relative to the time window. Select from:
Activation Time
Description
1
Beginning of time window
2
End of time window
3
During time window active period only (On at beginning of
window, off at end). This can be used in conjunction with the
arm, disarm or bypass commands to control a part of the
system during the window.
For example, if bypass is selected to activate during the
window, the zones in the zone list will be bypassed at the
beginning of the window and unbypassed at the end of the
window.
4
Beginning and end of time window (e.g., -a Coffee break
buzzer). In this example, if relay pulse is selected, the relay will
pulse for 2 seconds at the beginning of the window, signaling
the beginning of the coffee break. At the end of the window it
will pulse again, signaling the end of coffee break.
Automatic Refresh Feature
The system automatically updates the status of all Time-Driven Events upon any of the
following occurrences:
• Changing of the time or date via #63 mode
•
Exiting #80 Scheduling Menu mode
•
Exiting Program mode
•
After a disconnect from the downloader
•
On a power-up
•
At Daylight Saving Time adjustment.
Time-Driven Event Programming
The following schedules can be used to activate outputs, bypass zones, arm/disarm the
system, etc. based on a time schedule. Up to 20 events can be programmed for the system.
Time windows must first be defined in order to be used to trigger events.
If using time-driven events to control relays, the following menu items must first
be programmed using Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode:
Enter Relay No.
(reference identification number)
Output Group
(if applicable)
Restriction
Output Type
(4101SN, 4204, X-10, or FSA)
ECP Address
Relay No.
if 4204 relays
24-13
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press 0 until the “Timed Events ?” prompt appears.
Enter 1 to program timed events.
Timed Events ?
1 Yes
0 = No
0
TIMED EVENT # ?
Enter the timed event number to be programmed (01-20).
01-20, 00=Quit 01
Press [∗].
The system will then prompt the user to enter the desired
action to be taken.
Enter 00 at the “TIMED EVENT #?” prompt to quit the timed
event menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.
01 ACTION ?
none
00
Enter the action code for this timed-event number from the list
at the left. This could be an output command, an arming
command, or any other time-driven event.
Press [∗]to accept the entry. The prompt for the action specifier
will display.
Action Codes:
01=Relay On
02=Relay Off
03=Relay Close for 2 seconds
04=Relay Close XX minutes
05=Relay Close YY seconds
Action Specifier:
Actions 01-05
01 RELAY # ?
If actions 01-05 were selected, the
prompt at the right will be
displayed. Enter the relay number.
00
Press [∗] to accept entry. The “Time
Window ?” prompt appears.
06=Relay Group On
07=Relay Group Off
08=Relay Group Close for 2 seconds
09=Relay Group Close XX minutes
10=Relay Group Close YY seconds
Actions 06-10
01 RELAY GRP # ?
If actions 06-10 were selected, the
prompt at the right will be
displayed. Enter the relay group
number.
00
Press [∗] to accept entry. The “Time
Window ?” prompt appears.
Action Codes:
20=Arm-STAY
21=Arm AWAY
22=Disarm
23=Force Arm STAY
24=Force Arm AWAY
40=Enable Open Window by part.
41=Enable Close Window by part.
Actions 21-24 and 40-41
PART? 12345678
If actions 21-24 or 40-41 were
selected, the prompt at the right
will be displayed. Enter the
partition to which the action
applies. Enter 0 to select all
partitions. Enter a partition number
again to deselect it.
HIT 0-8
Press [∗] to accept entry. The “Time
Window ?” prompt appears.
24-14
X X
Section 24 – Scheduling Options
Action Codes:
Action Specifier:
30=Auto bypass - Zone list
31=Auto unbypass - Zone list
Actions 30-31
01 ZONE LIST ?
If actions 30-31 were selected, the
prompt at the right will be
displayed. Enter the zone list
number that contains the zones to
be bypassed or unbypassed.
ENTER 01-15
01
Press [∗] to accept entry. The “Time
Window ?” prompt appears.
42=Enable Access Window for
Access group(s)
Action 42
GROUP ? 12345678
If action 42 was selected, the
prompt at the right will be
displayed. Enter the group number
to which the time window will
apply.
HIT 0-8
X
Press [∗] to accept entry. The “Time
Window ?” prompt appears.
50=Off-normal Reminder
Action 50
No action specifier is required for
this action since the conditions that
this will occur for are system-wide.
01 Time Window ?
00:00
00:00
01
Enter the time window number (01-20) for which this timed
event is to occur. As the number is keyed in, the actual time
that has been stored for the time window number will be
displayed.
Press [∗] to accept entry.
01 Active time ?
0
Enter the activation time from 1-4 (listed below). As the
number is keyed in, the activation time will be displayed. The
choices are:
1: Trigger at the start of the window.
2: Trigger at the end of the window.
3: Take effect only for the duration of the window.
4: Trigger at both the start and the end of the window.
Example: - coffee break buzzer.
Press [∗] to accept entry.
Days ? MTWTFSSH
Hit 0-8 x
x
The system will then ask for which days the event is to be
activated.
Press 0 to toggle all days on or off; or else press keys 1-8 to
toggle the letter “x” under the day on or off (Monday = 1,
Holiday = H = 8).
When all entries have been made, the “TIMED EVENT #?”
prompt is displayed again.
Repeat the procedure for each timed event required for the
installation.
Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu
choices and continue programming. Enter 1 to quit Scheduling
24-15
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Menu Mode.
Limitation of Access Schedules
Limitation of Access is a means by which a user's access code is limited to working during a
certain period of time. The system provides 8 Access Schedules, each of which consists of two
time windows for each day of the week and two time windows for holidays (typically one for
an opening time window and the second for a closing time window). A user required to follow
a schedule would be assigned to an access group of the same number (1-8; i.e., schedule 1=
group 1). The user’s access code is assigned to a group when that user is added to the
system. If no limitations apply, enter 0.
Limitation of Access Schedule Worksheet
Enter the appropriate time window numbers for each access schedule.
Acc
Sch
Mon
W1
Tues
W2
W1
W2
Wed
W1
W2
Thurs
W1
W2
Fri
W1
Sat
W2
W1
Sun
W2
W1
W2
Hol
W1
W2
1
2
3…8
NOTE : The holidays used for the access groups are the same as those defined in the holiday
schedule.
Limitation of Access Schedules Programming
To program access schedules, do the following:
Enter Scheduling Menu Mode [Installer Code] + # 80. After entering Scheduling Menu
Mode, press 0 until the “Access Sched. ?” prompt appears.
Enter 1 to program access schedules.
Access Sched. ?
1 Yes
0 = No
0
ACCESS SCHED # ?
Enter the access control schedule number between 01 and 08.
01-08, 00 = Quit 01
Press [∗] to accept entry.
Enter 00 at the “Access Sched #?” prompt to quit the access
control menus and display the Quit ? prompt.
MON A1 Window 1?
00:00 00:00
00
Enter the first time window number (01-20) for this access
schedule for the displayed day. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the window will be
displayed.
Press [∗] to continue.
MON A1 Window 2 ?
00:00 00:00
00
Enter the second time window number from 01-20 for this
access schedule for the displayed day. As the number is keyed
in, the actual time that has been stored for the window will be
displayed.
Press [∗] to continue.
TUE A1 Window 1?
00:00 00:00
00
Hol A1 Window 1 ?
00:00 00:00 00
24-16
Repeat the procedure for the other days of the week. When the
last day of the week has been programmed, the windows for
holidays may be entered.
Enter the first time window number for holidays for this access
schedule. As the number is keyed in, the actual time that has
been stored for the window will be displayed.
Section 24 – Scheduling Options
Press [∗] to continue.
Hol A1 Window 2 ?
00:00 00:00 00
Enter the second time window number for holidays for this
access schedule. As the number is keyed in, the actual time
that has been stored for the window will be displayed.
Press [∗] to continue.
Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu
choices and continue programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.
Temporary Schedules
Each partition can be assigned a temporary schedule, which will override the regular
open/close schedule (and the holiday schedule). This schedule takes effect as soon as it is
programmed and remains active for up to one week.
Temporary Schedule Worksheet
Partition/Windows
1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
Disarm Window
Start Time
HH:MM
Stop Time
HH:MM
Arm Window
2
Start Time
HH:MM
Stop Time
HH:MM
Disarm Window
Start Time
HH:MM
Stop Time
HH:MM
Arm Window
Start Time
HH:MM
Stop Time
HH:MM
3…8 Disarm Window
Start Time
HH:MM
Stop Time
HH:MM
Arm Window
Start Time
HH:MM
Stop Time
HH:MM
Temporary Schedules Programming
Enter [User Code] + [#] + 81 to enter this mode. Note that only users with authority level
of manager or higher can program temporary schedules. A temporary schedule only affects
the partition from which it is entered.
Temporary schedules can also be reused at later dates simply by scrolling (pressing [#]) to
the “DAYS?” prompt (described below) and activating the appropriate days. This should be
considered when defining daily time windows.
24-17
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Mon DISARM WIND.
00:00AM 00:00AM
This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the
disarm (opening) window for Monday.
Upon entry of this mode, the cursor will be positioned on the
tens of hours digit of the start time of the disarm window.
Enter the desired hour.
Press [∗] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered
in the same manner.
Press [∗] to move to the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in
the 0-9 range will toggle the AM/PM indication.
Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.
Press [∗] to store the entries and move to the arming (closing)
window for Monday.
Pressing [#] will scroll you through the prompts without
making any changes.
Mon ARM WINDOW
00:00AM 00:00AM
This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the arm
(closing) window for Monday.
The cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the
start time of the arm window. Enter the desired hour.
Press [∗] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered
in the same manner.
Press [∗] to move to the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in
the 0-9 range will toggle the AM/PM indication.
Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.
After the windows for that day have been completed, the
system will prompt for disarm and arm time windows for the
next day.
Press [#] if no changes are desired.
Tue DISARM WIND.
Repeat the procedure described above for all days of the week.
00:00AM 00:00AM
When all the windows for all the days have been completed, the
system will prompt which days of the schedule are to be
activated.
Days ? MTWTFSS
This is the prompt that actually activates the temporary
schedule.
Hit 0-7
x x
To select the days which are to be activated, enter 1-7
(Monday = 1). An "X" will appear under that day, indicating
the temporary schedule for that day is active. Entering a day's
number again will deactivate that day. Pressing 0 will toggle
all days on/off.
The temporary schedule will only be in effect for the days which
have the letter “x” under them. As the week progresses, the
selected days are reset to the inactive state, but all other
entries for the temporary schedule will remain programmed.
Press [∗] to store the entries or press [#] to exit the Temporary
Schedule Entry Mode without making any changes.
24-18
Section 24 – Scheduling Options
User Scheduling Menu Mode
The system provides up to 20 "timers" which will be available to the end user for the purpose
of controlling output devices (4204 relay). These timers are comparable to the individual
appliance timers that might be purchased at a department store. The output devices
themselves are programmed into the system by the installer during Output Programming in
the #93 Menu Mode. The end user needs only to know the output device number and its
alpha descriptor.
The installer may set certain relays to be "restricted" duringOutput Programming in the # 93
Menu Mode. These relays may not be controlled by the end user (this prevents the end user
from controlling doors, pumps, bell outputs, etc.)
To enter this mode, the user enters [Security Code] + # + 83.
Output Timer # ?
Enter the output timer number to be programmed (01-20).
01-20, 00=Quit 01
Press [∗] to accept entry and move to the next prompt.
Enter 00 to quit and return to normal operating mode.
06 07:00P 11:45P
PORCH LITE
04
If that timer number has already been programmed, a
summary screen will appear. In this example:
06 = Timer #
07:00PM = Start Time
11:45PM = Stop Time
PORCH LITE = Descriptor for Output Device # 4
04 = Output Device # affected by this timer
Press [∗] to continue.
06 ENTER OUTPUT#
Enter the desired output number (01-96).
PORCH LITE
As the number is entered, the descriptor for that output device
will be displayed.
04
Press [∗] to continue.
Entering 00 as the output number deletes the timer (Timer 06, in this example) and displays an
output descriptor of "None." Output devices are programmed via #93 Menu Mode.
06 ON TIME ?
07:00 PM
The cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the
ON time. Enter the desired hour.
Press [∗] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered
in the same manner.
The AM/PM indication is toggled by hitting any key in the 0-9
range while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.
Press [∗] to continue.
06 OFF TIME ?
11:45 PM
The cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the
OFF. Enter the desired hour.
Press [∗] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered
in the same manner.
The AM/PM indication is toggled by hitting any key in the 0-9
range while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.
Press [∗] to continue.
24-19
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
06 DAYS? MTWTFSS
HIT 0-7
x
x
To select the days which are to be activated, enter 1-7
(Monday = 1). An "x" will appear under that day, indicating the
output for that day is active. Entering a day's number again
will deactivate that day. Pressing 0 will toggle all days on/off.
The outputs will only be in effect for the days which have the
letter “x” under them. As the week progresses, the selected
days are reset to the inactive state, unless the permanent
option is selected (next screen prompt).
When completed, press [∗] to continue.
06 Permanent ?
0 = NO,1 = YES 0
Selecting "Permanent" (1) means that this schedule will be in
effect on a continuous basis. An answer of 0 means that this
schedule will be in effect for one week only. The letter "x"
under the day will then be cleared, but all other entries for the
output device will remain programmed.
Press [∗] to accept entry.
The system will quit User Scheduling Mode and return to
normal operating mode.
24-20
S E C T I O N
2 5
System Communication
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Reporting Formats
♦ Telephone Line Connections
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
The VISTA-128B provides one main built-in dialer for communication to the central station.
The communicator will make up to 8 attempts to transmit a report to one or both telephone
numbers, depending upon the report routing option programmed. The control panel will
transmit reports in the following order: alarms (fire, medical/panic, and burglary), remaining
types of messages.
Telephone Line Connections
{
{
GROUND
Connect the main dialer output to telephone company lines which provide loop start service
using the RJ31X cables supplied. Do not connect to telephone company lines which provide
ground start service.
26
30
Handset
27
Incoming
Telco Line
28
29
TERMINALS
ON CONTROL
DIRECT
CONNECT
CORD
TIP
RING
INCOMING TELCO LINE
RED (RING)
GREEN (TIP)
GREY (RING)
BROWN (TIP)
EARTH GROUND
TIP
RJ31X
RING
JACK
PREMISES
PHONES
PLUG
Figure 25-1: Standard Telephone Line Connections
•
•
UL
To prevent the risk of shock, disconnect phone lines at telco jack before servicing the panel.
If the communicator is connected to a telephone line inside a PABX, be sure the PABX has a
back-up power supply that can support the PABX for 24 hours (Central Station usage) or 60
hours (Remote Station usage). Many PABXs are not power backed up and connection to
such a PABX will result in a communication failure if power is lost.
The telephone line inputs have overvoltage protection in accordance with UL1459 as specified in
UL985/UL1023.
25-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
A Successful Transmission
When a control panel calls the central station receiver, it waits to hear a “handshake”
frequency from the receiver to confirm that the receiver is on-line and ready to receive its
message. Once the panel hears the handshake it is programmed to listen for, it sends its
message. The panel then waits for a “kissoff” frequency from the receiver acknowledging
that the message was received and understood.
Once the handshake frequency is received and understood by the panel, the panel will send
its message. If there is an error in the transmission (the receiver does not receive a “valid”
message), the central station receiver will not give the kissoff frequency.
The panel will make a number of attempts to the primary telephone number and a number of
attempts to the secondary telephone number (if programmed) to get a valid message through.
The number of attempts that are made to each number is set to 8 for each phone number. If
the panel is not successful after its numerous attempts, the keypad will display “Comm
Failure.”
Reporting Formats
The following chart defines the three sets of (handshake/kissoff) frequencies that the panel
supports and the different formats that can be sent for each.
FORMAT TIME
HANDSHAKE
TRANSMITS DATA
KISSOFF
TRANSMIT
Low Speed
3+1
4+1
4+2
1400Hz
1900Hz (10PPS)
1400Hz
Under 15 secs.
(Standard report)
Sescoa/Rad
3+1
4+1
4+2
2300Hz
1800Hz (20PPS)
2300Hz
Under 10 secs.
(Standard report)
Express
4+2
1400–2300Hz
DTMF (10 cps)
1400Hz
Under 3 secs.
High Speed
1400–2300Hz
DTMF (10 cps)
1400Hz
Under 5 secs.
Contact ID
1400–2300Hz
DTMF (10 cps)
1400Hz
Under 3 secs.
ADVISORY: ADEMCO's Contact ID reporting is capable of uniquely reporting all 128 zones of information, as well
as openings and closings for all 128 users, to central stations equipped with the ADEMCO 685 receiver using
software level 4.4 or higher. Must be level 4.7 or higher to fully support all new VISTA-128B report codes. 685
software levels below 4.4 cannot support Contact ID reporting. If you need to update your 685 receiver, contact
your distributor.
The following describes each format in greater detail.
25-2
3+1 and 4+1 Standard
Formats
Comprised of a 3- (or 4-) digit subscriber number and a single digit
report code (e.g. Alarm, Trouble, Restore, Open, Close, etc.).
3+1 and 4+1 Expanded
Formats
Comprised of a 3- (or 4-) digit subscriber number, and a two-digit report
code. The first digit is displayed on the first line, followed by a second
line where the first digit is repeated 3 (or 4) times and followed by the
second digit. This is the “expanded” digit.
4+2 Format
Comprised of a 4-digit subscriber number and 2-digit report code.
ADEMCO Contact ID
Reporting Format
Comprised of a 4-digit subscriber number, 1-digit event qualifier ("new"
or "restore"), 3-digit event code, 2-digit Partition Number, and 3-digit
zone number, user number, or system status number.
ADEMCO High Speed
Comprised of 13 digits as follows: A 4-digit account number + eight
channels of zone information (1-8 or duress plus 9-15) + one status
channel, which identifies the type of events being reported in the eight
zone locations.
Section 25 – System Communication
Report
3+1/4+1
3+1/4+1
4+2
Standard
Expanded
Low Spd or
Express
Alarm
SSS(S) A
SSS(S) A
SSSS AZ
AAA(A) Z
Trouble
SSS(S) T
SSS(S) T
SSSS Tt
TTT(T) t
Bypass
SSS(S) B
SSS(S) B
AC Loss
SSS(S) E
SSS(S) E
SSSS Bb
BBB(B) b
SSSS EAC
EEE(E) AC
Low Batt
SSS(S) L
SSS(S) L
SSSS LLB
LLL(L) LB
Open
SSS(S) O
SSS(S) O
SSSS OU
OOO(O) U
Close
SSS(S) C
SSS(S) C
SSSS CU
CCC(C) U
Test
SSS(S) G
SSS(S) G
Restore
SSS(S) R
SSS(S) R
SSSS Gg
GGG(G)g
Alarm
SSSS RZ
RRR(R) Z
AC Restore
SSS(S) RA
SSS(S) RA
SSSSRA Ac
RARARA(RA)Ac
LoBat Res.
SSS(S) RL
SSS(S) RL
SSSS RLLB
RLRLRL(RL)LB
Trouble Res.
SSS(S) RT
SSS(S) RT
SSSS RTt
RTRTRT (RT)t
Bypass Res.
SSS(S) RB
SSS(S) RB
SSSS RBb
RBRBRB (RB)b
Where:
SSS or
SSSS =
Subscriber ID
C=
A=
Alarm Code-1st digit
U=
Z=
Typically Zone Number*-2nd digit
Gg =
User Number (1st & 2nd digits)
Test Code (1st & 2nd digits)
Tt =
Trouble Code 1st & 2nd digits
Bb =
Bypass Code 1st & 2nd digits
RTt =
Restore Code (Trbl) 1st & 2nd digits
EAC =
AC Loss Code 1st & 2nd digits
RBb =
Restore Code (Byps) 1st & 2nd digits
LLB =
Low Battery Code1st & 2nd digits
RAAC =
Restore Code (AC) 1st & 2nd digits
Open Code-1st Digit
RLLB =
Restore Code (Bat) 1st & 2nd digits
O=
*Zone numbers for:
R=
Close Code-1st Digit
Restore Code (Alarm) 1st & 2nd digits
[✴] + [#], or [B] = 999; [3] + [#], or [C] = 996;
[1] + [✴], or [A] = 995; Duress = 992
25-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
ADEMCO High Speed Reporting events by channel:
Channels 1 through 8 could have one of the following conditions:
1 = NEW EVENT
2 = OPENING (Status Channel Always = 2)*
3 = RESTORE
4 = CLOSING (Status Channel Always = 4)*
5 = NORMAL, NO EVENT TO REPORT
6 = PREVIOUSLY REPORTED, NOT YET RESTORED
* NOTE: Channel 1 will contain the user ID 1-9, A-F if Open/Close reporting is enabled.
The status channel might have one of the following conditions:
1 = DURESS (For Duress Plus Channels 9-15 Only)
2 = OPENING
3 = BYPASS (For Channels 1-8 Only)
4 = CLOSING
5 = SUPERVISORY/TROUBLE (For Channels 1-8 Only)
6 = SYSTEM STATUS:
• AC LOSS in Channel 1
• LOW BATTERY in Channel 2
• TIME SET in Channel 3
• LOG CLEAR in Channel 3
• LOG 50% FULL in Channel 3
• LOG 90% FULL in Channel 3
• LOG OVERFLOW in Channel 3
• POWER ON RESET in Channel 4
• WALK-TEST START, END in Channel 8
7 = NORMAL ALARM STATUS (Channels 1-8 Only)
9 = TEST REPORT
Explanation of Channels 9-15:
If there is a 1 in the status channel, and:
1 in the 1st location = Duress
1 in Channels 9-15 = Zone alarm on those channels
3 in Channels 9-15 = Restore on those channels
6 in Channels 9-15 = Previously reported alarm–not restored
A typical high speed report may look like this:
1234 5115 5555 7 (Acct #1234 with alarms on channels 2 and 3)
1234 5555 1555 1 (Acct #1234 with alarm on channel 12)
LIMITATIONS
1. When using ADEMCO High Speed, remember there are only 15 channels available, plus
a duress channel. If more than 15 zones are being used, they will have to share channels.
2. With ADEMCO High Speed reporting, channels 9-15 cannot report troubles or bypasses.
Use these channels for zones that will not report these conditions.
3. Only user numbers 1-15 can be uniquely reported with Open/Close reports in ADEMCO
High Speed.
25-4
Section 25 – System Communication
ADEMCO Contact ID Reporting takes the following format:
CCCC QEEE GG ZZZ
CCCC =
Customer (subscriber) ID
Q=
Event qualifier, where:
E = new event, and R = restore
EEE =
Event code (3 hexadecimal digits)
GG =
Partition number (system messages show “00”)
ZZZ =
Zone number for an alarm, or user number for Open/Close
reports. System status messages (AC Loss, Walk-Test, etc.)
contain zeroes.
TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES
Code
110
121
122
123
124
125
131
132
133
134
135
140
142
150
301
302
305
306
308
309
310
313
320
332
333
338
339
342
343
354
373
374
380
381
382
383
384
389
401
403
406
407
408
Definition
Fire Alarm
Duress
Silent Panic
Audible Panic
Duress Access Grant
Duress Egress Grant
Perimeter Burglary
Interior Burglary
24-Hour Burglary
Entry/Exit Burglary
Day/Night Burglary
ACS Zone Alarm
Polling Loop Short Alarm
24-Hour Auxiliary
AC Loss
Low System Battery
System Reset
Program Tamper
System Shutdown
Battery Test Fail
Ground Fault
System Engineer Reset
ACS Relay Supervision
Poll Loop Short-Trouble
Expansion Module Failure
ACS Module Low Battery
ACS Module Reset
ACS Module AC Loss
ACS Module Self-Test Fail
ACS RS232 Fail
Fire Loop Trouble
Exit Error by Zone
Trouble (global)
Loss of Supervision (RF)
Loss of RPM Supervision
RPM Sensor Tamper
RF Transmitter Low Battery
Detector Self-Test Failed
O/C by User
Power-Up Armed/Auto-Arm
Cancel by User
Remote Arm/Disarm (Download)
Quick Arm
Code
409
411
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
441
451
452
453
454
455
457
459
501
520
570
576
577
602
606
607
621
622
623
624
625
631
632
Definition
Keyswitch O/C
Callback Requested
Access Denied
Access Granted
Door Force Open
Egress Denied
Egress Granted
Door Prop Open
Access Point DSM Trouble
Access Point RTE Trouble
ACS Program Entry
ACS Program Exit
ACS Threat Change
Access Point Relay/Trigger Fail
Access Point RTE Shunt
Access Point DSM Shunt/Unshunt
Armed STAY
Early Open/Close
Late Open/Close
Fail to Open
Fail to Close
Auto-arm Fail
Exit Error by User
Recent Close
ACS Reader Disable
ACS Relay Disable
Bypass
ACS Zone Shunt
ACS Point Bypass
Communicator Test
Listen-In to Follow
Burglary Walk-Test
Event Log Reset
Event Log 50% Full
Event Log 90% Full
Event Log Overflow
Time/Date Reset
Exception Schedule Change
Access Schedule Change
25-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
25-6
S E C T I O N
2 6
Downloading Primer
(Remote Downloading is not a UL Listed feature)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Access Security
♦ Getting On-Line with a Control Panel
♦ Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct-Wire
Downloading
♦ On-Line Control Functions
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
Downloading allows the operator to remotely access, program, and control the security
system over normal telephone lines. Anything that can be done directly from the keypad can
be done remotely, using ADEMCO's COMPASS downloading software. To communicate with
the control panel, the following is required:
1. An IBM PC compatible 486 33MHz PC or better with 30 MB of available hard disk space
and at least 8MB of RAM (12MB is preferred). Windows 3.X, Windows 95, or Windows
NT.
2. One of the following modems:
• Hayes Smartmodem 1200 (external: level 1.2 or higher; internal: level 1.1 or higher)
• Hayes Optima 24 + Fax 96 external
• Hayes Optima 336
• BizComp Intellimodem 1200 w/volume
• BizComp Intellimodem 2400
Other brands are not compatible, even if claimed to be 100% compatible.
3. COMPASS DOWNLOADING software may be purchased from ADEMCO. This software
is available on 3-1/2" diskettes or CD ROM, and includes a complete User's Manual. It
may also be downloaded from the ADEMCO web page. The web address is
http://www.ademco.com.
Internal modems must have a 4-position DIP switch. Modems with a 6-position DIP switch will not
work.
Alternatively, you may use a 4100SM interface module to "direct-wire" the control panel to
your computer at the site.
26-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Getting On-Line with a Control Panel
At the protected premises, the Control panel must be connected to the existing telephone line
(refer to the System Communication section). No programming of the panel is required
before downloading to an initial installation.
To download, do the following:
Step
Action
1
Enter the [Installer Code] + [#] + [5]. The panel temporarily enables a ring
count of 5 and sets the Download Callback option to "1" (callback not required).
2
Call the panel using the downloader software set to "First Communication"
Mode.
The downloader will establish a session with no callback. The panel information
can then be downloaded.
3
The downloader will establish a session with no callback. The panel information
can then be downloaded.
a. The computer calls up the control panel. (The phone number for each
customer is entered into the customer's account file on the computer.)
b. The control panel "answers" at the pre-programmed ring count and executes
a handshake with the computer.
c.
The computer sends a request for callback to the control, unless callback is
not required.
d. The panel acknowledges the request and hangs up. During the next few
seconds, the control will process the request, making sure certain encrypted
information received from the computer matches its own memory.
e.
Upon a successful match, the control panel will seize the phone line and call
the computer back, unless callback is not required. (The phone number to
which the computer’s modem is connected must be programmed into the
control field ∗35.)
f.
The computer answers, usually by the second ring, and executes a handshake
with the panel.
g. The panel then sends other default information to the computer. If this
information matches the computer's information, a successful link is
established. This is known as being “On-line.”
•
•
Alarms and Trouble responses and reports are disabled during actual uploading or
downloading sessions. If you are on-line, but not actively uploading or downloading, all alarms
will report immediately. All other reports will be delayed until you complete the session.
The keypads remain active when on-line with a control, but are inactive during actual uploading
or downloading sessions.
On-Line Control Functions
The following functions can be performed while on-line with a control panel:
26-2
•
Arm the system in the AWAY Mode; disarm the system
•
Bypass a zone
•
Force the system to accept a new program download
•
Shut down communication (dialer) functions (non-payment of monitoring fees in an
owned system)
Section 26 - Downloading Primer
•
Shut down all security system functions (non-payment for a leased system)
•
Inhibit local keypad programming (prevents takeover of your accounts)
•
Leave a message for customer
•
Command the system to upload a copy of its resident program to the office
•
Read: arming status, AC power status, list of faulted zones, list of bypassed zones,
512 event log, list of zones currently in alarm, list of zones currently in trouble, and
ECP equipment list
•
Set the real-time clock
Access Security
Accessing the control from a remote location is protected against compromise by the use of 4
levels of protection:
1. Security code handshake: The subscriber's account number as well as an 8-digit ID
number (known only to the office) must be matched between the control and computer.
2. Hang-up and Call-back: The control panel will "hang up" and call the computer back at
the pre-programmed number only if the security codes match.
3. Data encryption: All data that is exchanged between the computer and control is
encrypted to reduce the possibility of anyone "tapping" the line and corrupting data.
4. Operator access levels: Operators may be assigned various levels of access to the
downloader, each having its own log-on code. The access levels allow the operators
read/write capabilities of the customers’ account information. For a detailed explanation
of the access levels, see the downloading software User Manual.
NOTES:
•
Each time the control panel is accessed successfully, a Callback Requested report is
sent to the central station, if Opening reports are programmed.
•
When downloading, the keypad displays "MODEM COMM."
•
After each download or a save, an automatic time stamp is done, indicating the date
and time of the last download (or save) and the operator ID number.
•
A complete hard copy of each individual account can be obtained by connecting a
printer to the computer. Refer to your computer Owner's Manual or contact your
dealer for printer recommendations.
Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct Wire Downloading
The VISTA-128B can be downloaded without using a modem or telephone line, but by using a
4100SM Serial Module and Compass Downloading Software. The direct-wire downloading
connection is to be temporary, and is not part of the permanent installation. Direct-wire
downloading is meant as a tool for the installer during the installation process.
The connections between the control and the 4100SM are different than those shown in the
4100SM Installation Instructions. See the diagram below for correct connections. In addition,
the green wire is referred to in step 2 of the “IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY” section of the 4100SM
Instructions, use the violet wire instead.
Connector J8 on the main PC board (see the Summary of Connections diagram on the inside
back cover of this manual), is intended to be interfaced to either a local serial printer (see
Event Log printer Connections in the Event Log Options section) or a computer. Make
connections to a computer as shown below. Note that the violet wire connection for a
computer differs from that used when connecting a serial printer.
26-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Remove the alpha numeric pager interface if it is installed while performing the direct-wire
download. It may be reconnected once the direct-wire download is completed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J8 CONNECTOR
BLACK
BLUE
GR
OU
ND
BROWN
GR
OU
ND
GREEN
OU
T6
RED
OU
T5
GR
OU
ND
YELLOW
GRAY
IN
3
ER
IN
2
INT
PR
GR DTR
OU
ND
VIOLET
NU
4142TR CABLE (SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM)
4100SM SERIAL MODULE
To TB6 Aux. Power (+)
(25mA current draw)
To TB7 Aux. Power (-)
8
+ PWR
7
- (GND)
6
RXD
5
not used
4
not used
3
TXD
2
not used
1
not used
RED
Figure 26-1. Direct Wire Downloading Connections
26-4
BLUE WHITE
S E C T I O N
2 7
Setting The Real-Time Clock
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Setting the Time and Date
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
This system provides a real-time clock, which must be set in order for the system's event log
to keep track of events by time and date. It must also be set in order to execute scheduling
programs (time-driven events).
Use a 6139 alpha keypad to set the real-time clock, or set the clock via the downloader software.
Only users with Installer or Master authority level can set the real-time clock.
Setting the Time and Date
To set the time and date, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Enter Installer or Master Code + # 63. Typical display shows:
TIME/DATE
12:01 AM
2
3
––
THU
01/01/90
The day of the week is automatically calculated based on the date entered. Time
and date entries are made by simply entering the appropriate hour, minute,
month, day and year.
•
Press [∗] to accept the entered value. The cursor then moves to the right.
•
Press [#] to move the cursor to the left of the display, to the previous position.
•
Enter the correct hour. Then press [∗] to move to the “minutes” field and
make the correct entry.
•
Press [∗] again, then press any key 0-9 to set AM/PM. Press any key again to
change AM to PM, or PM to AM.
•
Press [∗] to move cursor to the “month” field position and enter the correct
month using a 2-digit entry.
•
Press [∗] and enter the correct date.
•
Press [∗] and enter the correct year.
Exit Clock Mode by pressing [∗] after the cursor is in the year position.
27-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
27-2
S E C T I O N
2 8
User Access Codes
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Adding an RF Key to an Existing User
♦ User Codes & Levels of Authority
♦ Deleting a Master, Manager, or Operator Code
♦ Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code
♦ To Exit the User Edit Mode
♦ Changing a Master, Manager, or Operator Code
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
This system allows a total of 150 security access codes to be allocated, each identified by a
user ID number. Regardless of the number of partitions each code has access to, it
occupies only one user slot in the system. If a particular code is not used in all
partitions, that user ID number cannot be used again.
The Quick Arm feature can also be programmed (partition-specific program field *29), which
allows the [#] key to be pressed instead of entering the security code when arming the
system. The security code must always be entered to disarm the system.
A user code other than the installer code must be programmed for the Quick Arm feature to
function.
User Codes & Levels of Authority
Each user of the system can be assigned a level of authority, which tells the system what
system functions that user is authorized to do. A user can have different levels of authority
within different partitions. In general, users can perform most system functions, including
Test and Chime Modes, but certain authority levels restrict disarming, bypassing or the
assigning of other user codes. These restrictions are noted in the descriptions below.
Use the "View Capabilities" keypad function to view the partitions and authority levels for
which a particular user is authorized. These levels are described in the table below in order
from highest to lowest ranking.
Authority
Title
0
Installer
1
Master
2
Manager
3
Operator level A
4
Operator level B
5
Operator level C
6
Duress
28-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Level 0: Installer (User 1) Code
•
Programmed in field *00 (default = 4-1-4-0). Installer Open/Close reporting is selected in
field *39.
•
Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm, bypass, etc.), but cannot disarm if
armed by another code (or by Quick Arm).
•
Can add, delete, or change codes of all other authority levels, and can select Open/Close
reports for any user.
•
Is the only code that can be used to enter program mode. The Installer Code can be
prevented from re-entering the Program Mode by exiting using ∗98. The only way to
access Programming Mode if this done is by powering down the system, powering up
again, and then pressing both the [∗] and [#] keys at the same time within 30 seconds of
power up.)
•
Must program at least one Master Code during initial installation. Master Codes are
codes intended for use by the primary user(s) of the system.
Level 1: Master Codes
•
Can perform all normal system functions.
•
Can be used to assign up to 141 lower-level codes, which can be used by other users of the
system.
•
Cannot assign anybody a level of 0 or 1.
•
May change his own code.
•
Can add, delete, or change Manager or Operator Codes. Each user's code can be
individually eliminated or changed at any time.
•
Open/Close reporting of added users are is the same as that of the Master who is adding
the new user.
Level 2: Manager Codes
•
Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm, bypass, etc.) programmed by Master.
•
May add, delete or change other users of the system below this level (Manager cannot
assign anybody a level of 0, 1, or 2).
•
May change his own code.
•
Open/Close reporting of added users are is the same as that of the Manager who is
adding the new user.
Levels 3-5: Operator Codes
•
Can arm and disarm the system to the authority assigned, but cannot add or modify any
user code.
•
May operate a partition with one of the three Operator authority levels A through C in
the table below.
Level
•
28-2
Title
Functions Permitted
3
Operator A
Arm, Disarm, Bypass
4
Operator B
Arm, Disarm
5
Operator C
Arm, Disarm only if armed with same code
Operator C (sometimes known as the Babysitter Code) cannot disarm the system unless
the system was armed with that code. This code is usually assigned to persons who may
have the need to arm and disarm the system at specific times only (e.g., a babysitter
needs to control the system only when babysitting).
Section 28 - User Access Codes
Level 6: Duress Codes
•
Sends a silent alarm to a central monitoring station if the user is being forced to disarm
(or arm) the system under threat (only useful if the system is connected to a central
station).
•
When the system's Auxiliary Voltage Triggers are connected to another communication's
media (Derived Channel/Long Range Radio), note that duress is signaled on the same
trigger that signals silent panic (whereas duress has its own unique report when digitally
communicated).
•
Assigned on a partition-by-partition basis, and can be any code or codes desired.
•
Will disarm (or arm) the system, but will also send a silent alarm to the central station (if
service is connected). There will be no indication at the keypad that an alarm was sent.
Duress Reporting Note: A non-zero report code for zone 992 (duress) must be programmed, and
partition-specific field *85 duress location enabled, to enable Duress reporting.
•
The Duress report-triggering logic activates on the 5th key depression (such as OFF), not
the 4th key depression (last digit of code). Duress reports will not be triggered if the 5th
key is a [*], such as when performing a GOTO or viewing the capabilities of a user.
General Rules on Authority Levels and Changes
The following rules apply to users when making modifications within the system based on the user
code authority levels:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Master Codes and all lower-level codes can be used interchangeably when performing
system functions within a partition (a system armed with a user's temporary code can be
disarmed with the Master Code or another user's temporary code), except the Operator Level
C Code described above.
A user may not delete or change the user code of the SAME or HIGHER authority than that
which he is assigned.
A user (levels 0, 1 & 2 only) may only ADD users to a LOWER authority level.
A user may assign other users access to only those partitions to which he himself has access.
A user code can only be DELETED or CHANGED from within the partition it was created in.
User numbers must be entered in 3 digits. Single-digit user numbers must, therefore, always
be preceded by a "00" (e.g., 003, 004, 005, etc.). Make sure the end user understands this
requirement. Temporary codes are entered as 4-digit numbers.
Open/Close Reporting Note: When adding a user, the system will only prompt for Open/Close
reporting capability if the user is being added by the Installer. When a Master or Manager adds a new
user, the new user's Open/Close reporting enable will be the same as that of the Master or Manager
who is adding the user. If Open/Close reports are required to be selectable by the Master or Manager,
the Installer should assign two Master or Manager user codes: one with Open/Close reporting enabled,
and one without.
Note that Open/Close reporting of Quick Arm is enabled if User 002 is enabled for Open/Close
reporting, and that Quick Arm reports as User 000. In order for Quick Arm reports to be sent for all
partitions, User #002 must have authority and Open/Close must be enabled for all partitions. If a code
with access to all partitions is not desired, it is suggested that user #002 be assigned authority level 5
in all partitions, and that the code be kept secret. Authority level 5 cannot disarm the system unless
armed by that user.
ADEMCO Contact ID format is capable of reporting Users 001-150 uniquely. If any other report
format is used, only user numbers 001 - 015 can uniquely report to the central station. Users 016
- 150 will report as User 015.
28-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Multiple Partition Access Examples
Each user is programmed for a primary (home) partition. A user can also be given access to
operate one or more additional partitions. Within each partition, each user may be
programmed to have different levels of authority. For example, User #3, the VP of
Engineering, could be assigned to work within the Engineering Department (Partition 1) of
ABC Manufacturing. Since he needs the full capabilities in his area, he is assigned as a
MASTER with Level 1 authority. This means he may arm, disarm, bypass, add or modify
users in Partition 1.
He must also be able to gain access to the manufacturing area (Partition 2) on an emergency
basis. You can set this up easily with the partitioned system by requesting that he also be
assigned to Partition 2, with a level of authority set lower, such as Level 4 (OPERATOR
Level B), which allows him to arm and disarm, but nothing else. The control will
automatically assign him the same user number within Partition 2, and does not require
reprogramming of his already-existing 4-digit security code.
EXAMPLE OF MULTIPLE PARTITION ACCESS
Part 1
Part 2
User 3
User 3
Level 1
Level 4
Master
Oper B
Part 3
Part 4
Part 5
Part 6
Part 7
Part 8
In the above example, User 3 has MASTER authority in Partition 1 and OPERATOR B
authority in Partition 2. His user number is the same for both partitions. Note that if a user
number is already being used in a partition, the system will automatically assign a new user
an unused number. Also notice that no access is allowed for this user into Partitions 3 - 8.
Attempts to access these partitions would be denied automatically.
Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code
During user code entry, normal key depressions at other keypads in a partition will be ignored.
However, panic key depression will cause an alarm and terminate user entry.
Enter [Installer Code]†+ 8 + [new user # (002-150)] + [new user's code]
†Or Master or Manager Code, but must be code with higher level of authority than the code
being changed (i.e., Master Code can add a Manager or Operator-level Code, but cannot add
another Master Code; a Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code, but cannot add a
Master or another Manager Code).
Keypad will prompt for the authority level for this user.
User Number = 003
Enter the level number as follows:
Enter Auth. Level
1 = Master (arm, disarm, bypass, add or modify lower-level users)
2 = Manager (arm, disarm, bypass, add or modify lower level users)
3 = Operator Level A (arm, disarm, bypass)
4 = Operator Level B (arm, disarm)
5 = Operator Level C (arm, disarm only if system armed with this
code)
6 = Duress (arm, disarm, trigger silent panic alarm)
Keypad will then prompt for Open/Close reporting option for this
user.
28-4
Section 28 - User Access Codes
Open/Close Rep.?
0 = NO , 1 = YES
Access Group?
Enter 0-8
RF Button ?
0=NO , 1=YES
Enter Button ZN #
(001-087)
Multi-Access ?
0 = NO , 1 = YES
Global Arm ?
0 = NO , 1 = YES
Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or not
arming/disarming by this user will trigger Opening and Closing
reports. This prompt appears only if the Installer Code is used to
add a user.
If access schedules have been programmed, this prompt appears.
Enter the user's access group number (1-8) if this user should have
limited access to the system. Enter 0 if no access group should be
assigned.
If a 5800 Series button transmitter has been enabled for
arming/disarming functions, and is not assigned to a user, this
prompt will appear. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).
If “yes” was given as the answer to the RF button question, the zone
number for the button will be requested. Enter any one of the zone
numbers assigned to the button transmitter as AWAY, STAY or
DISARM. The system will then assign all buttons of the transmitter
to this user number.
Press 0 (NO) if the user is to have access to this partition only.
Press 1 (YES) if the user is to have access to more than one
partition. If NO, the program exits this mode. If YES, the keypad
prompts for the Global Arm option for this user.
Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will be
allowed to arm more than one partition via Global Arm prompts
(described in the Keypad Functions section).
The keypad now prompts for the user’s access to the next partition.
Part. 2 – SHOP ?
0 = NO , 1 = YES
Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will have
access to the displayed partition number. If NO, the keypad displays
this prompt for the next partition number in sequence.
If YES, the keypad prompts for the following:
•
User’s authority level in the displayed partition (see Authority
Level prompt above).
•
Open/Close option for this user in the displayed partition (see
Open/Close prompt above).
•
Global Arm option for this user in the displayed partition.
When all partitions have been displayed, the keypad will scroll
through all partitions to which access has been assigned, and will
display the user number, authority level, open/close and global arm
options that were programmed for each partition to which the user
was granted access. For example:
Part. 1 A0* WHSE
User 003 Auth=3G.
Note that the “G” following the authority level indicates that the
global arm feature is enabled for this user in the displayed partition,
and that the period at the end of the second line indicates
Open/Close reporting is enabled for this user in the displayed
partition. The "✴" indicates the partition from which the user may
be changed or deleted.
28-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Changing a Master, Manager, or Operator Code
Enter [Installer code]* + 8 + [User number (002-150)] + [new user's code]
* Or Master or Manager code, but must be code with higher level of authority than the code
being changed (i. e., Master Code can change a Manager or Operator-level Code, but cannot
change another Master Code; a Manager Code can change an Operator-level Code, but
cannot change a Master or another Manager Code).
User Number = 003
NEW USER?
The system detects that the user number is already assigned,
and will prompt if this is a new user.
Press 0 (NO).
The system will then confirm that the change is allowed based
on authorization level.
Adding an RF Key to an Existing User
To add an RF key to an existing user, or to change a user's global arm option, first delete that
user's code, then re-add the user code as described in the "To ADD a Master, Manager, or
Operator Code" paragraph.
Deleting a Master, Manager, or Operator Code
Enter [your code]* + 8 + [User number (002-150)] + [your code again]
* Installer, Master or Manager Code, but must be code with higher level of authority than
the code being deleted (i.e. Master Code can delete a Manager or Operator-level Code, but
cannot delete another Master Code; a Manager Code can delete an Operator-level Code, but
cannot delete a Master or another Manager Code).
OK TO DELETE 003?
0=NO
1=YES
The system will prompt to confirm that you want to delete this
user. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).
If “yes”, that user's code will be removed from all partitions to
which it was assigned, and all authorization levels and other
information about that user will be deleted. Note that a user
can only be deleted by a user with a higher authority level. A
user cannot delete himself.
A user code can only be deleted from the partition through which it was entered. If trying to delete
from another partition, the message "User [XXX] Not Deleted" will be displayed.
To EXIT the User Edit Mode
Press either [✴] or [#], or don't press any key for 10 seconds.
28-6
S E C T I O N
2 9
Keypad Functions
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ General Information
♦ Viewing Downloaded Messages
♦ Arming Commands
♦ Using the Built-in User's Guide
♦ Access Control
♦ Panic Keys
♦ Delaying Closing Time
♦ Speed Key [D] (Macros)
♦ Partition "Go To" Command
♦ Manual Relay Activation Mode (#70 Mode)
♦ Viewing Capabilities of a User
♦ Instant Activation Mode (#77 Mode)
♦ Viewing Zone Descriptors
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
The keypad allows the user to arm and disarm the system, and perform other system
functions, such as bypassing zones, viewing messages from the central station, and
displaying zone descriptors. The system conditions are shown in the display window.
When an alarm occurs, keypad sounding and external sounding will occur, and the zone(s) in
alarm will be displayed on the keypad. Disarming the system (enter the security code and
press the OFF key) will silence both keypad and external sounders. After the system is
disarmed, the system displays any zones that were in an alarm condition during the armed
period. To clear this display, simply repeat the disarm sequence.
The keypads also feature chime annunciation, and 3 panic keys (for silent, audible, fire or
personal emergency alarms) which can notify the central station of an alarm condition, if
that service is connected.
Arming Commands
The following is a brief list of arming commands. For detailed information concerning these
functions, refer to the User's Manual.
Display Faulted
Zones
To arm the system must be in the READY condition (all zones
must be intact). If the "NOT READY" message appears, press the
READY * key to display faulted zones.
Arming Away
Enter code + 2 (AWAY)
Arming Stay
Enter code + 3 (STAY) (all zones designated as zone types 4 and 10
will be automatically bypassed).
Arming Instant
Enter code + 7 (INSTANT) (same as STAY without entry delay).
Arming Maximum
Enter code + 4 (MAXIMUM) (same as AWAY without entry delay).
Disarming
Enter code + 1 (OFF).
Quick Arming
Note that if QUICK ARM is enabled (field *29), the # key can be
pressed instead of entering the security code, for any of the arming
procedures (Away, Stay, Instant, Maximum, etc.).
29-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
A user code other than the Installer Code must be programmed into the system in order for the
Quick Arm feature to work.
SUMMARY OF ARMING MODES
Mode
Features for Each Arming Mode
Exit Delay
Entry Delay
Perimeter Armed
Interior Armed
AWAY
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
STAY
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
INSTANT
Yes
No
Yes
No
MAXIMUM
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Global Arming
If enabled for the user, the keypad will display the following:
ARM ALL
?
0 = NO , 1 = YES
If NO, the keypad prompts for arming each partition individually.
If YES, the system attempts to arm all partitions allowed by this
user. If there are any faults (open doors, windows, etc.) the keypad
will display them. See notes below. These faults must be corrected
or the zone bypassed before arming will occur. When faults are
corrected, repeat the arming procedure.
Notes:
•
When using the Global Arm feature, if there are faults in any of the selected partitions,
the system will enter a Summary Mode in which the faulted zones of all of the selected
partitions will be displayed. These faults must be corrected or bypassed (code + BYPASS
+ [#] will attempt to bypass the faults in all of the selected partitions). This Summary
Mode will end in approximately 120 seconds if no keys are pressed.
•
If you are disarming the system using a Global Disarm, any of the selected partitions has
a condition which would cause the keypad to beep (such as alarm memory or a trouble
condition) the system enters a Summary Mode whereby the alarm memory or trouble
conditions of all of the selected partitions is displayed. This mode continues until either
approximately 120 seconds elapses or a second disarm occurs which clears the beeping.
Bypassing and Chime Mode Commands
29-2
Bypassing Zones
Enter code + 6 (BYPASS) + 3-digit zone number. To
automatically bypass all faulted zones, use "Quick Bypass"
method: Enter code + BYPASS + #.
Chime Mode
Enter code + 9 (CHIME). To turn Chime Mode off, enter code +
CHIME again.
Section 29 - Keypad Functions
Access Control
The system has the capability to utilize access control by one of 4 methods.
1. One relay may be used for access control in each partition. The relay is programmed in
data field 1*76. To activate this relay, the user enters his User Code + [0]. The relay will
pulse for 2 seconds.
2. For a more powerful method of access control, program input devices (keypads, RF
buttons, hardwired) and access points (using VistaKey or PassPoint ACS) (see the Access
Control section). Up to 32 access point devices (relays) among 8 partitions can be
controlled. For example, if a keypad is programmed as an access input device, then
entering [User Code] + [#73] or [User Code] + [#74] will activate the appropriate
access point relays (see also Zone Programming and Output Programming in the #93
Menu Mode section of the Programming Guide).
3. If a Vista Gateway Module along with the ADEMCO PassPoint Access Control System or
a VistaKey module is installed, then these same inputs will automatically control the
appropriate access points. Entering [User Code] + [#75] will control the state (protect,
bypass, grant) of a door. (see the Access Control section).
4. If a VistaKey module is installed, entering [User Code] + [#77] enables the user to
instantly perform an access control function. See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup
Guide for a detailed explanation of these functions.
Delaying Closing Time
If open/close schedules are used, end users can manually delay closing time by extending the
closing window by 1 or 2 hours. This is useful if a user must stay on the premises later than
usual. The user must have an authority level of Manager or higher.
To extend the closing window, enter [User code] + [#] +82.
Closing Delay ?
Hit 0-2 Hours
Enter the number hours, 1 or 2, by which the end of the closing
window should be extended. Note that the delay is from the
scheduled closing time, not from the current time.
Press [∗] to accept entry and exit this mode. Press [#] to exit this
mode without changes.
The system will send an Access Schedule Change report to the
central station when the closing window is extended (if
programmed).
An extension of the closing window cannot be reduced once it is set. However, a 1-hour delay can
be increased to 2 hours. This is to prevent the user from deleting the delay after the normal window
expires, thereby missing the end of the window.
Partition "GOTO" Commands
Each keypad is assigned a default partition for display purposes, and will show only that
partition's information. To see information for another partition, or perform system functions
in another partition, use the GOTO command ([User Code] + [*] +partition number 0-8).
The keypad will remain in the new partition until directed to go to another partition, or until
120 seconds has elapsed with no keypad activity. To return to your home partition, enter [∗]
+ Partition number 0.
29-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
You must program data field 2*18 to enable the GOTO function. This is a partition-specific field
that must be set for each partition the user wants to access from another partition's keypad
Viewing Capabilities of a User
The keypad will display the partitions that a user is authorized for, the user number, and the
authority level for all partitions authorized. Enter [User Code] + [∗] + [∗]. The user's
capabilities in each authorized partition will typically be displayed as follows:
Part. 1 A0* WHSE
User 01 Auth.=1G.
The user's Open/Close report capability is shown by the dot
following the authority level. If Open/Close is not enabled for a
user, the dot will not appear.
Viewing Zone Descriptors
The Alpha Keypads can display all programmed descriptors, which is useful to the installer
when checking entries, and can be helpful to the user when there is a need to identify zones.
To display descriptors, the system must be disarmed and ready to arm. Press and
hold the READY key until the built-in instructions for that key appear, then release the key.
The zone descriptors will appear one at a time, for about 2-3 seconds each. For faster
viewing, press the READY key to display the next descriptor in numerical order, and so on.
When all descriptors have been displayed, the control will exit Display Mode. Enter the
Security Code and press the OFF key to exit Display Mode before all descriptors have been
displayed.
Viewing Downloaded Messages
Users may occasionally receive a message from their installation company displayed on an
alpha keypad. When this occurs, the keypad will display "Message. Press 0 for 5 secs."
Instruct the user to press and hold the 0 key to display the central station's message. Note
that the system must be in the READY state to view these messages.
Using the Built-in User’s Manual
An abbreviated User's Manual is stored in the system's memory, and can be particularly
useful to the end user if the printed User's Manual is not conveniently accessible when the
user needs to perform a seldom-used and unfamiliar system procedure. The Built-in User's
Guide is displayed by simply pressing any of the function keys (e.g., OFF, AWAY, STAY,
MAXIMUM, BYPASS, INSTANT, CODE, TEST, READY, #, and CHIME) for approximately
5 seconds and then releasing it. Abbreviated instructions relative to the key that has been
pressed will then be displayed (2 lines of text are displayed at a time). This function operates
in either the armed or the disarmed state.
Panic Keys
There are three panic key pairs (shown below) that, if programmed, can be used to manually
initiate alarms and send a report to the central station. Each key pair can be individually
programmed for 24 Hour Silent, Audible or Auxiliary (Emergency) responses, as well as Fire.
The panic function is activated when the appropriate key pair is pressed at the same time.
The panic functions are identified by the system as follows:
PANIC
29-4
Zone Number
*+1
995
#+3
996
*+#
999
For alpha keypads, these panic keys can
also be programmed with an alpha
descriptor.
Section 29 - Keypad Functions
For the panic functions to be of practical value, the system must be connected to a central station.
Speed Key [D] (Macros)
The system supports up to 32 Speed Key (macro) commands. A Speed Key command is a
series of keystrokes stored in the system memory and activated when a programmed lettered
key is pressed. Each Speed Key command can include 32 keystrokes. Typical Speed Key
functions include:
• Arming sequences that involve first bypassing certain zones before arming.
• Seldom-used but repeatable sequences.
• Relay activation sequences.
Lettered keys A-B-C can be assigned a specific Speed Key function by entering a Speed Key
number (1-32) in field 1*26.
Programming Speed Key Sequence
To program a macro, enter your [User Code] + [#] + [D]. The following appears:
ENTER SPEED KEY #
01-32
00=QUIT
Enter the 2-digit Speed Key number (01-32) being defined and press [*]. Enter up to 32
keystrokes. A Speed Key sequence can include different commands. Press the "D" key to
separate different commands.
For example, you may want to perform the following sequence:
Desired function
Keystrokes
GOTO partition 2
Enter *2
Bypass Zones 10 & 11
Press bypass [6], then the zone numbers 010 & 011
Arm in Maximum Mode
Press maximum [4] key
Return to Partition 1
Enter *1
To program that Speed Key sequence, type the following :
*2 D 6010011 D 4 D *1 D D
Note that the "D" key is pressed after each command. Press "D" twice to complete the entry
and exit.
When defining Speed Key sequences, do not use the [#] key to represent Quick Arming. The
system uses the code entered in response to the prompt to initiate commands in a Speed Key
sequence, so the quick arm key is unnecessary. The system interprets the use of the [#] key in a
Speed Key sequence as its designated function only (e.g. #2 is not interpreted as "Arm-AWAY,"
but rather as "Enter House ID Sniffer Mode").
Executing Speed Key Sequence
To execute a Speed Key sequence, do the following:
If a lettered key, A-B-C, has been assigned as a Speed Key, press the appropriate key. If a
user code is required for any part of the Speed Key sequence, the following prompt appears.
Otherwise, the Speed Key sequence automatically begins.
29-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
ENTER USER CODE
✴✴✴✴
Enter your user code. The programmed Speed Key sequence will begin automatically.
To activate a Speed Key not assigned to the A-B-C keys, press and hold down the [D] key for
2 seconds until the following prompt appears:
ENTER SPEED KEY #
01-32
00=QUIT
Enter the desired Speed Key number.
If a user code is required for any part of the Speed Key sequence, the following prompt
appears. Otherwise, the Speed Key sequence automatically begins.
ENTER USER CODE
✴✴✴✴
Enter your user code. The programmed Speed Key sequence will begin automatically.
The system will apply the user code’s Global Arming capabilities if the macro executes any arming
or disarming commands.
Manual Relay Activation Mode (#70 Mode)
The system allows users to manually activate relays by keypad command using either the
keypad or a telephone keypad (if VIP Module is used). The user will be prompted (either by
keypad alpha display or telephone voice module).
To activate relays from a keypad, enter 4-digit [Security Code] + [#] +70.
To activate relays using a telephone and VIP Module, first dial the 2-digit phone access code.
When the system acknowledges the access, enter 4-digit [Security Code] + [#] + 70. The
following prompts/voice responses will begin.
ENTER DEVICE NO.
Voice: "ENTER DEVICE CODE NOW"
00=QUIT
Enter the 2-digit number of the relay to be activated.
01
nn DEVICE IS OFF
HIT 0=OFF , 1=ON
Voice: “’VOICE DESCRIPTOR’ DEVICE ‘NN’ ON/OFF. FOR
‘VOICE DESCRIPTOR’ ON, ENTER 1; FOR ‘VOICE
DESCRIPTOR’ OFF ENTER 0"
Press 0 or 1 to turn the device off or on respectively.
‘NN’ represents the 2-digit relay number and ‘VOICE
DESCRIPTOR’ is the relay voice descriptor programmed by the
installer (see Relay Voice Descriptors in the #93 Menu Mode).
29-6
Section 29 - Keypad Functions
nn DEVICE IS OFF
HIT THE "*" KEY
Voice: "’VOICE DESCRIPTOR’ DEVICE ‘NN’ ON/OFF. TO EXIT,
ENTER 00 NOW"
From a keypad, press [∗] to continue. The ENTER DEVICE NO.
prompt will appear.
From a telephone keypad, enter 00 to exit, or enter the next relay
number to be programmed. The current on/off state of that relay
will be annunciated as described above. Alternatively, if 6 seconds
elapses with no key depression, the voice module will annunciate
the "ENTER DEVICE CODE NOW" message.
A relay may be designated as restricted to prevent inadvertent activation/deactivation by
users. Only the Installer Code can override this restriction in Output Programming in the
#93 Menu Mode Programming
Instant Activation Mode (#77 Mode)
The #77 Instant Activation Mode is used to activate outputs, bypass zones, etc. immediately
upon exiting the #77 Mode. The actions that may be activated by the operator are relay
commands, arm/disarm commands, zone bypassing commands, and open/close access
conditions.
1. Enter [User Code] + [#77].
2. Enter the code for the desired action and action specifier. The action codes are the
events that are to take place when either the system exits the #77 Mode or the scheduled
time is reached, depending on the action selected. Each action also requires an action
specifier, which defines what the action will affect (relay, relay group, partition, zone list,
user group). The action specifier varies, depending on the type of action selected.
Refer to Time Driven Events in the Scheduling Options section for a listing of the “Action
Codes” (desired actions) and “Action Specifiers.” Note that these codes are independent of
the actions programmed during the Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
NOTES:
•
Only the Installer and Master levels user codes may perform the Instant Activation
Mode.
•
When performing an arm or disarm, the user must be assigned to the partition being
activated.
29-7
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
29-8
S E C T I O N
3 0
Testing The System
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ Battery Test
♦ Testing Wireless Zones
♦ Dialer Test
♦ Trouble Conditions
♦ Burglary Walk Test
♦ Turning the System Over to the User
♦ Armed Burglary System Test
♦ To The Installer
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Battery Test
When AC power is present, the VISTA-128B runs a brief battery test every 60 seconds to
determine if the battery connected, and runs an extended battery test every 4 hours to check
the battery’s condition. If the VISTA-128B finds the battery voltage is low (less than
approximately 11.5V) during one of these tests, it displays “SYSTEM LOBAT” on the keypad
and a rapid Keypad beeping sound. It also sends a Low Battery report to the central station
(if programmed). Clear the keypad by entering any security code + OFF. A Restore report is
sent to the central station after a subsequent test indicates the problem has been corrected.
Dialer Test
The VISTA-128B may be programmed to automatically transmit test reports to a central
station at intervals ranging from once per hour to once per 999 hours (field *27). UL requires
that a test report be transmitted at least once every 24 hours. The VISTA-128B can be
programmed to send the first report at any time of the day, or on any day of the week after
power-up (field *83).
Burglary Walk-Test (Code + TEST [5])
This test causes the system to sound keypad beeps in response to faults on zones for the
purpose of allowing proper zone operation to be checked without triggering alarms. This test
can only be activated by the installer, a master user or manager user by entering the
corresponding security code and pressing TEST while the burglary portion of the system is
disarmed. UL requires that this test be conducted on a weekly basis.
When this test is first activated, the system will sound burglary bells (or any bell having a
non-zero response type in each bell's supervisory zone) for 3 seconds. The system will send a
Start of Walk-Test message to the central station. The keypads will display “Burg Walk Test
in Progress” and will sound a single beep every 15 seconds while the test remains active.
Open and close each protected door and window in turn. Each action should produce 3 beeps
from the keypad. Walk in front of any motion detectors. Listen for three beeps when the
detector senses movement. The keypad will display the zone number and alpha descriptor
while a door or window remains open or while a detector remains activated. The system
automatically issues a Zone 8 Glassbreak Detector Power Reset about 10 seconds after it
finds a fault on this zone, to allow faulted detectors to be reset.
To end this test, enter any security code and press OFF. An End of Walk-Test message will
be sent to the central station.
30-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Armed Burglary System Test
•
Alarm messages will be sent to the central station during the following tests. Notify the central
station that a test will be in progress.
A display of "COMM. FAILURE" indicates a failure to communicate (no kissoff by the receiver
at the central station after the maximum number of transmission attempts is tried). If this
occurs, verify that the phone line is connected, the correct report format is programmed, etc.
•
To perform an armed burglary test, do the following:
Step
Action
1
Arm the system and fault one or more zones. Silence alarm sounder(s) each time
by entering the code and pressing OFF. Check that entry/exit delay zones provide
the assigned delay times.
2
Check the keypad-initiated alarms, if programmed, by pressing the panic keys
(* and #, 1 and *, and/or 3 and #). If the system has been programmed for audible
emergency, the keypad will emit a loud, steady alarm sound. The word ALARM
and a descriptor "999" will be displayed for * and #. If 1 and * are pressed, a
"995" will be displayed; if 3 and # are pressed, a "996" will be displayed. Silence
the alarm by entering the security code and pressing OFF. If the system has been
programmed for silent panic, there will be no audible alarms or displays. A
report will be sent to the central station, however.
3
Notify the central station that all tests are finished, and verify results with them.
Testing Wireless Zones
Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode
Use the Transmitter Sniffer Mode to test that transmitters have all been properly
programmed.
To enter the Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Enter [Installer Code] + [#] [3]. The keypad will display all zone numbers of
wireless units programmed into the system.
2
Fault each wireless zone, causing each device to transmit. As the system
receives a signal from each of the transmitters, the zone number of that
transmitter will disappear from the display.
3
To exit, enter the [Installer Code] + [1] OFF.
A transmitter not "enrolled" will not turn off its zone number.
Go/No Go Test Mode
Before mounting transmitters permanently, conduct Go/No Go Tests to verify adequate
signal strength and reorient or relocate transmitters if necessary.
Since the wireless receiver gain is reduced, checking in this mode assists in determining good
mounting locations for the transmitters, and verifies that the RF transmission has sufficient
signal amplitude margin for the installed system.
30-2
Section 30 – Testing The System
All partitions containing wireless transmitters must be placed in the test mode for sensitivity
reduction of the RF receiver (50% sensitivity). Otherwise, the RF receiver remains at full strength.
•
•
For multi-partition systems, make sure all partitions are disarmed before entering this mode.
Do not conduct this test with your hand wrapped around the transmitter, as this will cause
inaccurate results.
To enter the Go/NoGo Test, perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Enter [Installer Code] + [5] TEST.
2
Once transmitters are placed in their desired locations and the approximate
length of wire to be run to sensors is connected to the transmitter's screw
terminals, fault each transmitter.
•
If a single receiver is used, the keypad will beep three times to indicate signal
reception. If two receivers are used, the keypad will beep once if the first
receiver received the signal, twice if the second receiver received the signal,
and three times if both receivers heard the signal (which is desirable for
redundant configurations).
•
If the keypad does not beep, reorient or move the transmitter to another
location. Usually a few inches in either direction is all that is required.
3
Mount the transmitter according to the instructions provided with the
transmitter.
4
Exit the mode by entering [Installer Code] + [1] OFF.
Trouble Conditions
Supervisory Messages
•
A display of “SUPV” accompanied by a zone number (001-128) and an alpha descriptor (if
programmed) indicates that a fire supervisory condition exists on that zone. This means
that the operation of the fire alarm system may be compromised.
Check or Trouble Messages
•
A display of "CHECK" or "TRBL" (as per field 1*07) accompanied by a zone number (001128) and an alpha descriptor indicates that a problem exists with that zone. Zone trouble
may be caused by one of the following conditions:
A hardwired fire zone is open (broken wire)
A Day/Night zone (zone type 5) is faulted
A polling loop zone is not seen by the control panel
A polling loop zone has been tampered (cover removed on a 4190)
A wireless zone has not checked in during the time programmed in field 1*31
A 5800 Series transmitter has been tampered (cover removed)
•
"CHECK" accompanied by a numeric display of "6XX," where XX = 01-32, indicates a
trouble on a 4204CF Supervised Bell Output (corresponding relay number 01-32).
30-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
•
"CHECK" accompanied by a numeric display of "8XX," where XX = 00-31, indicates a
trouble on a peripheral device (connected to the panel's keypad terminals) of the
corresponding device address (00-31).
•
"CHECK" accompanied by a numeric display of "9XX," where XX = 00-99, indicates that a
system trouble exists (dialers, bell outputs, ground fault, etc.). See the Zone Index/Zone
Type Defaults section.
If the problem has been corrected, key an OFF sequence (Security Code plus OFF) twice to clear
the display.
Other System Messages
•
"COMM. FAILURE" at the keypad indicates that a failure occurred in the telephone
communication portion of your system.
•
"LO BAT" and a zone descriptor, accompanied by a once-per-minute beep at the keypad,
indicates that a low battery condition exists in the wireless transmitter displayed.
Pressing any key will silence the audible warning sound.
•
"SYSTEM LO BAT" at the keypad indicates that a low battery condition exists with the
system's backup battery.
•
"RCVR SET UP ERROR" at the keypad indicates that the system has more wireless
zones programmed than the wireless receiver can support. If this is not corrected, none of
the zones in the system will be protected. If additional wireless zones are desired, use an
appropriate receiver.
•
"MODEM COMM" at the keypad indicates that the control is on-line with a remote
computer.
System Off-Normal Report
If programmed, a unique Off-Normal report will be generated instead of the periodic test
report if any of the following conditions are present at the time of the report:
•
Fire trouble on any zone (zone response types 9)
•
Unrestored fire alarm on any zone
•
Fault on LORRA "XMIT OK" signal (if enabled)
•
LORRA trigger bypassed
•
AC failure
•
Low system battery
•
Keypad supervision fault
This report will be sent as follows:
Contact ID: Code 608
High Speed: Channel 3 of system report used (channel 9=6)
Low Speed: Digits programmed in System Group #4 report codes (Report Code Programming
in the #93 Menu Mode).
Power Failure
If the POWER indicator is off, and the message "AC LOSS" is displayed, the keypad is
operating on battery power only. Check to see that the circuit breaker for the branch circuit
that your system's transformer is wired to has not been accidentally turned off. Instruct the
user to call a service representative immediately if AC power cannot be restored.
30-4
Section 30 – Testing The System
Turning the System Over to the User
•
Fully explain the operation of the system to the user by going over each of its functions as
well as the User's Manual supplied.
•
In particular, explain the operation of each zone (entry/exit, perimeter, interior, fire,
etc.). Be sure the user understands how to operate any emergency feature(s) programmed
into the system.
To the Installer
Regular maintenance and inspection (at least annually) by the installer and frequent testing
by the user are vital to continuous satisfactory operation of any alarm system.
The installer should assume the responsibility of developing and offering a regular
maintenance program to the user as well as acquainting the user with the proper operation
and limitations of the alarm system and its component parts. Recommendations must be
included for a specific program of frequent testing (at least weekly) to ensure the system's
proper operation at all times.
Contacting Technical Support
PLEASE, before you call Technical Support, be sure you:
•
READ THE INSTRUCTIONS!
•
Check all wiring connections.
•
Determine that the power supply and/or backup battery are supplying proper voltages.
•
Verify your programming information where applicable.
•
Be sure all keypads and devices are addressed properly.
•
Note the proper model number of this product, and the version level (if known) along
with any documentation that came with the product.
•
Note your ADEMCO customer number and/or company name.
Having this information handy will make it easier for us to serve you quickly and effectively.
You may contact Technical Support via Toll-Free Fax. Please include your return fax
number. You will receive a reply within 24 hours. You may also contact Technical Support
via modem to ATLIS-BBS, Tech Support's Electronic Bulletin Board System. Replies are
posted within 24 hours.
Technical Support: ............................................................................................ 1-800-645-7492 (8 a.m.-8 p.m. E.S.T.)
Technical Support Fax Number: ........................................................................ 1-800-447-5086
ATLIS-BB Electronic Bulletin Board System: .................................................... 1-516-496-3980
(1200 - 9600 Baud, 8 Data Bits, 1 Start/Stop Bit, No Parity)
ATLIS-FAX FAXBACK Automated Fax Retrieval System:.................................. 1-800-573-0153 or
............................................................................................................................. 1-516-921-6704 / ext. 1667
World Wide Web Address: .................................................................................. HTTP:// WWW.ADEMCO.COM
30-5
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
30-6
A P P E N D I X
A
Regulatory Agency Statements
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
UL Installation Requirements
The following requirements apply to both UL residential and UL commercial burglary
installations:
•
All partitions must be owned and managed by the same person(s).
•
All partitions must be part of one building at one street address.
•
The audible alarm device(s) must be placed where it/they can be heard by all partitions.
•
The control cabinet must be protected from unauthorized access. This can be done by
installing a tamper switch on the cabinet door (not supplied with VISTA-128B) or by
installing a UL Listed passive infrared detector positioned to detect cabinet access. Wire
the selected device to any EOLR-supervised zone (Zone 1-8). Program this zone for day
trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24-hour audible alarm (type 07) response. The 24-hour
alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems.
•
Remote downloading and auto-disarming are not UL Listed features.
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault
•
Use the VISTA-128B.
•
All zones must be configured for EOLR supervision (*41=0). Wireless sensors may not be
used. If 4190WH RPMs are used, set field *24 to "0" to enable tamper detection.
•
Attach a door tamper switch (supplied) to the VISTA-128B cabinet backbox. For safe and
vault installations, a shock sensor (not supplied) must also be attached to the backbox.
(Also see Mounting the Cabinet in the Installing the Control section)
•
Wire an ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Bell/Box to the bell output. Bell wires must be run in
conduit. Program the bell output for 16 or longer timeout and for confirmation of arming
ding. (Also see the External Sounders section)
•
Wire the VISTA-128B tamper switch and AB12 Bell/Box tamper switches to any EOLR
supervised zone (zones 1-8). Program this zone for day trouble/night alarm (type 05) or
24-hour audible alarm (type 07) response. The 24-hour alarm response must be used for
multiple partitioned systems.
•
Entry delays must not exceed 45 seconds, and exit delays must not exceed 60 seconds.
UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm
Follow the instructions for UL609 local installations given above.
For Grade A Service:
•
You may use the VISTA-128B dialer alone, or the 7720 Long Range Radio alone.
•
When using the dialer, program it to send Burglary Alarm, Low Battery and
Communicator Test reports. Field *27 must be set to "024" (or less) so that test reports
are sent at least once every 24 hours.
•
If using the 7720, connect it to the VISTA-128B burglary/audible panic alarm trigger.
A-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
For Grade AA Service:
•
You must use a 7920SE Long Range Radio.
•
Connect the 7920SE to the VISTA-128B burglary/audible panic alarm trigger.
UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm
Follow the instructions for UL609 Local installations given above.
For Grade A Service:
•
You must use the VISTA-128B's dialer with a 7720 Long Range Radio.
•
Connect the control's burglary/audible panic alarm trigger (on J7 header) and the
659EN's phone line monitor output to the 7720. The 7720 will send a report to the
central station when a telephone line fault condition is detected.
•
Also connect the 7720's radio fault output to one of the VISTA-128B's EOLR-supervised
zones (i.e., 1-8). Program this zone for a trouble by day/alarm by night (type 05) or a 24hour alarm (type 07, 08) response to radio faults.
•
Program the control's dialer to send Burglary Alarm, Trouble, Opening/Closing,, and Low
Battery reports.
For Grade AA Service:
•
Follow the instructions for Grade A service, except use the 7920SE in place of the 7720.
California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) and UL Residential Fire Battery Backup
Requirements.
The California State Fire Marshal and UL have regulations which require that all residential
fire alarm control panels must be provided with backup battery which has sufficient capacity
to operate the panel and its attached peripherals devices for 24 hours in the intended
standby condition, followed by at least 4 minutes in the intended fire alarm signaling
condition.
The VISTA-128B can meet this requirement without using a supplemental power supply,
provided that the panel's outputs (including the current drawn from the auxiliary power
output terminals) are limited as shown below:
A-2
•
Output current is limited to 750mA maximum total auxiliary power, polling loop and bell
output current.
•
Maximum auxiliary current is 300mA (including polling loop current)
•
Use 14AH battery (Yuasa model NP7-12 recommended, use two connected in parallel. A
dual battery harness is provided with ADEMCO No. 4100EOLR Resistor kit (kit also
contains EOL resistors having spade lug/heat shrink tubing construction which has been
approved by UL and CSFM for fire zone usage). Both batteries will fit inside the panel's
cabinet.
Appendix A – Regulatory Agency Statements
"FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) STATEMENT"
This equipment has been tested to FCC requirements and has been found acceptable for use. The FCC requires the following
statement for your information:
This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, that is, in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and
found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• If using an indoor antenna, have a quality outdoor antenna installed.
• Reorient the receiving antenna until interference is reduced or eliminated.
• Move the receiver away from the control/communicator.
• Move the antenna leads away from any wire runs to the control/communicator.
• Plug the control/communicator into a different outlet so that it and the receiver are on different branch circuits.
If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions.
The user or installer may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful:
"Interference Handbook"
This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.
The user shall not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless authorized by the Installation Instructions or
User's Manual. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS
In the event of telephone operational problems, disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the RJ31X (CA38A in Canada)
wall jack. We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on installation of the system. Do not disconnect the phone
connection inside the Control Panel. Doing so will result in the loss of your phone lines. If the regular phone works correctly after the
Control Panel has been disconnected from the phone lines, the Control Panel has a problem and should be returned for repair. If upon
disconnection of the Control Panel, there is still a problem on the line, notify the telephone company that they have a problem and request
prompt repair service. The user may not under any circumstances (in or out of warranty) attempt any service or repairs to the system. It
must be returned to the factory or an authorized service agency for all repairs.
FCC PART 68 NOTICE
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the front cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among
other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this
information must be provided to the telephone company.
This equipment uses the following jacks:
An RJ31X is used to connect this equipment to the telephone network.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the
telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the
RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined
by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary
discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer
as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the
operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the
necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty information. If the
trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the
network until the problem is resolved.
There are no user serviceable components in this product, and all necessary repairs must be made by the manufacturer. Other
repair methods may invalidate the FCC registration on this product.
This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to
state tariffs.
This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.
When programming or making test calls to an emergency number, briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call.
Perform such activities in the off-peak hours; such as early morning or late evening.
A-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS
(DOC) STATEMENT
NOTICE
The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The Department does
not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some
cases, the company's inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of certified
connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions
may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier.
Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications
company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and
internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural
areas.
Caution: User should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric
inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a
telephone loop which is used by the device, to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed
100.
AVIS
L'étiquette du ministère des Communications du Canada identifie le matériel homologué. Cette étiquette certifie que le
matériel est conforme à certaines normes de protection, d'exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de télécommunications. Le
ministère n'assure toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera à la satisfaction de l'utilisateur.
Avant d'installer ce matériel, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer qu'il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l'entreprise locale
de télécommunications. Le matériel doit également être installé en suivant une méthode acceptée de raccordement. Dans
certains cas, les fils intérieurs de l'entreprise utilisés pour un service individuel à la ligne unique peuvent être prolongés au
moyen d'un dispositif homologué de raccordement (cordon prolongateur téléphonique interne). L'abonné ne doit pas oublier
qu'il est possible que la conformité aux conditions énoncées ci-dessus n'empèchet pas la dégradation du service dans
certaines situations. Actuellement, les entreprises de télécommunications ne permettent pas que l'on raccorde leur matériel
aux prises d'abonnés, sauf dans les cas precis prévus par les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises.
Les réparations du matériel homologué doivent être effectuées pas un centre d'entretien canadien autorisé désigné par le
fournisseur. La compagnie de télécommunications peut demander à l'utilisateur de débrancher un appareil à la suite de
réparations ou de modifications effectuées par l'utilisateur ou à cause de mauvais fonctionnement.
Pour sa propre protection, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer que tous les fils de mise en terre de la source d'énergie électrique, des
lignes téléphoniques de réseau de conduites d'eau s'il y en a, soient raccordés ensemble. Cette précaution est particulièrement
importante dans les régions rurales.
Avertissement: L'utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-même; il doit avoir recours à un service
d'inspection des installations électriques, ou à un électricien, selon le cas.
L'indice de charge (IC) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal pour éviter toute surcharge indique le pourcentage de la charge
totale qui peut être raccordé à un circuit téléphonique bouclé utilisé par ce dispositif. La terminaison du circuit bouclé peut
être constituée de n'importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs, pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l'ensemble des
dispositifs ne dépasse pas 100.
A-4
A P P E N D I X
B
DIP Switch Tables
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
B-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR ADDRESSABLE POLLING LOOP DEVICES
4208 ZONE EXPANDER
4192D/4192SDT/4192CP
SMOKE DETECTORS
4190WH ZONE EXPANDER
DIP
+
DIP
DIP
SIDE VIEW
(UP)
SHOWN SET FOR
ID 10 (A)
SIDE VIEW
(UP)
1 2 3 4 5
UP
APPLIES TO TABLE A ONLY
SHOWN SET FOR ID 10
1 2 3 4 5 6
APPLIES TO TABLE A & B ONLY
SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 (A)
7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6
SLOW
DN
UP
POS.1: MUST BE DOWN
WITH TABLE:
POS.1 MUST BE:
THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH
WORD "DN"
(“–” = DN)
DEVICE
ID
THIS TABLE FOR DIPS
WITH WORD “DN”
(“—” = DN)
10-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64
A
DIP SWITCH POSITION
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
THIS TABLE FOR DIPS
WITH WORD “UP”
(“—” = DN)
B
DEVICE
ID
10-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64
B-2
SIDE VIEW
(DN)
UP
DN
POS.1: LOOPS 1 & 2
RESPONSE TIME:
W/TABLE
FAST
A
UP
B
DN
DEVICE
ID
7 8
SIDE VIEW
(DN)
DN
DIP SWITCH POSITION
2
3
4
5
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
BIT
VALUE:
A
DIP SWITCH POSITION
2
3
4
5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
6
7
8
UP UP UP
UP UP UP
UP UP UP
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UP
UP –
UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –
UP UP UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –
UP –
UP –
UP –
UP –
UP –
UP –
UP –
UP –
UP UP
UP UP
– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
64 32 16
8
UP UP UP
UP UP UP
UP UP UP
UP UP UP
UP UP UP
UP UP UP
–
–
–
–
UP
–
4
2
1
A
DN
B
UP
THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH
WORD "UP"
(“–” = DN)
DEVICE
ID
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
BIT
VALUE:
B
DIP SWITCH POSITION
2
3
4
5
6
7
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
–
–
–
–
–
–
UP
UP
– UP
– –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
– – UP
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
– – UP
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
– – UP
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
–
– UP
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
– – UP
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
– – UP
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
–
– UP
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
–
– UP
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
–
– UP
–
–
UP UP UP
UP UP –
64 32 16
8
8
– UP UP
– UP –
– – UP
– – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
2
1
Appendix B - DIP Switch Tables
DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR POLLING LOOP DEVICES
MIRROR
SHOWN SET FOR
ID 10 (A)
1
2 3 4 5 6
7
1
2 3 4 5 6
1
7 8
SIDE VIEW
(DN)
2 3 4 5 6
UP
DN
DN
—
}
}
UP
THIS TABLE FOR DIPS
WITH WORD “DN”
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
SHOWN SET FOR
ID 10
UP
POS 6: UP (A), DN (B) = INST. MODE
DN (A), UP (B) = PULSE COUNT
POS. 7: UP (A), DN (B) = WALK TEST
DN (A), UP (B) = W/T DISABLE
DEVICE
ID
SIDE VIEW
(DN)
SHOWN SET FOR ID 10
SIDE VIEW
(UP)
DIP
MIRROR
DIP
+ —
DIP
4194 REED CONTACT
(SURFACE MOUNT)
4278 PIR
4275 PIR
A
DIP SWITCH POSITION
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
THIS TABLE FOR DIPS
WITH WORD “UP”
B
DEVICE
ID
DIP SWITCH POSITION
1
2
3
4
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
BIT
VALUE:
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
16
8
4
2
1
POS 7: UP = NORMAL MODE
DN = INSTANT MODE
POS. 8: UP = W/T DISABLE
DN = WALK TEST
DEVICE
ID
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
BIT
VALUE:
DIP SWITCH POSITION
1
2
3
4
5
6
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
32
16
8
4
2
1
DEVICE
ID
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
BIT
VALUE:
DIP SWITCH POSITION
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
Up
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
Up
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
32
16
8
4
2
1
B-3
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
B-4
A P P E N D I X
C
Summary of System Commands
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Event Logging
Commands
Event Log Display = Code + [#] + 60 (Installer or Master Only)
Event Log Print = Code + [#] + 61 (Installer or Master Only)
Clear Event Log = Code + [#] + 62 (Installer or Master Only)
Wireless System
Commands
House ID Sniffer Mode = Code + [#] + 2 (Installer Only)
Transmitter ID Test = Code + [#] + 3 (Installer Only)
Go/No Go Test = Code + 5 (Test Key)
User Code Commands
Add A User Code = User Code + 8 + New User Number + New User's Code
Change a Code = User Code + 8 + User Number + New User's Code
Delete a User's Code = Your User Code + 8 + User Number To Be Deleted +
Your Code Again
View User Capability = User's Code + [∗] + [∗]
Set Real-Time Clock (Installer, Master Only) = Code + [#] +63
Arming Functions
Arming Away
Enter Code + Away [2].
Arming Stay
Enter Code + Stay [3].
Arming Instant
Enter Code + Instant [7].
Arming Maximum
Enter Code + Maximum [4].
Quick Arm
Use # Key Instead Of User Code Followed by Any of
the Above Arming Mode Keys.
Global Arming
If Enabled for the User, the Keypad Will Display a
Prompt. Answer The Prompted Questions
Disarming
Enter Code + Off [1].
Bypassing Zones
Enter Code + Bypass [6] + Zone Number.
Quick Bypass
To Automatically Bypass All Faulted Zones, Use
"Quick Bypass" Method: Enter Code + Bypass + [#].
Chime Mode
Enter Code + Chime [9]. To Turn Chime Mode Off,
Enter Code + Chime Again.
Partition GOTO
User Code + [∗] + Partition Number 0-8.
GOTO Home Partition
User Code + [∗] + 0.
Panics
[∗] + 1 Zone 995 (A Key).
[∗] + [#] Zone 999 (B Key).
[#] + 3 Zone 996 (C Key).
View Downloaded
Messages
Press 0 for 5 Seconds.
Display All Zone
Descriptors
Press [∗] for 5 Seconds.
Display User Self Help
Hold Any Key for 5 Seconds
C-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
Programming
Commands
Site Initiated Download = User Code + [#] + 1.
Direct-Wire Download Enable = User Code + [#] + 5.
Enter Program Mode = Installer Code + 8000.
Exit Program Mode = *99 Or *98.
Scheduling
Commands
Programmed Schedule Events = User Code + [#] + 80 (Installer or Master
Only).
Temporary Schedule Editing = User Code + [#] + 81 (Installer, Master, Manager
Only).
Extend Closing Window = User Code + [#] + 82 (Installer, Master, Manager
Only).
End User Output Device Programming = User Code + [#] + 83.
Output Device Control
Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 71.
Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 72.
Activate Output Device Manually = User Code + [#] + 70.
Activate Output Device or System Event Instantly = User Code + [#] + 77.
Access Control
Activate Access Relay for Current Partition = User Code + 0.
Request to Enter/Exit = User Code + [#] + 73.
Request to Enter/Exit at Access Point = User Code + [#] + 74 + Access Point
Number.
Change Access Point State = User Code + [#] = 75 + Access Point + State.
Perform a Test of the VistaKey module = Installer Code + [#] + 78.
Perform an Access Control Card Function = User Code + [#] + 79.
C-2
A P P E N D I X
D
Specifications
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
VISTA-128B CONTROL
Physical:
14-1/2"W X 18"H X 4.3"D
Electrical:
Voltage Input:
From ADEMCO No. 1361 Plug-In Transformer (use 1361CN in Canada) or 4300
transformer (for X-10 installations) rated 16.5VAC, 40 VA.
Alarm Sounder Output:
10VDC-13.8VDC, 1.7 amps max., (UL1023, UL609 installations); 750mA less aux.
current draw (UL985 installations).
Auxiliary Power Output:
9.6VDC-13.8VDC, 750mA max. For UL installations, the accessories connected to the
output must be UL Listed, and rated to operate in the above voltage range.
Backup Battery:
12VDC, 4AH or 7AH gel cell. YUASA NP4-12 (12V, 4AH) or NP7-12 (12V, 7AH)
recommended.
Standby Time:
4 hours min. with 750 mA aux. load using 7 AH battery.
Circuit Protectors:
PTC circuit breakers are used on battery input to protect against reverse battery
connections and on alarm sounder output to protect against wiring faults (shorts).
A solid state circuit breaker is used on auxiliary power output to protect against wiring
faults (shorts).
Digital Communicator
Formats Supported:
ADEMCO High Speed, ADEMCO 4 + 2 Express, ADEMCO Low Speed, ADEMCO
Contact ID, Sescoa and Radionics Low Speed
Line Seize:
Double Pole
Ringer Equivalence:
0.7B
FCC Registration No.:
AC398U-68192-AL-E
6139 Remote Keypads
Physical:
Width:
6.25 inches
Height:
4.75 inches
Depth:
1.25 inches
Electrical:
Voltage Input:
12VDC
Current Drain:
100 mA
Interface Wiring:
RED:
12VDC input (+) auxiliary power
BLUE:
Not Used
GREEN:
Data to control panel
YELLOW:
Data from control panel
BLACK:
Ground and (-) connection from supplemental power supply.
D-1
VISTA-128B Installation and Setup Guide
D-2
Index
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
#70 Relay Mode .......................................................... 29-6
AC RANDOMIZE......................................................... 18-3
#77 Mode .................................................................... 29-7
AC Transformer............................................................. 4-4
#93 Menu Mode Key Commands ................................ 19-4
Access Group............................................................. 28-5
#93 Menu Mode Programming........................... 19-4, 23-1
Access Control .................................... 1-4, 14-1, 29-3, C-2
12/24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT ....................... 22-14
Access Control Commands....................................... 24-12
1361 .......................................................................4-4, D-1
Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point ......................... 14-6
1361 Transformer........................................................ 18-1
Access Control of Lighting and Appliances................. 14-7
1361CN Transformer................................................... 18-1
ACCESS CONTROL RELAY .................................... 22-15
24-hour Audible Alarm Type 07................................... 20-2
Access Control Using RF Transmitter......................... 14-7
24-hour Auxiliary Alarm Type 08 ................................. 20-2
Access Group Programming ....................................... 14-4
24-hour Silent Alarm Type 06...................................... 20-2
ACCESS GRP PGM.................................................... 23-2
2-Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors ......................... 6-4
ACCESS POINT PGM ................................................ 23-2
2-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................................... 6-2
Access Point Programming......................................... 14-4
3+1 and 4+1 Expanded Formats................................. 25-2
Access Point Type 27 ................................................. 20-3
3+1 and 4+1 Standard Formats .................................. 25-2
Access Schedules....................................................... 24-7
4+2 Format.................................................................. 25-2
Access Security .......................................................... 26-3
4100APG LED Indications........................................... 17-4
ACTION (A)................................................................... 9-5
4100APG Pager Interface ........................................... 17-1
Action Code............................................................... 24-11
4100SM .............................................................. 12-6, 26-1
Action Specifier ......................................................... 24-11
4100SM Interface Module ........................................... 12-1
Active time................................................................. 24-13
4100SM Serial Interface Module ................................. 16-1
Adding a User Code.................................................... 28-4
4142TR ......................................................................... 9-5
Adding an RF Key to an Existing User........................ 28-6
4197 Polling Loop Extender .......................................... 7-5
Addressing The Keypads .............................................. 5-3
4204 Relay Module ....................................................... 9-3
Ademco 4+2 Express .................................................. 25-2
4204/4204CF Relay Modules........................................ 9-1
ADEMCO 4146 ........................................................... 12-3
4204CF Relay Module................................................... 9-3
Ademco AB12. .............................................................. 4-2
4285/4286 VIP Module................................................ 10-1
Ademco Contact ID ..................................................... 25-5
4297 loop Extender Module ........................................ 18-4
Ademco Contact ID Reporting Format ........................ 25-2
4297 Polling Loop Extender .......................................... 7-5
Ademco High Speed .......................................... 25-2, 25-4
4300 transformer ....................................................4-4, D-1
Ademco Low Speed .................................................... 25-2
4300 Transformer................................................. 9-4, 18-1
Ademco No. N6277 Cam Lock...................................... 4-1
4300 Wiring Connections .............................................. 9-5
Ademco's Contact ID................................................... 25-2
4-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................................... 6-3
Affects Lobby ................................................................ 2-2
50/60 Hz CLOCK SPEED ......................................... 22-13
AFFECTS LOBBY ..................................................... 22-10
5800 Series Transmitters .............................................. 8-5
Agency Listings ............................................................. 1-6
5800TM Module ............................................................ 8-4
Agency Statements ....................................................... A-1
5800TM Wiring .............................................................. 8-4
Alarm Output Current Load ......................................... 18-5
6139 ..............................................................................D-1
Alarm Output Supervision ........................................... 15-2
675 Ground Start Module ............................................ 12-2
Alarm-Saf ...................................................................... 5-2
685 Receiver ............................................................... 11-2
ALLOW DISARM OUTSIDE WINDOW IF ALARM
719 .............................................................................. 15-3
OCCURS............................................................... 22-16
747 .............................................................................. 15-3
ALLOW DISARMING ONLY DURING
7720 ............................................................................ 12-5
ARM/DISARM WINDOWS .................................... 22-16
7720ULF ..................................................................... 12-5
ALPHA NUMERIC PAGER INSTALLED..................... 22-7
7920SE ....................................................................... 12-5
ALPHA PROG ............................................................. 23-1
Antenna Fault.............................................................. 13-2
Arm/Disarm Commands ............................................ 24-11
A
Arm-Away Type 21...................................................... 20-3
Armed Burglary System Test ...................................... 30-2
AAV ............................................................................. 11-1
Arming Away ............................................................... 29-1
AAV Module Operation................................................ 11-1
Arming Commands ..................................................... 29-1
ABB1031 ..................................................................... 15-3
Arming Functions ..........................................................C-1
AC LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING ................................. 22-2
Arming Instant ............................................................. 29-1
AC Outlet Ground................................................. 4-4, 18-2
Arming Maximum ........................................................ 29-1
AC POWER LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING................... 18-3
Index-1
VISTA-128B Installation Instructions
Arming Stay................................................................. 29-1
Arms Lobby ................................................................... 2-2
ARMS LOBBY ........................................................... 22-10
Arm-Stay Type 20 ....................................................... 20-3
Audio Alarm Verification .............................. 1-5, 11-1, 12-5
Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections ............ 11-2
Audio Alarm Verification Programming ....................... 11-3
Authority Levels and Modification Rules ..................... 28-3
Auto Arming................................................................. 24-1
Auto Disarming............................................................ 24-2
AUTO-ARM DELAY.................................................. 22-15
Auto-Arm Delay ........................................................... 24-2
Auto-Arm Warning....................................................... 24-2
AUTO-ARM WARNING PERIOD .............................. 22-15
AUTO-DISARM DELAY............................................. 22-15
Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment .......................... 12-5
AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE.......................... 12-2, 12-3
AUXILIARY OUTPUT MODE .................................... 22-13
Auxiliary Power Current Load...................................... 18-5
B
BACK-UP BATTERY .....................................................D-1
Basic Hardwired Zones .......................................... 1-1, 6-1
Battery ........................................................................... 4-4
Battery Capacity Worksheet........................................ 18-7
Battery Selection Table ............................................... 18-7
Battery Test........................................................ 18-7, 30-1
BELL TIMEOUT .......................................................... 22-1
Built-in User's Manual ................................................... 1-6
BURG. ALARM COMM. DELAY.................................. 22-9
BURG. TRIGGER FOR RESPONSE TYPE 8 ............. 22-3
Burglary Walk Test...................................................... 30-1
Button RF ...................................................................... 8-5
Bypass Commands ................................................... 24-12
Bypassing Zones......................................................... 29-2
C
California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) ........................... A-2
Call Waiting Defeat ....................................................... 3-3
CALL WAITING DEFEAT .......................................... 22-12
Callback ...................................................................... 26-2
CALLBACK REQUESTED .......................................... 26-3
CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF
COMMUNICATIONS ................................................. A-4
Changing a User Code................................................ 28-6
Characteristics of Polling Loop...................................... 7-1
Characteristics of Wireless Zones................................. 8-1
Check Messages......................................................... 30-3
CHECK OR TRBL DISPLAY ..................................... 22-10
CHECKSUM VERIFICATION...................................... 22-6
Chime Mode ................................................................ 29-2
CHIME ON EXTERNAL SIREN................................. 22-13
CIRCUIT PROTECTORS ..............................................D-1
Code + #73.................................................................. 14-6
Code + #74.................................................................. 14-6
Code + #75.................................................................. 14-6
Code + TEST [5] ......................................................... 30-1
Cold Water Pipe ................................................... 4-4, 18-2
Index-2
COMM. FAILURE........................................................ 30-4
COMM. SPLIT REPORT SELECTION...................... 22-12
Common Lobby............................................................. 2-2
Communication Formats ............................................... 1-5
Compass Downloading Software ................................ 26-3
Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................ 6-2
Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................ 6-3
Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters........................... 8-6
Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices ......................... 15-3
Compatible Glass Break Detectors ............................... 6-4
Compatible Polling Loop Devices ................................. 7-2
CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING ......................... 22-2
Connecting the Transformer ....................................... 18-2
CONTACT ID EVENT CODES.................................... 25-5
Contacting Technical Support ..................................... 30-5
Control Unit Power Supply Load ................................. 18-4
Conventions Used in This Manual ................................... ix
Cross Zoning................................................................. 3-2
CROSS ZONING PAIR FOUR .................................. 22-11
CROSS ZONING PAIR ONE..................................... 22-10
CROSS ZONING PAIR THREE ................................ 22-11
CROSS ZONING PAIR TWO .................................... 22-11
Cross-Zoning................................................................. 1-5
CUSTOM INDEX......................................................... 23-2
D
Data Encryption........................................................... 26-3
Data Field Descriptions ............................................... 22-1
Data Field Program Mode ........................................... 19-1
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME START/END MONTH ..... 22-15
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME START/END
WEEKEND ............................................................ 22-15
DEVICE PROG ........................................................... 23-2
DIAL TONE DETECTION............................................ 22-5
DIAL TONE PAUSE .................................................... 22-5
Dialer Test................................................................... 30-1
DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR .........................................D-1
DIP Switch Tables......................................................... B-1
Direct-Wire Downloading ............................................ 26-3
DISABLE DOWNLOAD CALLBACK ......................... 22-13
Disarm Delay............................................................... 24-2
Disarm Type 22........................................................... 20-3
Disarming .................................................................... 29-1
DISPLAY BURG & PANIC ALARMS OF OTHER
PARTITIONS......................................................... 22-17
Display Faulted Zones ................................................ 29-1
DISPLAY FIRE ALARMS OF OTHER
PARTITIONS......................................................... 22-16
DISPLAY TROUBLES OF OTHER PARTITIONS ..... 22-17
Door Status Monitor .................................................... 14-4
DOWNLOAD COMMAND ENABLES.......................... 22-5
DOWNLOAD ID NUMBER .......................................... 22-4
DOWNLOAD PHONE NUMBER ................................. 22-4
Downloading .......................................................1-6, 26-1
Downloading Requirements ........................................ 26-1
DUAL REPORTING .................................................... 22-6
Duress......................................................................... 28-1
Duress Reporting ........................................................ 28-3
Index
E
G
Early Power Detect...................................................... 13-2
Earth Ground Connections................................... 4-4, 18-2
ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE ARM ............... 22-14
ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM.............. 22-14
ENABLE DIALER REPORTS FOR PANICS &
DURESS ................................................................. 22-9
ENABLE GOTO FOR THIS PARTITION ................... 22-16
ENABLE J7 TRIGGERS BY PARTITION .................. 22-16
ENABLE OPEN/CLOSE REPORT FOR
INSTALLER CODE.................................................. 22-5
Entering Programming Mode ...................................... 19-1
ENTRY DELAY #1 ...................................................... 22-1
ENTRY DELAY #2 ...................................................... 22-1
Entry Errors ................................................................. 19-2
ENTRY WARNING ...................................................... 22-9
Entry/Exit #1 Type 01.................................................. 20-1
Entry/Exit #2 Type 02.................................................. 20-2
EVENT (EV) ........................................................... 9-5, 9-6
Event Log ...................................................................... 1-5
Event Log Options....................................................... 16-1
Event Log Printer Connections .......................... 12-6, 16-1
EVENT LOG PRINTER ON-LINE.............................. 22-14
Event Log Programming.............................................. 16-2
Event Log Screen Definitions ...................................... 16-4
EVENT LOG TYPES ...................................... 22-12, 22-14
Event Logging Commands ............................................C-1
Event Logging Procedures .......................................... 16-3
EVENT/ACTION PGM................................................. 23-2
Event/Action Programming.......................................... 14-4
Exception Reports ....................................................... 24-3
EXIT DELAY #1........................................................... 22-1
EXIT DELAY #2........................................................... 22-1
Exit Delay Reset............................................................ 3-2
EXIT DELAY RESET................................................. 22-10
EXIT DELAY SOUNDING ......................................... 22-13
Exit Error ................................................................ 1-5, 3-1
EXIT ERROR LOGIC ENABLE ................................. 22-10
EXPERT MODE .......................................................... 23-1
Extend Closing Window .............................................. 24-2
Extending Closing Time .............................................. 29-3
External Sounders....................................................... 15-1
Gates batteries............................................................ 18-6
General Description ...................................................... 1-1
General Purpose ......................................................... 14-4
Getting On-Line with a Control Panel.......................... 26-2
Global Arm ? ............................................................... 28-5
Global Arming ............................................................. 29-2
GOTO Commands ...................................................... 29-3
Grade A Mercantile Listing............................................ 4-2
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing ................... 4-3
Grade A Service.................................................... A-1, A-2
Grade AA Service ......................................................... A-2
Ground Start Setup ..................................................... 12-2
F
False Alarm Reduction .................................................. 3-1
FAULT ANNUNCIATION............................................. 20-3
FCC PART 68 NOTICE ................................................. A-3
FCC REGISTRATION NO.............................................D-1
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
(FCC) STATEMENT .................................................. A-3
FIRE DISPLAY LOCK ............................................... 22-10
First Communication ................................................... 26-2
FIRST TEST REPORT TIME ...................................... 22-9
Force Arm.................................................................... 24-2
FORCE ARM ENABLE (FOR AUTO-ARM)............... 22-15
Frwd. Power Loss........................................................ 13-2
FSA Module................................................................... 9-4
FSA Modules................................................................. 9-1
H
HANDSHAKE .............................................................. 25-2
Holiday Schedule ........................................................ 24-4
Holiday Schedule Programming................................ 24-10
Holiday Schedule Worksheet .................................... 24-10
Holiday schedules ....................................................... 24-7
House ID Sniffer Mode.................................................. 8-4
I
IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER ..................... 22-3
Installer Code .............................................................. 28-1
INSTALLER CODE ..................................................... 22-1
Installing RPM Devices ................................................. 7-1
Installing The Cabinet Lock........................................... 4-1
Installing The Control .................................................... 4-1
Installing The Control's Circuit Board............................ 4-3
Instant Activation Mode............................................... 29-7
INTELLIGENT TEST REPORTING............................. 22-3
Interior w/Delay Type 10 ............................................. 20-3
Interior, Follower Type 04 ........................................... 20-2
J
J7 Pin Assignments..................................................... 12-1
J7 Trigger Outputs ...................................................... 12-1
K
Keypad Connections ..................................................... 5-2
Keypad Functions ....................................................... 29-1
Keypad Macros ............................................................. 1-3
KEYPAD PANIC ENABLES ........................................ 22-2
Keypad Panic Keys ....................................................... 1-3
Keypads ........................................................................ 5-1
Keyswitch ...................................................................... 1-4
KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT ...................................... 22-2
Keyswitch LEDs .......................................................... 12-4
Keyswitch Setup.......................................................... 12-3
KISSOFF..................................................................... 25-2
Index-3
VISTA-128B Installation Instructions
L
Level 0 Installer (User 1) Code ................................... 28-2
Level 1 Master Codes ................................................. 28-2
Level 2 Manager Codes .............................................. 28-2
Level 6 Duress Codes ................................................. 28-3
Levels 3-5 Operator Codes ......................................... 28-2
Limitation of Access .................................................... 24-3
Limitation of Access Schedules ................................ 24-16
Limitation Of Access Schedules Programming ......... 24-16
LINE SEIZE ...................................................................D-1
List of Figures................................................................. viii
listen-in to follow.......................................................... 11-1
LO BAT........................................................................ 30-4
LOBBY PARTITION .................................................. 22-10
Long Range Radio (ECP)............................................ 13-1
LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION #1
CATEGORY ENABLE ............................................. 22-7
LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION #2
CATEGORY ENABLE ............................................. 22-7
Long Range Subscriber .............................................. 12-1
LOW SPEED FORMAT (PRIMARY) .......................... 22-6
LOW SPEED FORMAT (SECONDARY) ..................... 22-6
LRR Battery................................................................. 13-2
LRR CRC is bad.......................................................... 13-2
LRR reporting options ................................................. 13-1
LRR Trouble Messages............................................... 13-2
M
Macros ........................................................................ 29-5
Main Logic Board ........................................................ 14-5
Main Logic Board (MLB) Supervision Type 28............ 20-3
Manager Code............................................................. 28-1
Manual Relay Activation Mode.................................... 29-6
Master Code................................................................ 28-1
Master Keypad .............................................................. 2-5
Mechanics of Programming......................................... 19-1
MODEM COMM ................................................. 26-3, 30-4
Momentary on Exit Type 29 ........................................ 20-3
Mounting the 4100APG ............................................... 17-1
Mounting The Control Cabinet ...................................... 4-1
Mounting The Keypads ................................................. 5-2
Mounting the VIP Module ............................................ 10-2
Moving Through Programming.................................... 19-2
Multi-Access ?............................................................. 28-5
MULTIPLE ALARMS ................................................... 22-3
Multiple Partition Access ............................................. 28-4
N
No Alarm Response Type 23 ...................................... 20-3
Non-UL Installations .................................................... 15-4
NORMALLY CLOSED OR EOLR (ZONES 3-8) .......... 22-5
NUMBER OF PARTITIONS ...................................... 22-15
O
OC or OPEN CIRCUIT .................................................. 5-3
Index-4
Off-Normal Report....................................................... 30-4
On-Line Control Functions .......................................... 26-2
OPEN/CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH ....... 22-5
Open/Close Reporting................................................. 28-3
Open/Close Reports by Exception .............................. 24-5
OPEN/CLOSE REPORTS BY EXCEPTION ............. 22-16
Open/Close Schedule ................................................. 24-4
Open/Close Schedule Programming........................... 24-9
Open/Close Schedule Worksheet ............................... 24-9
Open/Close Schedules ............................................... 24-7
Open/Close Windows................................................ 24-12
Operator Access Levels .............................................. 26-3
Operator Level Codes ................................................. 28-1
Output Device Control...................................................C-2
Output Devices....................................................... 1-3, 9-1
OUTPUT PGM ............................................................ 23-2
Output Programming..................................................... 9-5
overvoltage protection................................................. 25-1
P
PA400 ......................................................................... 15-3
PABX ACCESS CODE................................................ 22-4
PAGER ID NUMBER FOR ALARMS .......................... 22-7
PAGER ID NUMBER FOR BYPASSES ...................... 22-8
PAGER ID NUMBER FOR OPENS/CLOSES ............. 22-8
PAGER ID NUMBER FOR SYSTEM .......................... 22-8
PAGER ID NUMBER FOR TEST ................................ 22-9
PAGER ID NUMBER FOR TROUBLES...................... 22-8
Pager Interface............................................................ 17-1
PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR ALARMS ................. 22-7
PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR BYPASSES ............. 22-8
PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR OPENS/CLOSES .... 22-8
PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR SYSTEM ................. 22-8
PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TEST....................... 22-8
PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TROUBLES............. 22-8
PANIC BUTTON OR SPEEDKEY ............................. 22-11
Panic Keys .................................................................. 29-4
PARTITION No. (P)....................................................... 9-6
Partitioning .................................................................... 2-1
Partitioning Keypads ..................................................... 2-1
Partitioning Users.......................................................... 2-1
Partitioning Zones ......................................................... 2-1
Partitions ....................................................................... 1-2
PassPoint ........................................................... 14-1, 29-3
PassPoint Access Control System.............................. 14-5
PassPoint Dialer Events.............................................. 14-5
Perimeter Type 03....................................................... 20-2
Peripheral Devices ........................................................ 1-3
PERMANENT KEYPAD DISPLAY
BACKLIGHTING.................................................... 22-12
Phone Access User's Guide ....................................... 10-1
Planning a Partitioned System ...................................... 2-1
PLL out of Lock ........................................................... 13-2
Polling Loop Current Draw .......................................... 18-4
Polling Loop Expansion ......................................... 1-1, 7-1
Polling Loop Supervision .............................................. 7-6
Power Failure .............................................................. 30-4
Power Unattained........................................................ 13-2
POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE ................... 18-3, 22-3
Powerline Carrier Devices............................................. 9-2
Index
Power-Up Procedure................................................... 18-1
PREVENT FIRE TIMEOUT ......................................... 22-2
PREVENT ZONE XXX BYPASS ................................. 22-5
PRIMARY FORMAT .................................................... 22-6
PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER ...................................... 22-4
PRIMARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT # .............................. 22-4
PRINTER BAUD RATE ............................................. 22-14
Printer configuration .................................................... 16-1
Programming AC Options ........................................... 18-3
Programming Commands .............................................C-2
PROGRAMMING COMMANDS .................................. 19-2
Programming for 4100APG ......................................... 17-4
Programming for Long Range Radio........................... 13-2
Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields................ 19-3
Programming Scheduling Options............................... 24-6
Programming System-Wide Data Fields ..................... 19-2
Q
Quick Arm.................................................................... 28-1
QUICK ARM ................................................................ 22-3
Quick Arming............................................................... 29-1
R
RANDOMIZE AC LOSS REPORT............................... 22-2
RCVR SET UP ERROR .............................................. 30-4
REAL TIME CLOCK .................................................... 16-3
Real-Time Clock.......................................................... 27-1
Recent Close Report ..................................................... 3-1
Refresh Feature ........................................................ 24-13
Regulatory Agency Statements..................................... A-1
Relay commands....................................................... 24-11
RELAY TIMEOUT XXX MINUTES ............................ 22-14
RELAY TIMEOUT YYY SECONDS........................... 22-14
Remote Keypad Sounder ............................................ 12-3
REPORT CODE PROG............................................... 23-1
Reporting Formats....................................................... 25-2
Request to Exit............................................................ 14-4
RESTORE REPORT TIMING...................................... 22-9
Restrict Disarming ....................................................... 24-2
RF Installation Advisories.............................................. 8-2
RF Operation and Supervision ...................................... 8-1
RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK-IN INTERVAL .... 22-12
RF Receivers ................................................................ 8-3
RF TRANSMITTER CHECK-IN INTERVAL .............. 22-12
RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT ENABLE .............. 22-11
RF TX LOW BATTERY SOUND ............................... 22-11
Ring Count .................................................................. 26-2
RING DETECTION COUNT ........................................ 22-6
RINGER EQUIVALENCE ..............................................D-1
RJ31X jack .................................................................. 10-3
RLY VOICE DESCR.................................................... 23-2
RTE ............................................................................. 14-4
S
Scheduling ........................................................... 1-5, 24-1
Scheduling Commands .................................................C-2
Scheduling Menu Mode............................................... 24-6
Scheduling Menu Structure......................................... 24-7
SECONDARY FORMAT ............................................. 22-6
SECONDARY PHONE NUMBER ............................... 22-4
SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT #...................... 22-10
SEND CANCEL IF ALARM + OFF ............................ 22-13
serial number devices ................................................... 7-4
Serial Printer ............................................................... 17-3
Sescoa/Radionics ....................................................... 25-2
SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT.................................. 22-6
Setting Up a Partitioned System ................................... 2-2
Specifications ................................................................D-1
Speed Key [D] Macros ................................................ 29-5
STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT PRIMARY........... 22-7
STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT SECONDARY .... 22-7
Standby Battery Size................................................... 18-6
START (STT) ................................................................ 9-5
STOP (STP) .................................................................. 9-6
Supervised Fire (Without Verification) Type 09........... 20-2
Supervised RF .............................................................. 8-5
SUPERVISION PULSES FOR LORRA TRIGGER
OUTPUTS ............................................................. 22-16
Supervisory Messages................................................ 30-3
Supervisory Zones ........................................................ 1-2
Supplementary Power Supply....................................... 5-2
SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUND.................. 22-13
SWINGER SUPPRESSION ........................................ 22-9
System Commands .......................................................C-1
System Communication .............................................. 25-1
SYSTEM LO BAT........................................................ 30-4
System LoBat”............................................................. 30-1
System Messages....................................................... 30-4
System Sensor A77-716B EOL Relay Module.............. 6-3
System Sensor MA 12/24D......................................... 15-3
System Sensor P12575 .............................................. 15-3
T
Telephone Line Connections ...................................... 25-1
Temporary Schedule................................................... 24-5
Temporary Schedule Worksheet............................... 24-17
Temporary Schedules ............................................... 24-17
Temporary Schedules Programming ........................ 24-17
TEST REPORT INTERVAL......................................... 22-3
Testing The System .................................................... 30-1
Testing Wireless Zones .............................................. 30-2
Time and Date............................................................. 27-1
Time Driven Events..................................................... 24-3
Time Window Definitions............................................. 24-3
Time Windows............................................................. 24-7
Time Windows Definitions Worksheet......................... 24-8
Time Windows Programming ...................................... 24-8
Timed Events .............................................................. 24-7
Time-Driven Event Programming .............................. 24-13
Time-Driven Event Worksheet .................................. 24-10
To Delete a Master, Manager, or Operator Code........ 28-6
To EXIT The User Edit Mode ...................................... 28-6
TOUCH-TONE OR ROTARY DIAL ............................ 22-4
TOUCH-TONE W/ROTARY BACKUP ..................... 22-12
Transmitter Battery Life................................................. 8-5
Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode ........................................ 30-2
Transmitter Input Types ................................................ 8-5
Index-5
VISTA-128B Installation Instructions
Transmitter Supervision ................................................ 8-5
Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night Type 05 ..................... 20-2
Trouble Conditions ...................................................... 30-3
Trouble Messages....................................................... 30-3
Turning the System Over to the User.......................... 30-5
VistaKey ...................................................................... 14-1
VistaKey module ......................................................... 14-1
Voltage Triggers............................................................ 1-4
U
Wheelock AS-121575W ............................................. 15-3
Wire Run Length ........................................................... 5-1
Wireless Expansion ...................................................... 1-2
WIRELESS KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT........................ 22-13
WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT ................. 22-13
Wireless System Commands ........................................C-1
Wireless Zone Expansion ............................................. 8-1
Wiring Long Range Radio ........................................... 12-5
Wiring Polling Loop Devices ......................................... 7-4
Wiring the 4100APG ................................................... 17-2
Wiring the 4100APG With the Printer.......................... 17-3
Wiring the 4100APG Without the Printer..................... 17-2
Wiring the Alarm Output.............................................. 15-3
Wiring the Long Range Radio ..................................... 13-2
Wiring the VIP Module ................................................ 10-2
Wiring the VistaKey............................................ 14-3, 14-4
Wiring Zones 1-9........................................................... 6-1
Worksheets to calculate the total current.................... 18-4
World Wide Web Address ........................................... 30-5
UL Installation Requirements ........................................ A-1
UL Listed Applications................................................. 12-2
UL Residential Fire Battery Backup Requirements ....... A-2
UL1023 Household Burglary Installations ................... 15-4
UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm ........... A-1
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises .................. A-1
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Safe & Vault ............. A-1
UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm............. A-2
UL985 Household Fire or Household Fire/Burglary
Installations ............................................................. 15-3
UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION ........................ 2-2
Unsupervised RF .......................................................... 8-5
USE LONG RANGE RADIO IF DIALER FAILS........... 22-7
USE LONG RANGE RADIO ONLY ............................. 22-7
USE PARTITION DESCRIPTORS ............................ 22-16
User Access Codes..................................................... 28-1
User Code Commands..................................................C-1
User Codes ................................................................... 1-3
User Codes Authority Levels....................................... 28-1
User Scheduling Menu Mode .................................... 24-19
Using ACS Zone Inputs............................................... 14-5
Using the Built-in User’s Manual ................................. 29-4
W
Y
Yuasa .......................................................................... 18-7
V
Z
View Capabilities ......................................................... 28-1
Viewing Capabilities Of A User ................................... 29-4
Viewing Data Fields .................................................... 19-2
Viewing Downloaded Messages ................................. 29-4
Viewing Zone Descriptors ........................................... 29-4
VIP Module.................................................................. 10-1
VIP MODULE PHONE CODE ..................................... 22-2
Vista Gateway Module ....................................... 14-5, 29-3
Vista Interactive Phone Module .................................... 1-4
VISTA-128B CONTROL ................................................D-1
VISTA-128B Current Load .......................................... 18-6
VISTA-128B for Stand-alone Access Control.............. 14-8
ZONE 5 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION.................. 22-14
Zone 5/Audio Alarm Verification.................................. 11-3
Zone 804 ..................................................................... 10-1
ZONE 9 RESPONSE TIME......................................... 22-2
Zone Index .................................................................. 21-1
ZONE LIST (ZL) ............................................................ 9-6
ZONE PROG............................................................... 23-1
zone resistance............................................................. 6-1
Zone Type Defaults..................................................... 21-2
Zone Type Definitions ................................................. 20-1
ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR TYPES 9/10 .............. 22-9
ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION (ZT). ................... 9-6
Index-6
WARNING!
THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM
While this System is an advanced wireless security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary, fire or
other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or residential, is subject to compromise or failure to warn for a
variety of reasons. For example:
• Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm sensor or
disconnect an alarm warning device.
• Intrusion detectors (e.g., passive infrared detectors), smoke detectors, and many other sensing devices will not work without power. Battery-operated devices will not work without batteries, with dead batteries, or if the batteries are not put in
properly. Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason, however briefly.
• Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver. Even if
the signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test, blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the path.
• A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough.
• While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States, they may not activate or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35% of all fires, according to data published by the
Federal Emergency Management Agency. Some of the reasons smoke detectors used in conjunction with this System may
not work are as follows. Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned. Smoke detectors may not
sense fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors, such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side
of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building. A second floor detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Finally, smoke detectors have sensing limitations. No
smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time. In general, detectors may not always warn about fires caused by
carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable
materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson. Depending on the nature of the fire
and/or location of the smoke detectors, the detector, even if it operates as anticipated, may not provide sufficient warning
to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death.
• Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their
installation manual. Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They do create multiple beams
of protection, and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams. They cannot detect motion
or intrusion that takes place behind walls, ceilings, floors, closed doors, glass partitions, glass doors, or windows.
Mechanical tampering, masking, painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors, windows or any part of the optical
system can reduce their detection ability. Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature; however, as the
ambient temperature of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90° to 105°F (32° to 40°C), the detection
performance can decrease.
• Alarm warning devices such as sirens, bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the
other side of closed or partly open doors. If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bedrooms, then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms. Even persons who are awake may not hear
the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo, radio, air conditioner or other appliance, or by passing traffic.
Finally, alarm warning devices, however loud, may not warn hearing-impaired people.
• Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of service or
temporarily out of service. Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders.
• Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended, however, occupants may have insufficient time to protect themselves from the emergency situation. In the case of a monitored alarm system, authorities may not respond appropriately.
• This equipment, like other electrical devices, is subject to component failure. Even though this equipment is designed to
last as long as 20 years, the electronic components could fail at any time.
The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance. This
alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly. The security
keypad (and remote keypad) should be tested as well.
Wireless transmitters (used in some systems) are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions.
Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless
device being used. External factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature,
may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. This wireless system, however, can identify a true low battery
situation, thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the system.
Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate, but an alarm system is not a substitute
for insurance. Homeowners, property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting themselves and
continue to insure their lives and property. We continue to develop new and improved protection devices. Users of alarm
systems owe it to themselves and their loved ones to learn about these developments.
ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY
Alarm Device Manufacturing Company, a Division of Pittway Corporation, and its divisions, subsidiaries and
affiliates ("Seller"), 165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791, warrants its products to be in conformance
with its own plans and specifications and to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under
normal use and service for 24 months from the date stamp control on the product or, for products not having
an ADEMCO date stamp, for 12 months from date of original purchase unless the installation instructions or
catalog sets forth a shorter period, in which case the shorter period shall apply. Seller's obligation shall be
limited to repairing or replacing, at its option, free of charge for materials or labor, any product which is
proved not in compliance with Seller's specifications or proves defective in materials or workmanship under
normal use and service. Seller shall have no obligation under this Limited Warranty or otherwise if the
product is altered or improperly repaired or serviced by anyone other than ADEMCO factory service. For
warranty service, return product transportation prepaid, to ADEMCO Factory Service, 170 Michael Drive,
Syosset, New York 11791.
THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE
FACE HEREOF. IN NO CASE SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OR UPON ANY OTHER BASIS OF LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, EVEN IF THE LOSS OR
DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY THE SELLER'S OWN NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT.
Seller does not represent that the products it sells may not be compromised or circumvented; that the
products will prevent any personal injury or property loss by burglary, robbery, fire or otherwise; or that the
products will in all cases provide adequate warning or protection. Customer understands that a properly
installed and maintained alarm may only reduce the risk of a burglary, robbery, fire or other events
occurring without providing an alarm, but it is not insurance or a guarantee that such will not occur or that
there will be no personal injury or property loss as a result. CONSEQUENTLY, SELLER SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY, PROPERTY DAMAGE OR OTHER LOSS BASED ON A
CLAIM THE PRODUCT FAILED TO GIVE WARNING. HOWEVER, IF SELLER IS HELD LIABLE,
WHETHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING UNDER THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE, REGARDLESS OF CAUSE OR ORIGIN, SELLER'S MAXIMUM
LIABILITY SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, WHICH
SHALL BE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST SELLER. This warranty replaces any
previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Seller on this product. No increase or alteration,
written or verbal, of the obligations of this Limited Warranty is authorized.
WARNING: OWNER'S INSTRUCTION NOTICE NOT TO BE REMOVED
WEEKLY TESTING IS REQUIRED TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM.
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE:
WHEN POWERING UP
THE PANEL, PLUG THE
TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE
CONNECTING THE BATTERY.
12
13
ZONE 4 ZONE 5
14
15
16
ZONE 6 ZONE 7
17
18
19
ZONE 8 ZONE 9
20
21
22
23
See Installation Instructions
for max # of keypads
and for max wire run length.
BELL
+
-
SIREN
+
+
-
AUXILARY POWER OUTPUT
9.6VDC - 13.8VDC,
750mA maximum
Note: Include current drawn
by keypads and polling loop
devices when making
auxiliary power calculations.
ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT 10VDC - 13.8VDC
Notes For UL Household Fire Installations
1. Use 12VDC, 14AH battery
2. Maximum auxiliary current,
including polling loop 300mA
3. Combined alarm and auxilary power output
and polling loop current must be limited to 750mA
for UL985 Household Fire Installations.
N.C.
-
+
N.C.
N.C.
+
-
N.C.
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.
2k EOLR
(note 1)
2k EOLR
(note 1)
2k EOLR
(note 1)
2k EOLR
(note 1,3)
+
Fire
Usage
N.C.
SMOKE
-
+
+
N.C.
N.O.
Burg.
Usage
N.O.
2k EOLR
(note 1,2)
ALL CIRCUITS ARE
POWER LIMITED.
2k EOLR
(note 1)
2k EOLR
(note 1)
Zone resistance (Excluding EOLR):
ZONE 1,8: 100 OHMS MAXIMUM
ALL OTHER ZONES: 300 OHMS MAXIMUM
Zone response time:
ZONES 1-8: 350mSec-500mSec
ZONE 9: Programmable for
Fast: 10mSec-15mSec
Normal: 350mSec-500mSec
(default response)
VISTA-128B
SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS
Handset
27
28
29
Incoming
Phone Line
Telephone connections
using Ademco No. 620
RJ31X direct connect
cord.
4190
RPM
N.C.
4192SD
SMOKE
N.C.
4278
PIR
N.O.
N.O.
-
26
+
GLASS
BREAK
N.C.
N.C.
-
25
POLLING LOOP
-
+
Programmable Response
(Fast/Normal) Loop
Red Blk Grn Yel
REMOTE KEYPAD
Use 4137AD/6137/6128
5137AD/6139
(Addressable keypads) only
24
+
+
LATCHING TYPE GLASS
BREAK DETECTOR LOOP
-
Data in
+
Data out
NO CONNECTION
TRANSFORMER
16.5VAC, 40VA
ADEMCO No.1361
(IN CANADA
USE No. 1361CN)
or 4300 IF
X-10 DEVICES
WILL BE USED
11
ZONE 1
CHARGING
VOLTAGE
13.7VDC
See
Connect to
Installation
24hr. 120VAC,
Instructions for 60 Hz Outlet
required
capacity
Replace
every
3 years
3
BLK (-)
GEL CELL
BATTERY
2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR LOOP
(Also supports NO/NC Burg contacts)
Connect to
12VDC, 4AH
or 12VDC, 7AH
RED (+)
Blue
Jumper
(note 5)
J7 Header
J8 Header
1. Not Used
1. In 2 (Printer DTR) Optional programming:
Out 1: Open/close or keypad-like sounding
2. Ground
2. GroundOut 2: Armed LED
3. Out 1 (Ground Start) 3. In 3 (4300 sync)
Out 4: Ready LED
4. In 4 (4300 sync)
4. GroundRatings for Out 1:
5. Ground
5. Out 2 (fire)
6. Out 5 (4300 data) Active: 10VDC-13.8VDC through 4k OHMS
6. Ground7. Out 3 (burg/aud. panic) 7. Out 6 (Printer RXD) Not Active: 100 OHMS to ground
Ratings for out 2-4:
8. Ground
8. Ground
Active: 10VDC-13.8VDC through 5k OHMS
9. Ground
9. Out 4 (silent panic/
Not Active: 1k OHMS to ground
duress)
(Refer to Installation Instructions for information concerning Direct Wire
Downloading and printer connections using the 4100SM Serial Module.)
(B TIP
RO
WN
)
R
(G ING
RA
Y)
(G TIP
RE
EN
)
RI
(R NG
ED
)
1. Zone 1 may be selected for EOLR supervised
4. Zone 8 supports 2-wire latching type glass break detectors.
or normally closed (no EOLR) operation via
See Installation Instructions for recommended type and
cut jumper. (Cut red jumper for normally closed
maximum number of detectors supported.
operation. Do not cut for Fire Usage). Zones 2-8
5.
Cut
blue jumper to disable supervision of alarm sounder output.
may be selected for either operation via program
Leave jumper intact to supervise output. (See Installation
field *41.
Instructions for Programming and Wiring Instructions).
2. Zone 1 supports 2-wire smoke detectors.
See Installation Instructions for recommended type
and maximum number of detectors supported.
BATTERY
TABS
3. Zone 7 may be used for remote keyswitch arming/disarming.
See Installation Instructions for wiring instructions.
Red Jumper
(note 1)
NOTES:
2k EOLR
(note 1,4)
30
MAKE CONNECTIONS USING
No. 4142TR CABLE
J8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
EARTH GROUND
Connect to good earth
ground to maintain immunity to transients.
See Instructions for
proper grounding.
DOC LOAD NO.: 5
WARNING: TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRICAL
SHOCK, DISCONNECT
TELCO JACK BEFORE
SERVICING THIS PANEL.
THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL
FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION'S
STANDARD 72 (NATIONAL FIRE
PROTECTION ASSOC., BATTERYMARCH
PARK. QUINCY, MA. 02269). PRINTED
INFORMATION DESCRIBING PROPER
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, TESTING,
MAINTENANCE, EVACUATION PLANNING
AND REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE
PROVIDED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT.
USE UL LISTED ENERGY CABLE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS
Polling loop rating: 128mA max. See
Installation Instructions for maximum
COMPLIES WITH FCC RULES, PART 68
number of devices supported and
FCC REGISTRATION NO. AC398U-68192-AL-E
maximum wire run length
RINGER EQUIVALENCE: 0.7B
CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM SIGNAL
TO A FIRE ALARM HEADQUARTERS OR A
CENTRAL STATION SHALL BE PERMITED
ONLY WITH THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL
AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THE
BURGLAR ALARM SIGNAL SHALL NOT BE
CONNECTED TO A POLICE EMERGENCY
NUMBER.
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF
FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE
FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE
MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE
RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE
THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791
Copyright © 1999 PITTWAY CORPORATION
¬.9&l
K3271V1 9/00
Download PDF
Similar pages